3GPP TS 36.331 V8.6.0 (2009-06)
Technical Specification
3rd Generation Partnership Project;
Technical Specification Group Radio Access Network;
Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA)
Radio Resource Control (RRC);
Protocol specification
(Release 8)

	
The present document has been developed within the 3rd Generation Partnership Project (3GPP TM) and may be further elaborated for the purposes of 3GPP.
The present document has not been subject to any approval process by the 3GPP Organizational Partners and shall not be implemented.	
This Specification is provided for future development work within 3GPP only. The Organizational Partners accept no liability for any use of this Specification.
Specifications and reports for implementation of the 3GPP TM system should be obtained via the 3GPP Organizational Partners' Publications Offices.




Keywords
UMTS, radio

3GPP
Postal address

3GPP support office address
650 Route des Lucioles - Sophia Antipolis
Valbonne - FRANCE
Tel.: +33 4 92 94 42 00 Fax: +33 4 93 65 47 16
Internet
http://www.3gpp.org

Copyright Notification
No part may be reproduced except as authorized by written permission.
The copyright and the foregoing restriction extend to reproduction in all media.

ฉ 2009, 3GPP Organizational Partners (ARIB, ATIS, CCSA, ETSI, TTA, TTC).
All rights reserved.

UMTS is a Trade Mark of ETSI registered for the benefit of its members
3GPP is a Trade Mark of ETSI registered for the benefit of its Members and of the 3GPP Organizational Partners
LTE is a Trade Mark of ETSI currently being registered for the benefit of its Members and of the 3GPP Organizational Partners
GSMฎ and the GSM logo are registered and owned by the GSM Association


Contents
Foreword	11
1	Scope	12
2	References	12
3	Definitions, symbols and abbreviations	14
3.1	Definitions	14
3.2	Abbreviations	14
4	General	16
4.1	Introduction	16
4.2	Architecture	16
4.2.1	UE states and state transitions including inter RAT	16
4.2.2	Signalling radio bearers	18
4.3	Services	18
4.3.1	Services provided to upper layers	18
4.3.2	Services expected from lower layers	19
4.4	Functions	19
5	Procedures	20
5.1	General	20
5.1.1	Introduction	20
5.1.2	General requirements	20
5.2	System information	20
5.2.1	Introduction	20
5.2.1.1	General	20
5.2.1.2	Scheduling	21
5.2.1.3	System information validity and notification of changes	21
5.2.1.4	Indication of ETWS notification	22
5.2.2	System information acquisition	22
5.2.2.1	General	22
5.2.2.2	Initiation	23
5.2.2.3	System information required by the UE	23
5.2.2.4	System information acquisition by the UE	23
5.2.2.5	Essential system information missing	24
5.2.2.6	Actions upon reception of the MasterInformationBlock message	24
5.2.2.7	Actions upon reception of the SystemInformationBlockType1 message	24
5.2.2.8	Actions upon reception of SystemInformation messages	25
5.2.2.9	Actions upon reception of SystemInformationBlockType2	25
5.2.2.10	Actions upon reception of SystemInformationBlockType3	25
5.2.2.11	Actions upon reception of SystemInformationBlockType4	25
5.2.2.12	Actions upon reception of SystemInformationBlockType5	25
5.2.2.13	Actions upon reception of SystemInformationBlockType6	25
5.2.2.14	Actions upon reception of SystemInformationBlockType7	25
5.2.2.15	Actions upon reception of SystemInformationBlockType8	25
5.2.2.16	Actions upon reception of SystemInformationBlockType9	26
5.2.2.17	Actions upon reception of SystemInformationBlockType10	26
5.2.2.18	Actions upon reception of SystemInformationBlockType11	27
5.2.3	Acquisition of an SI message	28
5.3	Connection control	28
5.3.1	Introduction	28
5.3.1.1	RRC connection control	28
5.3.1.2	Security	29
5.3.1.3	Connected mode mobility	30
5.3.2	Paging	30
5.3.2.1	General	30
5.3.2.2	Initiation	31
5.3.2.3	Reception of the Paging message by the UE	31
5.3.3	RRC connection establishment	31
5.3.3.1	General	31
5.3.3.2	Initiation	32
5.3.3.3	Actions related to transmission of RRCConnectionRequest message	34
5.3.3.4	Reception of the RRCConnectionSetup by the UE	35
5.3.3.5	Cell re-selection while T300, T302, T303 or T305 is running	35
5.3.3.6	T300 expiry	36
5.3.3.7	T302, T303 or T305 expiry or stop	36
5.3.3.8	Reception of the RRCConnectionReject by the UE	36
5.3.3.9	Abortion of RRC connection establishment	37
5.3.4	Initial security activation	37
5.3.4.1	General	37
5.3.4.2	Initiation	37
5.3.4.3	Reception of the SecurityModeCommand by the UE	37
5.3.5	RRC connection reconfiguration	38
5.3.5.1	General	38
5.3.5.2	Initiation	39
5.3.5.3	Reception of an RRCConnectionReconfiguration not including the mobilityControlInfo by the UE	39
5.3.5.4	Reception of an RRCConnectionReconfiguration including the mobilityControlInfo by the UE (handover)	39
5.3.5.5	Reconfiguration failure	41
5.3.5.6	T304 expiry (handover failure)	41
5.3.6	Counter check	42
5.3.6.1	General	42
5.3.6.2	Initiation	42
5.3.6.3	Reception of the CounterCheck message by the UE	42
5.3.7	RRC connection re-establishment	43
5.3.7.1	General	43
5.3.7.2	Initiation	43
5.3.7.3	Actions following cell selection while T311 is running	44
5.3.7.4	Actions related to transmission of RRCConnectionReestablishmentRequest message	44
5.3.7.5	Reception of the RRCConnectionReestablishment by the UE	45
5.3.7.6	T311 expiry	45
5.3.7.7	T301 expiry or selected cell no longer suitable	46
5.3.7.8	Reception of RRCConnectionReestablishmentReject by the UE	46
5.3.8	RRC connection release	46
5.3.8.1	General	46
5.3.8.2	Initiation	46
5.3.8.3	Reception of the RRCConnectionRelease by the UE	46
5.3.8.4	T320 expiry	47
5.3.9	RRC connection release requested by upper layers	47
5.3.9.1	General	47
5.3.9.2	Initiation	47
5.3.10	Radio resource configuration	47
5.3.10.0	General	47
5.3.10.1	SRB addition/ modification	48
5.3.10.2	DRB release	48
5.3.10.3	DRB addition/ modification	48
5.3.10.4	MAC main reconfiguration	49
5.3.10.5	Semi-persistent scheduling reconfiguration	49
5.3.10.6	Physical channel reconfiguration	49
5.3.11	Radio link failure related actions	49
5.3.11.1	Detection of physical layer problems in RRC_CONNECTED	49
5.3.11.2	Recovery of physical layer problems	49
5.3.11.3	Detection of radio link failure	50
5.3.12	UE actions upon leaving RRC_CONNECTED	50
5.3.13	UE actions upon PUCCH/ SRS release request	50
5.4	Inter-RAT mobility	50
5.4.1	Introduction	50
5.4.2	Handover to E-UTRA	51
5.4.2.1	General	51
5.4.2.2	Initiation	51
5.4.2.3	Reception of the RRCConnectionReconfiguration by the UE	51
5.4.2.4	Reconfiguration failure	52
5.4.2.5	T304 expiry (handover to E-UTRA failure)	52
5.4.3	Mobility from E-UTRA	53
5.4.3.1	General	53
5.4.3.2	Initiation	53
5.4.3.3	Reception of the MobilityFromEUTRACommand by the UE	53
5.4.3.4	Successful completion of the mobility from E-UTRA	54
5.4.3.5	Mobility from E-UTRA failure	54
5.4.4	Handover from E-UTRA preparation request (CDMA2000)	55
5.4.4.1	General	55
5.4.4.2	Initiation	55
5.4.4.3	Reception of the HandoverFromEUTRAPreparationRequest by the UE	55
5.4.5	UL handover preparation transfer (CDMA2000)	55
5.4.5.1	General	55
5.4.5.2	Initiation	56
5.4.5.3	Actions related to transmission of the ULHandoverPreparationTransfer message	56
5.4.5.4	Failure to deliver the ULHandoverPreparationTransfer message	56
5.4.6	Inter-RAT cell change order to E-UTRAN	56
5.4.6.1	General	56
5.4.6.2	Initiation	56
5.4.6.3	UE fails to complete an inter-RAT cell change order	56
5.5	Measurements	57
5.5.1	Introduction	57
5.5.2	Measurement configuration	58
5.5.2.1	General	58
5.5.2.2	Measurement identity removal	59
5.5.2.3	Measurement identity addition/ modification	59
5.5.2.4	Measurement object removal	60
5.5.2.5	Measurement object addition/ modification	60
5.5.2.6	Reporting configuration removal	61
5.5.2.7	Reporting configuration addition/ modification	61
5.5.2.8	Quantity configuration	62
5.5.2.9	Measurement gap configuration	62
5.5.3	Performing measurements	62
5.5.3.1	General	62
5.5.3.2	Layer 3 filtering	63
5.5.4	Measurement report triggering	64
5.5.4.1	General	64
5.5.4.2	Event A1 (Serving becomes better than threshold)	66
5.5.4.3	Event A2 (Serving becomes worse than threshold)	66
5.5.4.4	Event A3 (Neighbour becomes offset better than serving)	66
5.5.4.5	Event A4 (Neighbour becomes better than threshold)	67
5.5.4.6	Event A5 (Serving becomes worse than threshold1 and neighbour becomes better than threshold2)	68
5.5.4.7	Event B1 (Inter RAT neighbour becomes better than threshold)	68
5.5.4.8	Event B2 (Serving becomes worse than threshold1 and inter RAT neighbour becomes better than threshold2)	69
5.5.5	Measurement reporting	70
5.5.6	Measurement related actions	71
5.5.6.1	Actions upon handover and re-establishment	71
5.5.6.2	Speed dependant scaling of measurement related parameters	72
5.6	Other	73
5.6.1	DL information transfer	73
5.6.1.1	General	73
5.6.1.2	Initiation	73
5.6.1.3	Reception of the DLInformationTransfer by the UE	73
5.6.2	UL information transfer	73
5.6.2.1	General	73
5.6.2.2	Initiation	73
5.6.2.3	Actions related to transmission of ULInformationTransfer message	74
5.6.2.4	Failure to deliver ULInformationTransfer message	74
5.6.3	UE capability transfer	74
5.6.3.1	General	74
5.6.3.2	Initiation	75
5.6.3.3	Reception of the UECapabilityEnquiry by the UE	75
5.6.4	CSFB to 1x Parameter transfer	75
5.6.4.1	General	75
5.6.4.2	Initiation	76
5.6.4.3	Actions related to transmission of CSFBParametersRequestCDMA2000 message	76
5.6.4.4	Reception of the CSFBParametersResponseCDMA2000 message	76
5.7	Generic error handling	76
5.7.1	General	76
5.7.2	ASN.1 violation or encoding error	76
5.7.3	Field set to a not comprehended value	76
5.7.4	Mandatory field missing	77
5.7.5	Not comprehended field	77
6	Protocol data units, formats and parameters (tabular & ASN.1)	77
6.1	General	77
6.2	RRC messages	78
6.2.1	General message structure	78
	EUTRA-RRC-Definitions	78
	BCCH-BCH-Message	78
	BCCH-DL-SCH-Message	79
	PCCH-Message	79
	DL-CCCH-Message	79
	DL-DCCH-Message	80
	UL-CCCH-Message	80
	UL-DCCH-Message	80
6.2.2	Message definitions	81
	CounterCheck	81
	CounterCheckResponse	82
	CSFBParametersRequestCDMA2000	82
	CSFBParametersResponseCDMA2000	83
	DLInformationTransfer	83
	HandoverFromEUTRAPreparationRequest (CDMA2000)	84
	MasterInformationBlock	84
	MeasurementReport	85
	MobilityFromEUTRACommand	86
	Paging	87
	RRCConnectionReconfiguration	88
	RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete	90
	RRCConnectionReestablishment	90
	RRCConnectionReestablishmentComplete	91
	RRCConnectionReestablishmentReject	91
	RRCConnectionReestablishmentRequest	92
	RRCConnectionReject	92
	RRCConnectionRelease	93
	RRCConnectionRequest	95
	RRCConnectionSetup	96
	RRCConnectionSetupComplete	96
	SecurityModeCommand	97
	SecurityModeComplete	98
	SecurityModeFailure	98
	SystemInformation	98
	SystemInformationBlockType1	99
	UECapabilityEnquiry	101
	UECapabilityInformation	101
	ULHandoverPreparationTransfer (CDMA2000)	102
	ULInformationTransfer	102
6.3	RRC information elements	103
6.3.1	System information blocks	103
	SystemInformationBlockType2	103
	SystemInformationBlockType3	105
	SystemInformationBlockType4	106
	SystemInformationBlockType5	107
	SystemInformationBlockType6	108
	SystemInformationBlockType7	109
	SystemInformationBlockType8	110
	SystemInformationBlockType9	112
	SystemInformationBlockType10	112
	SystemInformationBlockType11	113
6.3.2	Radio resource control information elements	114
	AntennaInfo	114
	CQI-ReportConfig	114
	DRB-Identity	115
	LogicalChannelConfig	115
	MAC-MainConfig	116
	PDCP-Config	118
	PDSCH-Config	119
	PHICH-Config	120
	PhysicalConfigDedicated	120
	P-Max	121
	PRACH-Config	121
	PresenceAntennaPort1	122
	PUCCH-Config	122
	PUSCH-Config	123
	RACH-ConfigCommon	124
	RACH-ConfigDedicated	125
	RadioResourceConfigCommon	126
	RadioResourceConfigDedicated	127
	RLC-Config	128
	SchedulingRequestConfig	130
	SoundingRS-UL-Config	130
	SPS-Config	131
	TDD-Config	133
	TimeAlignmentTimer	133
	TPC-PDCCH-Config	133
	UplinkPowerControl	134
6.3.3	Security control information elements	135
	NextHopChainingCount	135
	SecurityAlgorithmConfig	135
	ShortMAC-I	136
6.3.4	Mobility control information elements	136
	AdditionalSpectrumEmission	136
	ARFCN-ValueCDMA2000	136
	ARFCN-ValueEUTRA	136
	ARFCN-ValueGERAN	137
	ARFCN-ValueUTRA	137
	BandclassCDMA2000	137
	BandIndicatorGERAN	137
	CarrierFreqCDMA2000	138
	CarrierFreqGERAN	138
	CarrierFreqsGERAN	138
	CDMA2000-Type	139
	CellIdentity	139
	CellIndexList	139
	CellReselectionPriority	140
	CSFB-RegistrationParam1XRTT	140
	CellGlobalIdEUTRA	141
	CellGlobalIdUTRA	141
	CellGlobalIdGERAN	142
	CellGlobalIdCDMA2000	142
	MobilityControlInfo	142
	MobilityParametersCDMA2000 (1xRTT)	143
	MobilityStateParameters	144
	PhysCellId	144
	PhysCellIdRange	144
	PhysCellIdCDMA2000	145
	PhysCellIdGERAN	145
	PhysCellIdentityUTRA-FDD	145
	PhysCellIdUTRA-TDD	145
	PLMN-Identity	146
	PreRegistrationInfoHRPD	146
	Q-RxLevMin	147
	Q-OffsetRange	147
	Q-OffsetRangeInterRAT	147
	ReselectionThreshold	148
	SpeedStateScaleFactors	148
	SystemTimeInfoCDMA2000	148
	TrackingAreaCode	149
	T-Reselection	149
6.3.5	Measurement information elements	149
	AllowedMeasBandwidth	149
	Hysteresis	149
	MeasConfig	150
	MeasGapConfig	151
	MeasId	151
	MeasIdToAddModList	152
	MeasObjectCDMA2000	152
	MeasObjectEUTRA	153
	MeasObjectGERAN	154
	MeasObjectId	154
	MeasObjectToAddModList	154
	MeasObjectUTRA	154
	MeasResults	155
	QuantityConfig	157
	ReportConfigEUTRA	158
	ReportConfigId	160
	ReportConfigInterRAT	160
	ReportConfigToAddModList	161
	ReportInterval	162
	RSRP-Range	162
	RSRQ-Range	162
	TimeToTrigger	163
6.3.6	Other information elements	163
	C-RNTI	163
	DedicatedInfoCDMA2000	163
	DedicatedInfoNAS	163
	FilterCoefficient	163
	MMEC	164
	NeighCellConfig	164
	RAND-CDMA2000 (1xRTT)	164
	RAT-Type	165
	RRC-TransactionIdentifier	165
	S-TMSI	165
	UE-CapabilityRAT-ContainerList	165
	UE-EUTRA-Capability	166
	UE-TimersAndConstants	169
6.4	RRC multiplicity and type constraint values	170
	Multiplicity and type constraint definitions	170
	End of EUTRA-RRC-Definitions	170
7	Variables and constants	171
7.1	UE variables	171
	EUTRA-UE-Variables	171
	VarMeasConfig	171
	VarMeasReportList	172
	VarShortMAC-Input	172
	Multiplicity and type constraint definitions	172
	End of EUTRA-UE-Variables	172
7.2	Counters	173
7.3	Timers (Informative)	174
7.4	Constants	175
8	Protocol data unit abstract syntax	175
8.1	General	175
8.2	Structure of encoded RRC messages	175
8.3	Basic production	175
8.4	Extension	175
8.5	Padding	176
9	Specified and default radio configurations	176
9.1	Specified configurations	176
9.1.1	Logical channel configurations	176
9.1.1.1	BCCH configuration	176
9.1.1.2	CCCH configuration	177
9.1.1.3	PCCH configuration	177
9.1.2	SRB configurations	177
9.1.2.1	SRB1	177
9.1.2.2	SRB2	177
9.2	Default radio configurations	177
9.2.1	SRB configurations	177
9.2.1.1	SRB1	177
9.2.1.2	SRB2	178
9.2.2	Default MAC main configuration	178
9.2.3	Default semi-persistent scheduling configuration	178
9.2.4	Default physical channel configuration	178
9.2.5	Default values timers and constants	179
10	Radio information related interactions between network nodes	179
10.1	General	179
10.2	Inter-node RRC messages	179
10.2.1	General	179
	EUTRA-InterNodeDefinitions	180
10.2.2	Message definitions	180
	HandoverCommand	180
	HandoverPreparationInformation	181
	UERadioAccessCapabilityInformation	181
10.3	Inter-node RRC information element definitions	182
	AS-Config	182
	AS-Context	183
	ReestablishmentInfo	183
	RRM-Config	184
10.4	Inter-node RRC multiplicity and type constraint values	185
	Multiplicity and type constraints definitions	185
	End of EUTRA-InterNodeDefinitions	185
10.5	Mandatory information in AS-Config	185
11	UE capability related constraints and performance requirements	187
11.1	UE capability related constraints	187
11.2	Processing delay requirements for RRC procedures	187
Annex A (informative):	Guidelines, mainly on use of ASN.1	189
A.1	Introduction	189
A.2	Procedural specification	190
A.2.1	General principles	190
A.2.2	More detailed aspects	190
A.3	PDU specification	190
A.3.1	General principles	190
A.3.1.1	ASN.1 sections	190
A.3.1.2	ASN.1 identifier naming conventions	191
A.3.1.3	Text references using ASN.1 identifiers	192
A.3.2	High-level message structure	192
A.3.3	Message definition	193
A.3.4	Information elements	194
A.3.5	Fields with optional presence	195
A.3.6	Fields with conditional presence	196
A.3.7	Guidelines on use of lists with elements of SEQUENCE type	196
A.4	Extension of the PDU specifications	197
A.4.1	General principles to ensure compatibility	197
A.4.2	Critical extension of messages	197
A.4.3	Non-critical extension of messages	197
A.5	Guidelines regarding inclusion of transaction identifiers in RRC messages	198
A.6	Protection of RRC messages (informative)	198
A.7	Miscellaneous	199
Annex B (normative):	Release 8 AS feature handling	200
B.1	Feature group indicators	200
B.2	CSG support	203
Annex C (informative):	Change history	204


Foreword
This Technical Specification has been produced by the 3rd Generation Partnership Project (3GPP).
The contents of the present document are subject to continuing work within the TSG and may change following formal TSG approval. Should the TSG modify the contents of the present document, it will be re-released by the TSG with an identifying change of release date and an increase in version number as follows:
Version x.y.z
where:
x	the first digit:
1	presented to TSG for information;
2	presented to TSG for approval;
3	or greater indicates TSG approved document under change control.
y	the second digit is incremented for all changes of substance, i.e. technical enhancements, corrections, updates, etc.
z	the third digit is incremented when editorial only changes have been incorporated in the document.

1	Scope
The present document specifies the Radio Resource Control protocol for the UE-E-UTRAN radio interface.
The scope of the present document also includes:
-	the radio related information transported in a transparent container between source eNB and target eNB upon inter eNB handover;
-	the radio related information transported in a transparent container between a source or target eNB and another system upon inter RAT handover.
2	References
The following documents contain provisions which, through reference in this text, constitute provisions of the present document.
* References are either specific (identified by date of publication, edition number, version number, etc.) or nonspecific.
* For a specific reference, subsequent revisions do not apply.
* For a non-specific reference, the latest version applies. In the case of a reference to a 3GPP document (including a GSM document), a non-specific reference implicitly refers to the latest version of that document in the same Release as the present document.
[1]	3GPP TR 21.905: "Vocabulary for 3GPP Specifications".
[2]	3GPP TS nn.nnn: "Radio Interface Protocol Architecture".
Editor's note:	Document not yet available.
[3]	3GPP TS 36.302: "Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); "Services provided by the physical layer ".
[4]	3GPP TS 36.304: "Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); "UE Procedures in Idle Mode".
[5]	3GPP TS 36.306 "Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); "UE Radio Access Capabilities".
[6]	3GPP TS 36.321: "Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); "Medium Access Control (MAC) protocol specification".
[7]	3GPP TS 36.322:"Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); "Radio Link Control (RLC) protocol specification".
[8]	3GPP TS 36.323: "Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); "Packet Data Convergence Protocol (PDCP) Specification".
[9]	3GPP TS 36.300: "Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA) and Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRAN); Overall description; Stage 2".
[10]	3GPP TS 22.011: "Service accessibility".
[11]	3GPP TS 23.122: "Non-Access-Stratum (NAS) functions related to Mobile Station (MS) in idle mode".
[12]	3GPP2 C.S0002-A: "Physical Layer Standard for cdma2000 Spread Spectrum Systems  Release A".
[13]	ITU-T Recommendation X.680 (07/2002) "Information Technology - Abstract Syntax Notation One (ASN.1): Specification of basic notation" (Same as the ISO/IEC International Standard 8824-1).
[14]	ITU-T Recommendation X.681 (07/2002) "Information Technology - Abstract Syntax Notation One (ASN.1): Information object specification" (Same as the ISO/IEC International Standard 8824-2).
[15]	ITU-T Recommendation X.691 (07/2002) "Information technology - ASN.1 encoding rules: Specification of Packed Encoding Rules (PER)" (Same as the ISO/IEC International Standard 8825-2).
[16]	3GPP TS 36.133: "Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); "Requirements for support of radio resource management".
[17]	3GPP TS 25.101: "Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (UTRA); "User Equipment (UE) radio transmission and reception (FDD)".
[18]	3GPP TS 25.102: "Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (UTRA); "User Equipment (UE) radio transmission and reception (TDD)".
[19]	3GPP TS 25.331:"Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (UTRA); "Radio Resource Control (RRC); Protocol specification".
[20]	3GPP TS 45.005: "Radio transmission and reception".
[21]	3GPP TS 36.211: "Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); "Multiplexing and channel coding".
[22]	3GPP TS 36.212: "Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); "Multiplexing and channel coding".
[23]	3GPP TS 36.213: "Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); "Physical layer procedures".
[24]	3GPP2 C.S0057-B: "Band Class Specification for cdma2000 Spread Spectrum Systems".
[25]	3GPP2 C.S0005-A: "Upper Layer (Layer 3) Signaling Standard for cdma2000 Spread Spectrum Systems  Release A, Addendum 2".
[26]	3GPP2 C.S0024-A: "cdma2000 High Rate Packet Data Air Interface Specification".
[27]	3GPP TS 23.003: "Numbering, addressing and identification".
[28]	3GPP TS 45.008: "Radio subsystem link control".
[29]	3GPP TS 25.133: "Requirements for Support of Radio Resource Management (FDD)".
[30]	3GPP TS 25.123: "Requirements for Support of Radio Resource Management (TDD)".
[31]	3GPP TS 36.401: "Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); "Architecture description".
[32]	3GPP TS 33.401: "3GPP System Architecture Evolution (SAE); Security architecture".
[33]	3GPP2 A.S0008-C: Interoperability Specification (IOS) for High Rate Packet Data (HRPD) Radio Access Network Interfaces with Session Control in the Access Network
[34]	3GPP2 C.S0004-A: Signaling Link Access Control (LAC) Standard for cdma2000 Spread Spectrum Systems  Addendum 2
[35]	3GPP TS 24.301: "Non-Access-Stratum (NAS) protocol for Evolved Packet System (EPS); Stage 3".
[36]	3GPP TS 44.060: "General Packet Radio Service (GPRS); Mobile Station (MS) - Base Station System (BSS) interface; Radio Link Control/Medium Access Control (RLC/MAC) protocol".
[37]	3GPP TS 23.041: "Technical realization of Cell Broadcast Service (CBS)".
[38]	3GPP TS 23.038: "Alphabets and Language".
[39]	3GPP TS 36.413: "Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRAN); S1 Application Protocol (S1 AP)".
[40]	3GPP TS 25.304: "Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (UTRAN); User Equipment (UE) procedures in idle mode and procedures for cell reselection in connected mode".
[41]	3GPP TS 23.401: "General Packet Radio Service (GPRS) enhancements for Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network (E-UTRAN) access".
[42]	3GPP TS 36.101: "Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); "User Equipment (UE) radio transmission and reception".
[43]	3GPP TS 44.005: "Data Link (DL) Layer General Aspects".
[44]	3GPP2 C.S0087-0: E-UTRAN - cdma2000 Connectivity and Interworking Air Interface Specification
[45]	3GPP TS 44.018: "Mobile radio interface layer 3 specification; Radio Resource Control (RRC) protocol".
[46]	3GPP TS 25.223: "Spreading and modulation (TDD)".
[47]	3GPP TS 36.104: "Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); Base Station (BS) radio transmission and reception".
[48]	3GPP TS 36.214: "Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); Physical layer - Measurements".
[49]	3GPP TS 24.008: "Mobile radio interface layer 3 specification; Core network protocols; Stage 3".
3	Definitions, symbols and abbreviations
3.1	Definitions
For the purposes of the present document, the terms and definitions given in TR 21.905 [1] and the following apply. A term defined in the present document takes precedence over the definition of the same term, if any, in TR 21.905 [1].
Information element: A structural element containing a single or multiple fields is referred as information element.
Field: The individual contents of an information element are referred as fields.
3.2	Abbreviations
For the purposes of the present document, the abbreviations given in TR 21.905 [1] and the following apply. An abbreviation defined in the present document takes precedence over the definition of the same abbreviation, if any, in TR 21.905 [1].
1xRTT	CDMA2000 1x Radio Transmission Technology
AM	Acknowledged Mode
ASN.1	Abstract Syntax Notation.1
ARQ	Automatic Repeat Request
AS	Access Stratum
BCCH	Broadcast Control Channel
BCH	Broadcast Channel
CCCH	Common Control Channel
CCO	Cell Change Order
CP	Control Plane
C-RNTI	Cell RNTI
CSG	Closed Subscriber Group
DCCH	Dedicated Control Channel
DRB	(user) Data Radio Bearer
DRX	Discontinuous Reception
DTCH	Dedicated Traffic Channel
DL	Downlink
DL-SCH	Downlink Shared Channel
ETWS	Earthquake and Tsunami Warning System
E-UTRA	Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access
E-UTRAN	Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network
ENB	Evolved Node B
EPC	Enhanced Packet Core
EPS	Enhanced Packet System
FLOOR	Mathematical function used to round down i.e. to the nearest integer having a lower value
FDD	Frequency Division Duplex
FFS	For Further Study
GERAN	GSM/EDGE Radio Access Network
GSM	Global System for Mobile Communications
HARQ	Hybrid Automatic Repeat Request
HRPD	CDMA2000 High Rate Packet Data
IE	Information element
IMEI	International Mobile Equipment Identity
IMSI	International Mobile Subscriber Identity
kB	Kilobyte (1000 bytes)
L1	Layer 1
L2	Layer 2
L3	Layer 3
MAC	Medium Access Control
MBMS	Multimedia Broadcast Multicast Service
MBSFN	Multimedia Broadcast multicast service Single Frequency Network
MIB	Master Information Block
N/A	Not Applicable
NACC	Network Assisted Cell Change
NAS	Non Access Stratum
PCCH	Paging Control Channel
PDU	Protocol Data Unit
PDCP	Packet Data Convergence Protocol
PLMN	Public Land Mobile Network
QoS	Quality of Service
RACH	Random Access CHannel
RAT	Radio Access Technology
RB	Radio Bearer
RLC	Radio Link Control
RNTI	Radio Network Temporary Identifier
RRC	Radio Resource Control
RSCP	Received Signal Code Power
RSRP	Reference Signal Received Power
RSSI	Received Signal Strength Indicator
SAE	System Architecture Evolution
SAP	Service Access Point
SFN	System Frame Number
SI	System Information
SIB	System Information Block
SI-RNTI	System Information RNTI
SPS	Semi-Persistent Scheduling
SRB	Signalling Radio Bearer
S-TMSI	SAE Temporary Mobile Station Identifier
TA	Tracking Area
TDD	Time Division Duplex
TM	Transparent Mode
TPC-RNTI	Transmit Power Control RNTI
UE	User Equipment
UICC	Universal Integrated Circuit Card
UL	Uplink
UM	Unacknowledged Mode
UL-SCH	Uplink Shared Channel
UP	User Plane
UTRAN	Universal Terrestrial Radio Access Network
In the ASN.1, lower case may be used for some (parts) of the above abbreviations e.g. c-RNTI
4	General
4.1	Introduction
This specification is organised as follows:
-	sub-clause 4.2 describes the RRC protocol model;
-	sub-clause 4.3 specifies the services provided to upper layers as well as the services expected from lower layers;
-	sub-clause 4.4 lists the RRC functions;
-	clause 5 specifies RRC procedures, including UE state transitions;
-	clause 6 specifies the RRC message in a mixed format (i.e. tabular & ASN.1 together);
-	clause 7 specifies the variables (including protocol timers and constants) and counters to be used by the UE;
-	clause 8 specifies the encoding of the RRC messages;
-	clause 9 specifies the specified and default radio configurations;
-	clause 10 specifies the RRC messages transferred across network nodes;
-	clause 11 specifies the UE capability related constraints and performance requirements.
4.2	Architecture
4.2.1	UE states and state transitions including inter RAT
A UE is in RRC_CONNECTED when an RRC connection has been established. If this is not the case, i.e. no RRC connection is established, the UE is in RRC_IDLE state. The RRC states can further be characterised as follows:
-	RRC_IDLE:
-	A UE specific DRX may be configured by upper layers.
-	UE controlled mobility;
-	The UE:
-	Monitors a Paging channel to detect incoming calls, system information change, and for ETWS capable UEs, ETWS notification;
-	Performs neighbouring cell measurements and cell (re-)selection;
-	Acquires system information.
-	RRC_CONNECTED:
-	Transfer of unicast data to/from UE.
-	At lower layers, the UE may be configured with a UE specific DRX.
-	Network controlled mobility, i.e. handover and cell change order with optional network assistance (NACC) to GERAN;
-	The UE:
-	Monitors a Paging channel and/ or System Information Block Type 1 contents to detect system information change, and for ETWS capable UEs, ETWS notification;
Monitors control channels associated with the shared data channel to determine if data is scheduled for it;
-	Provides channel quality and feedback information;
-	Performs neighbouring cell measurements and measurement reporting;
-	Acquires system information.
The following figure not only provides an overview of the RRC states in E-UTRA, but also illustrates the mobility support between E-UTRAN, UTRAN and GERAN.

Figure 4.2.1-1: E-UTRA states and inter RAT mobility procedures, 3GPP
The following figure illustrates the mobility support between E-UTRAN, CDMA2000 1xRTT and CDMA2000 HRPD. The details of the CDMA2000 state models are out of the scope of this specification.

Figure 4.2.1-2: Mobility procedures between E-UTRA and CDMA2000
The inter-RAT handover procedure(s) supports the case of signalling, conversational services, non-conversational services and combinations of these. The mobility between E-UTRA and non-3GPP systems other than CDMA2000 is FFS.
In addition to the state transitions shown in Figure 4.2.1-1 and Figure 4.2.1-2, there is support for connection release with redirection information from E-UTRA RRC_CONNECTED to GERAN, UTRAN and CDMA2000 (HRPD Idle/ 1xRTT Dormant mode).
4.2.2	Signalling radio bearers
"Signalling Radio Bearers" (SRBs) are defined as Radio Bearers (RB) that are used only for the transmission of RRC and NAS messages. More specifically, the following three SRBs are defined:
-	SRB0 is for RRC messages using the CCCH logical channel;
-	SRB1 is for RRC messages (which may include a piggybacked NAS message) as well as for NAS messages prior to the establishment of SRB2, all using DCCH logical channel;
-	SRB2 is for NAS messages, using DCCH logical channel. SRB2 has a lower-priority than SRB1 and is always configured by E-UTRAN after security activation.
In downlink piggybacking of NAS messages is used only for one dependant (i.e. with joint success/ failure) procedure: bearer establishment/ modification/ release. In uplink NAS message piggybacking is used only for transferring the initial NAS message during connection setup.
NOTE:		The NAS messages transferred via SRB2 are also contained in RRC messages, which however do not include any RRC protocol control information.
Once security is activated, all RRC messages on SRB1 and SRB2, including those containing NAS or non-3GPP messages, are integrity protected and ciphered by PDCP. NAS independently applies integrity protection and ciphering to the NAS messages.
4.3	Services
4.3.1	Services provided to upper layers
The RRC protocol offers the following services to upper layers:
-	Broadcast of common control information;
-	Notification of UEs in RRC_IDLE, e.g. about a terminating call, for ETWS;
-	Transfer of dedicated control information, i.e. information for one specific UE.
4.3.2	Services expected from lower layers
In brief, the following are the main services that RRC expects from lower layers:
-	PDCP: integrity protection and ciphering;
-	RLC: reliable and in-sequence transfer of information, without introducing duplicates and with support for segmentation and concatenation.
Further details about the services provided by Packet Data Convergence Protocol layer (e.g. integrity and ciphering) are provided in TS 36.323 [8]. The services provided by Radio Link Control layer (e.g. the RLC modes) are specified in TS 36.322 [7]. Further details about the services provided by Medium Access Control layer (e.g. the logical channels) are provided in TS 36.321 [6]. The services provided by physical layer (e.g. the transport channels) are specified in TS 36.302 [3].
4.4	Functions
The RRC protocol includes the following main functions:
-	Broadcast of system information:
-	Including NAS common information;
-	Information applicable for UEs in RRC_IDLE, e.g. cell (re-)selection parameters, neighbouring cell information and information (also) applicable for UEs in RRC_CONNECTED, e.g. common channel configuration information.
-	Including ETWS notification;
-	RRC connection control:
-	Paging;
-	Establishment/ modification/ release of RRC connection, including e.g. assignment/ modification of UE identity (C-RNTI), establishment/ modification/ release of SRB1 and SRB2, access class barring;
-	Initial security activation, i.e. initial configuration of AS integrity protection (SRBs) and AS ciphering (SRBs, DRBs);
-	RRC connection mobility including e.g. intra-frequency and inter-frequency handover, associated security handling, i.e. key/ algorithm change, specification of RRC context information transferred between network nodes;
-	Establishment/ modification/ release of RBs carrying user data (DRBs);
-	Radio configuration control including e.g. assignment/ modification of ARQ configuration, HARQ configuration, DRX configuration;
-	QoS control including assignment/ modification of semi-persistent scheduling (SPS) configuration information for DL and UL, assignment/ modification of parameters for UL rate control in the UE, i.e. allocation of a priority and a prioritised bit rate (PBR) for each RB;
-	Recovery from radio link failure;
-	Inter-RAT mobility including e.g. security activation, transfer of RRC context information;
-	Measurement configuration and reporting:
-	Establishment/ modification/ release of measurements (e.g. intra-frequency, inter-frequency and inter- RAT measurements);
-	Setup and release of measurement gaps;
-	Measurement reporting;
-	Other functions including e.g. transfer of dedicated NAS information and non-3GPP dedicated information, transfer of UE radio access capability information, support for E-UTRAN sharing (multiple PLMN identities);
-	Generic protocol error handling;
-	Support of self-configuration and self-optimisation;
NOTE:		Random access is specified entirely in the MAC including initial transmission power estimation.
5	Procedures
5.1	General
5.1.1	Introduction
The procedural requirements are structured according to the main functional areas: system information (5.2), connection control (5.3), inter-RAT mobility (5.4) and measurements (5.5). In addition there is a sub-clause other (5.6) that covers e.g. NAS dedicated information transfer, UE capability transfer. Finally, sub-clause 5.7 specifies the generic error handling.
5.1.2	General requirements
The UE shall:
1>	process the received messages in order of reception by RRC, i.e. the processing of a message shall be completed before starting the processing of a subsequent message;
NOTE 1:	E-UTRAN may initiate a subsequent procedure prior to receiving the UE's response of a previously initiated procedure.
1>	within a sub-clause execute the steps according to the order specified in the procedural description;
1>	set the rrc-TransactionIdentifier in the response message, if included, to the same value as included in the message received from E-UTRAN that triggered the response message;
1>	upon receiving a choice value set to setup:
2>	apply the corresponding received configuration and start using the associated resources, unless explicitly specified otherwise;
1>	upon receiving a choice value set to release:
2>	clear the corresponding configuration and stop using the associated resources;
NOTE 2:	At each point in time, the UE keeps a single value for each field except for during handover when the UE temporarily stores the previous configuration so it can revert back upon handover failure. In other words: when the UE reconfigures a field, the existing value is released except for during handover.
5.2	System information
5.2.1	Introduction
5.2.1.1	General
System information is divided into the MasterInformationBlock (MIB) and a number of SystemInformationBlocks (SIBs). The MIB includes a limited number of most essential and most frequently transmitted parameters that are needed to acquire other information from the cell, and is transmitted on BCH. SIBs other than SystemInformationBlockType1 are carried in SystemInformation (SI) messages and mapping of SIBs to SI messages is flexibly configurable by schedulingInfoList included in SystemInformationBlockType1, with restrictions that: each SIB is contained only in a single SI message, only SIBs having the same scheduling requirement (periodicity) can be mapped to the same SI message, and SystemInformationBlockType2 is always mapped to the SI message that corresponds to the first entry in the list of SI messages in schedulingInfoList. There may be multiple SI messages transmitted with the same periodicity. SystemInformationBlockType1 and all SI messages are transmitted on DL-SCH.
5.2.1.2	Scheduling
The MIB uses a fixed schedule with a periodicity of 40 ms and repetitions made within 40 ms. The first transmission of the MIB is scheduled in subframe #0 of radio frames for which the SFN mod 4 = 0, and repetitions are scheduled in subframe #0 of all other radio frames.
The SystemInformationBlockType1 uses a fixed schedule with a periodicity of 80 ms and repetitions made within 80 ms. The first transmission of SystemInformationBlockType1 is scheduled in subframe #5 of radio frames for which the SFN mod 8 = 0, and repetitions are scheduled in subframe #5 of all other radio frames for which SFN mod 2 = 0.
The SI messages are transmitted within periodically occurring time domain windows (referred to as SI-windows) using dynamic scheduling. Each SI message is associated with a SI-window and the SI-windows of different SI messages do not overlap. That is, within one SI-window only the corresponding SI is transmitted. The length of the SI-window is common for all SI messages, and is configurable. Within the SI-window, the corresponding SI message can be transmitted a number of times in any subframe other than MBSFN subframes, uplink subframes in TDD, and subframe #5 of radio frames for which SFN mod 2 = 0. The UE acquires the detailed time-domain scheduling (and other information, e.g. frequency-domain scheduling, used transport format) from decoding SI-RNTI on PDCCH (see TS 36.321 [6]).
A single SI-RNTI is used to address SystemInformationBlockType1 as well as all SI messages.
SystemInformationBlockType1 configures the SI-window length and the transmission periodicity for the SI messages.
5.2.1.3	System information validity and notification of changes
Change of system information (other than for ETWS) only occurs at specific radio frames, i.e. the concept of a modification period is used. System information may be transmitted a number of times with the same content within a modification period, as defined by its scheduling. The modification period boundaries are defined by SFN values for which SFN mod m= 0, where m is the number of radio frames comprising the modification period. The modification period is configured by system information.
When the network changes (some of the) system information, it first notifies the UEs about this change, i.e. this may be done throughout a modification period. In the next modification period, the network transmits the updated system information. These general principles are illustrated in figure 5.2.1.3-1, in which different colours indicate different system information. Upon receiving a change notification, the UE acquires the new system information immediately from the start of the next modification period. The UE applies the previously acquired system information until the UE acquires the new system information.

Figure 5.2.1.3-1: Change of system Information
The Paging message is used to inform UEs in RRC_IDLE and UEs in RRC_CONNECTED about a system information change. If the UE receives a Paging message including the systemInfoModification, it knows that the system information will change at the next modification period boundary. Although the UE may be informed about changes in system information, no further details are provided e.g. regarding which system information will change.
SystemInformationBlockType1 includes a value tag, systemInfoValueTag, that indicates if a change has occurred in the SI messages. UEs may use systemInfoValueTag, e.g. upon return from out of coverage, to verify if the previously stored SI messages are still valid. Additionally, the UE considers stored system information to be invalid after 3 hours from the moment it was successfully confirmed as valid, unless specified otherwise.
E-UTRAN may not update systemInfoValueTag upon change of some system information e.g. ETWS information, regularly changing parameters like CDMA2000 system time (see 6.3). Similarly, E-UTRAN may not include the systemInfoModification within the Paging message upon change of some system information.
The UE verifies that stored system information remains valid by either checking systemInfoValueTag in SystemInformationBlockType1 after the modification period boundary, or attempting to find the systemInfoModification indication at least modificationPeriodCoeff times during the modification period in case no paging is received, in every modification period. If no paging message is received by the UE during a modification period, the UE may assume that no change of system information will occur at the next modification period boundary. If UE in RRC_CONNECTED, during a modification period, receives one paging message, it may deduce from the presence/ absence of systemInfoModification whether a change of system information other than ETWS information will occur in the next modification period or not.
ETWS capable UEs in RRC_CONNECTED shall attempt to read paging at least once every defaultPagingCycle to check whether ETWS notification is present or not.
5.2.1.4	Indication of ETWS notification
ETWS primary notification and/ or ETWS secondary notification can occur at any point in time. The Paging message is used to inform ETWS capable UEs in RRC_IDLE and UEs in RRC_CONNECTED about presence of an ETWS primary notification and/ or ETWS secondary notification. If the UE receives a Paging message including the etws-Indication, it shall start receiving the ETWS primary notification and/ or ETWS secondary notification according to schedulingInfoList contained in SystemInformationBlockType1.
ETWS primary notification is contained in SystemInformationBlockType10 and ETWS secondary notification is contained in SystemInformationBlockType11. Segmentation can be applied for the delivery of a secondary notification. The segmentation is fixed for transmission of a given secondary notification within a cell (i.e. the same segment size for a given segment with the same messageIdentifier, serialNumber and warningMessageSegmentNumber).
5.2.2	System information acquisition
5.2.2.1	General

Figure 5.2.2.1-1: System information acquisition, normal
The UE applies the system information acquisition procedure to acquire the AS- and NAS- system information that is broadcasted by the E-UTRAN. The procedure applies to UEs in RRC_IDLE and UEs in RRC_CONNECTED.
5.2.2.2	Initiation
The UE shall apply the system information acquisition procedure upon selecting (e.g. upon power on) and upon re-selecting a cell, after handover completion, after entering E-UTRA from another RAT, upon return from out of coverage, upon receiving a notification that the system information has changed, upon receiving an indication about the presence of an ETWS notification, upon receiving a request from CDMA2000 upper layers and upon exceeding the maximum validity duration. Unless explicitly stated otherwise in the procedural specification, the system information acquisition procedure overwrites any stored system information, i.e. delta configuration is not applicable for system information and the UE discontinues using a field if it is absent in system information unless explicitly specified otherwise.
5.2.2.3	System information required by the UE
The UE shall:
1>	ensure having a valid version, as defined below, of (at least) the following system information, also referred to as the required system information:
2>	if in RRC_IDLE:
3>	the MasterInformationBlock and SystemInformationBlockType1 as well as SystemInformationBlockType2 through SystemInformationBlockType8, depending on support of the concerned RATs;
2>	if in RRC_CONNECTED:
3>	the MasterInformationBlock, SystemInformationBlockType1 and SystemInformationBlockType2 as well as SystemInformationBlockType8, depending on support of CDMA2000;
1>	delete any stored system information after 3 hours from the moment it was confirmed to be valid as defined in 5.2.1.3, unless specified otherwise;
1>	consider any stored system information except SystemInformationBlockType10 and SystemInformationBlockType11 to be invalid if systemInfoValueTag included in the SystemInformationBlockType1 is different from the one of the stored system information;
5.2.2.4	System information acquisition by the UE
The UE shall:
1>	apply the specified BCCH configuration defined in 9.1.1.1;
1>	if the procedure is triggered by a system information change notification:
2>	start acquiring the required system information, as defined in 5.2.2.3, from the beginning of the modification period following the one in which the change notification was received;
NOTE 1:	The UE continues using the previously received system information until the new system information has been acquired.
1>	if the UE is in RRC_IDLE and enters a cell for which the UE does not have stored a valid version of the system information required in RRC_IDLE, as defined in 5.2.2.3:
2>	acquire, using the system information acquisition procedure as defined in 5.2.3, the system information required in RRC_IDLE, as defined in 5.2.2.3;
1>	following successful handover completion to a cell for which the UE does not have stored a valid version of the system information required in RRC_CONNECTED, as defined in 5.2.2.3:
2>	acquire, using the system information acquisition procedure as defined in 5.2.3, the system information required in RRC_CONNECTED, as defined in 5.2.2.3;
2> upon acquiring the concerned system information:
3>	discard the corresponding radio resource configuration information included in the radioResourceConfigCommon previously received in a dedicated message, if any;
1>	following a request from CDMA2000 upper layers:
2>	acquire SystemInformationBlockType8, as defined in 5.2.3;
1>	neither initiate the RRC connection establishment procedure nor initiate transmission of the RRCConnectionReestablishmentRequest message until the UE has a valid version of the MasterInformationBlock and SystemInformationBlockType1 messages as well as SystemInformationBlockType2 ;
1>	if the UE is ETWS capable:
2>	upon entering a cell during RRC_IDLE, following successful handover or upon connection re-establishment:
3>		discard any previously buffered warningMessageSegment;
3>	clear, if any, the current values of messageIdentifier and serialNumber for SystemInformationBlockType11;
2>	when the UE acquires SystemInformationBlockType1 following ETWS indication, upon entering a cell during RRC_IDLE, following successful handover and upon connection re-establishment:
3>	if schedulingInfoList indicates that SystemInformationBlockType10 is present:
4>	start acquiring SystemInformationBlockType10 immediately;
3>	if schedulingInfoList indicates that SystemInformationBlockType11 is present:
4>	start acquiring SystemInformationBlockType11 immediately;
NOTE 2:	UEs shall start acquiring SystemInformationBlockType10 and SystemInformationBlockType11 as described above even when systemInfoValueTag in SystemInformationBlockType1 has not changed.
The UE may apply the received SIBs immediately, i.e. the UE does not need to delay using a SIB until all SI messages have been received. The UE may delay applying the received SIBs until completing lower layer procedures associated with a received or a UE originated RRC message, e.g. an ongoing random access procedure.
NOTE 3:	While attempting to acquire a particular SIB, if the UE detects from schedulingInfoList that it is no longer present, the UE should stop trying to acquire the particular SIB.
5.2.2.5	Essential system information missing
The UE shall
1>	if in RRC_IDLE or in RRC_CONNECTED while T311 is running; and
1>	the UE is unable to acquire the MasterInformationBlock, the SystemInformationBlockType1 or the SystemInformationBlockType2:
2>	treat the cell as barred in accordance with TS 36.304 [4];
5.2.2.6	Actions upon reception of the MasterInformationBlock message
Upon receiving the MasterInformationBlock message the UE shall:
1>	apply the radio resource configuration included in the phich-Config;
1> if the UE is in RRC_IDLE or if the UE is in RRC_CONNECTED while T311 is running:
2>	if the UE has no valid system information stored according to 5.2.2.3 for the concerned cell:
3>	apply the received value of dl-Bandwidth to the ul-Bandwidth until SystemInformationBlockType2 is received;
5.2.2.7	Actions upon reception of the SystemInformationBlockType1 message
Upon receiving the SystemInformationBlockType1 message the UE shall:
1>	forward the cellIdentity to upper layers;
1>	forward the trackingAreaCode to upper layers;
5.2.2.8	Actions upon reception of SystemInformation messages
No UE requirements related to the contents of the SystemInformation messages apply other than those specified elsewhere e.g. within procedures using the concerned system information, the corresponding field descriptions.
5.2.2.9	Actions upon reception of SystemInformationBlockType2
Upon receiving SystemInformationBlockType2, the UE shall:
1>	if upper layers indicate that a (UE specific) paging cycle is configured:
2>	Apply the shortest of the (UE specific) paging cycle and the defaultPagingCycle included in the radioResourceConfigCommon;
1>	else:
2>	Apply the defaultPagingCycle included in the radioResourceConfigCommon;
1>	if the mbsfn-SubframeConfigList is included:
2>	consider that no other DL assignments occur in the MBSFN subframes indicated in the IE mbsfn-SubframeConfigList:
1>	apply the configuration included in the radioResourceConfigCommon;
1>	apply the specified PCCH configuration defined in 9.1.1.3;
1> 	not apply the timeAlignmentTimerCommon;
5.2.2.10	Actions upon reception of SystemInformationBlockType3
No UE requirements related to the contents of this SystemInformationBlock apply other than those specified elsewhere e.g. within procedures using the concerned system information, the corresponding field descriptions.
5.2.2.11	Actions upon reception of SystemInformationBlockType4
No UE requirements related to the contents of this SystemInformationBlock apply other than those specified elsewhere e.g. within procedures using the concerned system information, the corresponding field descriptions.
5.2.2.12	Actions upon reception of SystemInformationBlockType5
No UE requirements related to the contents of this SystemInformationBlock apply other than those specified elsewhere e.g. within procedures using the concerned system information, the corresponding field descriptions.
5.2.2.13	Actions upon reception of SystemInformationBlockType6
No UE requirements related to the contents of this SystemInformationBlock apply other than those specified elsewhere e.g. within procedures using the concerned system information, the corresponding field descriptions.
5.2.2.14	Actions upon reception of SystemInformationBlockType7
No UE requirements related to the contents of this SystemInformationBlock apply other than those specified elsewhere e.g. within procedures using the concerned system information, the corresponding field descriptions.
5.2.2.15	Actions upon reception of SystemInformationBlockType8
Upon receiving SystemInformationBlockType8, the UE shall:
1>	if the systemTimeInfo is included:
2>	forward the systemTimeInfo to CDMA2000 upper layers;
1>	if the UE is in RRC_IDLE and if searchWindowSize is included:
2>	forward the searchWindowSize to CDMA2000 upper layers;
1>	if parametersHRPD is included;
2>	forward the preRegistrationInfoHRPD to CDMA2000 upper layers only if the UE has not received the preRegistrationInfoHRPD within an RRCConnectionReconfiguration message after entering this cell;
2>	if the cellReselectionParametersHRPD is included:
3>	forward the neighCellListHRPD to the CDMA2000 upper layers;
1>	if the parameters1XRTT is included:
2>	if the csfb-RegistrationParam1XRTT is included:
3>	forward the csfb-RegistrationParam1XRTT to the CDMA2000 upper layers which will use this information to determine if a CS registration/re-registration towards CDMA2000 1xRTT in the EUTRA cell is required;
2>	else:
3>	indicate to CDMA2000 upper layers that CSFB Registration to CDMA2000 1xRTT is not allowed;
2>	if the longCodeState1XRTT is included:
3>	forward the longCodeState1XRTT to CDMA2000 upper layers;
2>	if the cellReselectionParameters1XRTT is included:
3>	forward the neighCellList1XRTT to the CDMA2000 upper layers;
5.2.2.16	Actions upon reception of SystemInformationBlockType9
Upon receiving SystemInformationBlockType9, the UE shall:
1>	if hnb-Name is included, forward the hnb-Name to upper layers;
5.2.2.17	Actions upon reception of SystemInformationBlockType10
Upon receiving SystemInformationBlockType10, the UE shall:
1>	if the received values of messageIdentifier and serialNumber are not the same (each value is the same as the corresponding parameter of a stored pair) as any of the up to two value pairs (messageIdentifier and serialNumber for SystemInformationBlockType10) stored for this PLMN; or there are no value pairs stored for this PLMN:
2>	store, for this PLMN, the received values of messageIdentifier and serialNumber for SystemInformationBlockType10 as a pair, if necessary, replacing the oldest value pair (messageIdentifier and serialNumber for SystemInformationBlockType10) stored for this PLMN;
2>	forward the received warningType, warningSecurityInfo (if present), messageIdentifier and serialNumber to upper layers;
1>	else:
2>	update the storage time of the messageIdentifier and serialNumber for SystemInformationBlockType10 pair that are equal to the values in the received SystemInformationBlockType10;
2>	discard the received SystemInformationBlockType10 contents;
The UE shall store the values of messageIdentifier and serialNumber for SystemInformationBlockType10, as a pair, for the last two times that it forwarded warningType to upper layers. It shall store values separately for each PLMN for which it holds values. The UE should remove from storage values of messageIdentifier and serialNumber for SystemInformationBlockType10 when 3 hours have elapsed since they were last stored.
5.2.2.18	Actions upon reception of SystemInformationBlockType11
Upon receiving SystemInformationBlockType11, the UE shall:
1>	if the received values of messageIdentifier and serialNumber are the same (each value is the same as the corresponding parameter of a stored pair) as one of the, up to two, value pairs (messageIdentifier and serialNumber) for which a complete warningMessage has been passed to upper layers, stored for this PLMN:
2>	update the storage time of the messageIdentifier and serialNumber for SystemInformationBlockType11 pair that are equal to the values in the received SystemInformationBlockType11;
2>	discard the received SystemInformationBlockType11 contents;
2>	stop reception of SystemInformationBlockType11;
1>	else:
2>	if there is no current value for messageIdentifier and serialNumber for SystemInformationBlockType11; or
2>	if either the received value of messageIdentifier or of serialNumber or of both are different from the current values of messageIdentifier and serialNumber for SystemInformationBlockType11:
3>	use the received values of messageIdentifer and serialNumber for SystemInformationBlockType11 as the current values of  messageIdentifier and serialNumber for SystemInformationBlockType11;
3>	discard any previously buffered warningMessageSegment;
3>	if all segments of a warning message have been received:
4>	assemble the warningMessage from the received warningMessageSegment;
4>	forward the received warningMessage, messageIdentifier, serialNumber and dataCodingScheme to upper layers;
4>	stop reception of SystemInformationBlockType11;
4>	store the current values of messageIdentifier and serialNumber for SystemInformationBlockType11 as a messageIdentifier and serialNumber for SystemInformationBlockType11 pair  for which a complete warningMessage has been passed to upper layers for this PLMN, replacing the oldest stored value pair if necessary;
4>	discard the current values of messageIdentifier and serialNumber for SystemInformationBlockType11;
3>	else:
4>	store the received warningMessageSegment;
4>	continue reception of SystemInformationBlockType11;
2>	else if all segments of a warning message have been received:
3>	assemble the warningMessage from the received warningMessageSegment;
3>	forward the received complete warningMessage, messageIdentifier, serialNumber and dataCodingScheme to upper layers;
3>	stop reception of SystemInformationBlockType11;
3>	store the current values of messageIdentifier and serialNumber for SystemInformationBlockType11 as a messageIdentifier and serialNumber for SystemInformationBlockType11 pair  for which a complete warningMessage has been passed to upper layers for this PLMN, replacing the oldest stored value pair if necessary;
3>	discard the current values of messageIdentifier and serialNumber for SystemInformationBlockType11;
2>	else:
3>	continue reception of SystemInformationBlockType11;
The UE shall store the values of messageIdentifier and serialNumber for SystemInformationBlockType11 associated with the last two times that it forwarded a complete warningMessage to upper layers. It shall store values separately for each PLMN for which it holds values. The UE should remove from storage values of messageIdentifier and serialNumber for SystemInformationBlockType11 when 3 hours have elapsed since they were last stored. 
The UE should discard the current values of messageIdentifier and serialNumber for SystemInformationBlockType11 if they have remained unchanged for a period of 3 hours from the time that they were first used or if it detects that SystemInformationBlockType11 is no longer scheduled in SystemInformationBlockType1. If the UE discards the current values of messageIdentifier and serialNumber for SystemInformationBlockType11 it shall also discard any stored warningMessageSegments.
5.2.3	Acquisition of an SI message
When acquiring an SI message, the UE shall:
1>	determine the start of the SI-window for the concerned SI message as follows:
2>	for the concerned SI message, determine the number n which corresponds to the order of entry in the list of SI messages configured by schedulingInfoList in SystemInformationBlockType1;
2>	determine the integer value x = (n  1)*w, where w is the si-WindowLength;
2>	the SI-window starts at the subframe #a, where a = x mod 10, in the radio frame for which SFN mod T = FLOOR(x/10), where T is the si-Periodicity of the concerned SI message;
NOTE:	E-UTRAN should configure an SI-window of 1 ms only if all SIs are scheduled before subframe #5 in radio frames for which SFN mod 2 = 0.
1>	receive DL-SCH using the SI-RNTI from the start of the SI-window and continue until the end of the SI-window whose absolute length in time is given by si-WindowLength, or until the SI message was received, excluding the following subframes:
2>	subframe #5 in radio frames for which SFN mod 2 = 0;
2>	any MBSFN subframes;
2>	any uplink subframes in TDD;
1>	if the SI message was not received by the end of the SI-window, repeat reception at the next SI-window occasion for the concerned SI message;
5.3	Connection control
5.3.1	Introduction
5.3.1.1	RRC connection control
RRC connection establishment involves the establishment of SRB1. E-UTRAN completes RRC connection establishment prior to completing the establishment of the S1 connection, i.e. prior to receiving the UE context information from the EPC. Consequently, AS security is not activated during the initial phase of the RRC connection. During this initial phase of the RRC connection, the E-UTRAN may configure the UE to perform measurement reporting. However, the UE only accepts a handover message when security has been activated.
Upon receiving the UE context from the EPC, E-UTRAN activates security (both ciphering and integrity protection) using the initial security activation procedure. The RRC messages to activate security (command and successful response) are integrity protected, while ciphering is started only after completion of the procedure. That is, the response to the message used to activate security is not ciphered, while the subsequent messages (e.g. used to establish SRB2 and DRBs) are both integrity protected and ciphered.
After having initiated the initial security activation procedure, E-UTRAN initiates the establishment of SRB2 and DRBs, i.e. E-UTRAN may do this prior to receiving the confirmation of the initial security activation from the UE. In any case, E-UTRAN will apply both ciphering and integrity protection for the RRC connection reconfiguration messages used to establish SRB2 and DRBs. E-UTRAN should release the RRC connection if the initial security activation and/ or the radio bearer establishment fails (i.e. security activation and DRB establishment are triggered by a joint S1-procedure, which does not support partial success).
For SRB2 and DRBs, security is always activated from the start, i.e. the E-UTRAN does not establish these bearers prior to activating security.
The release of the RRC connection is initiated by E-UTRAN. The procedure may be used to re-direct the UE to another frequency or RAT. In exceptional cases the UE may abort the RRC connection, i.e. move to RRC_IDLE without notifying E-UTRAN.
5.3.1.2	Security
AS security comprises of the integrity protection of RRC signalling (SRBs) as well as the ciphering of RRC signalling (SRBs) and user data (DRBs).
RRC handles the configuration of the security parameters which are part of the AS configuration: the integrity protection algorithm, the ciphering algorithm and two parameters, namely the keyChangeIndicator and the nextHopChainingCount, which are used by the UE to determine the AS security keys upon handover and/ or connection re-establishment.
The integrity protection algorithm is common for signalling radio bearers SRB1 and SRB2. The ciphering algorithm is common for all radio bearers (i.e. SRB1, SRB2 and DRBs). Neither integrity protection nor ciphering applies for SRB0.
RRC integrity and ciphering are always activated together, i.e. in one message/ procedure. RRC integrity and ciphering are never de-activated. However, it is possible to switch to a NULL ciphering algorithm (eea0).
NOTE 1:	UICC-less emergency calls are not supported in this release of the specification.
NOTE 2:	Lower layers discard RRC messages for which the integrity check has failed and indicate the integrity verification check failure to RRC.
The AS applies three different security keys: one for the integrity protection of RRC signalling (KRRCint), one for the ciphering of RRC signalling (KRRCenc) and one for the ciphering of user data (KUPenc). All three AS keys are derived from the KeNB key. The KeNB is based on the KASME key, which is handled by upper layers.
Upon connection establishment new AS keys are derived. No AS-parameters are exchanged to serve as inputs for the derivation of the new AS keys at connection establishment.
The integrity and ciphering of the RRC message used to perform handover is based on the security configuration used prior to the handover and is performed by the source eNB.
The integrity and ciphering algorithms can only be changed upon handover. The four AS keys (KeNB, KRRCint, KRRCenc and KUPenc) change upon every handover and connection re-establishment. The keyChangeIndicator is used upon handover and indicates whether the UE should use the keys associated with the latest available KASME key. The nextHopChainingCount parameter is used upon handover and connection re-establishment by the UE when deriving the new KeNB that is used to generate KRRCint, KRRCenc and KUPenc (see TS 33.401 [32]). An intra cell handover procedure may be used to change the keys in RRC_CONNECTED.
For each radio bearer an independent counter (COUNT, as specified in TS 36.323 [8]) is maintained for each direction. For each DRB, the COUNT is used as input for ciphering. For each SRB, the COUNT is used as input for both ciphering and integrity protection. It is not allowed to use the same COUNT value more than once for a given security key. In order to limit the signalling overhead, individual messages/ packets include a short sequence number (PDCP SN, as specified in TS 36.323 [8]). In addition, an overflow counter mechanism is used: the hyper frame number (TX_HFN and RX_HFN, as specified in TS 36.323 [8]). The HFN needs to be synchronized between the UE and the eNB. The eNB is responsible for avoiding reuse of the COUNT with the same RB identity and with the same KeNB, e.g. due to the transfer of large volumes of data, release and establishment of new RBs. In order to avoid such re-use, the eNB may e.g. use different RB identities for successive RB establishments, trigger an intra cell handover or an RRC_CONNECTED to RRC_IDLE to RRC_CONNECTED transition.
For each SRB, the value provided by RRC to lower layers to derive the 5-bit BEARER parameter used as input for ciphering and for integrity protection is the value of the corresponding srb-Identity with the MSBs padded with zeroes.
5.3.1.3	Connected mode mobility
In RRC_CONNECTED, the network controls UE mobility, i.e. the network decides when the UE shall move to which cell (which may be on another frequency or RAT). For network controlled mobility in RRC_CONNECTED, handover is the only procedure that is defined. The network triggers the handover procedure e.g. based on radio conditions, load. To facilitate this, the network may configure the UE to perform measurement reporting (possibly including the configuration of measurement gaps). The network may also initiate handover blindly, i.e. without having received measurement reports from the UE.
Before sending the handover message to the UE, the source eNB prepares one or more target cells. The target eNB generates the message used to perform the handover, i.e. the message including the AS-configuration to be used in the target cell. The source eNB transparently (i.e. does not alter values/ content) forwards the handover message/ information received from the target to the UE. When appropriate, the source eNB may initiate data forwarding for (a subset of) the DRBs.
After receiving the handover message, the UE attempts to access the target cell at the first available RACH occasion according to Random Access resource selection defined in TS 36.321 [6], i.e. the handover is asynchronous. Consequently, when allocating a dedicated preamble for the random access in the target cell, E-UTRA shall ensure it is available from the first RACH occasion the UE may use. Upon successful completion of the handover, the UE sends a message used to confirm the handover.
After the successful completion of handover, PDCP SDUs may be re-transmitted in the target cell. This only applies for DRBs using RLC-AM mode. The further details are specified in TS 36.323 [8]. After the successful completion of handover, the SN and the HFN are reset except for the DRBs using RLC-AM mode (for which both SN and HFN continue). The further details are specified in TS 36.323 [8].
One UE behaviour to be performed upon handover is specified, i.e. this is regardless of the handover procedures used within the network (e.g. whether the handover includes X2 or S1 signalling procedures).
The source eNB should, for some time, maintain a context to enable the UE to return in case of handover failure. After having detected handover failure, the UE attempts to resume the RRC connection either in the source or in another cell using the RRC re-establishment procedure. This connection resumption succeeds only if the accessed cell is prepared, i.e. concerns a cell of the source eNB or of another eNB towards which handover preparation has been performed.
5.3.2	Paging
5.3.2.1	General

Figure 5.3.2.1-1: Paging
The purpose of this procedure is to transmit paging information to a UE in RRC_IDLE and/ or to inform UEs in RRC_IDLE and UEs in RRC_CONNECTED about a system information change and/ or about an ETWS primary notification and/ or ETWS secondary notification. The paging information is provided to upper layers, which in response may initiate RRC connection establishment, e.g. to receive an incoming call.
5.3.2.2	Initiation
E-UTRAN initiates the paging procedure by transmitting the Paging message at the UEs paging occasion as specified in TS 36.304 [4]. E-UTRAN may address multiple UEs within a Paging message by including one PagingRecord for each UE. E-UTRAN may also indicate a change of system information and/ or provide an ETWS notification in the Paging message.
5.3.2.3	Reception of the Paging message by the UE
Upon receiving the Paging message, the UE shall:
1>	if in RRC_IDLE, for each of the PagingRecord, if any, included in the Paging message:
2>	if the ue-Identity included in the PagingRecord matches one of the UE identities allocated by upper layers:
3>	forward the ue-Identity and the cn-Domain to the upper layers;
1>	if the systemInfoModification is included:
2> re-acquire the required system information using the system information acquisition procedure as specified in 5.2.2.
1>	if the etws-Indication is included and the UE is ETWS capable:
2>	re-acquire SystemInformationBlockType1 immediately, i.e., without waiting until the next system information modification period boundary;
2>	if the schedulingInfoList indicates that SystemInformationBlockType10 is present:
3>	acquire SystemInformationBlockType10;
2> if the schedulingInfoList indicates that SystemInformationBlockType11 is present:
3>	acquire SystemInformationBlockType11;
5.3.3	RRC connection establishment
5.3.3.1	General

Figure 5.3.3.1-1: RRC connection establishment, successful

Figure 5.3.3.1-2: RRC connection establishment, network reject
The purpose of this procedure is to establish an RRC connection. RRC connection establishment involves SRB1 establishment. The procedure is also used to transfer the initial NAS dedicated information/ message from the UE to E-UTRAN.
E-UTRAN applies the procedure as follows:
-	to establish SRB1 only.
5.3.3.2	Initiation
The UE initiates the procedure when upper layers request establishment of an RRC connection while the UE is in RRC_IDLE.
Upon initiation of the procedure, the UE shall:
1>	if the UE is establishing the RRC connection for mobile terminating calls:
2>	if timer T302 is running:
3>	consider access to the cell as barred;
2>	else:
3>	consider access to the cell as not barred;
1>	else if the UE is establishing the RRC connection for emergency calls:
2>	if SystemInformationBlockType2 includes the ac-BarringInfo:
3>	if the ac-BarringForEmergency is set to FALSE:
4>	consider access to the cell as not barred;
3>	else if the UE has one or more Access Classes, as stored on the USIM, with a value in the range 11..15, which is valid for the UE to use according to TS 22.011 [10] and TS 23.122 [11]:
NOTE 1:	ACs 12, 13, 14 are only valid for use in the home country and ACs 11, 15 are only valid for use in the HPLMN/ EHPLMN.
4>	if the ac-BarringInfo includes ac-BarringForMO-Data, and for all of the valid Access Classes for the UE, the corresponding bit in the ac-BarringForSpecialAC contained in ac-BarringForMO-Data is set to one:
5>	consider access to the cell as barred;
4>	else:
5>	consider access to the cell as not barred;
3>	else:
4>	consider access to the cell as barred;
2>	else:
3>	consider access to the cell as not barred;
1>	else if the UE is establishing the RRC connection for mobile originating calls:
2>	if timer T302 or T303 is running:
3>	consider access to the cell as barred;
2>	else if SystemInformationBlockType2 includes the ac-BarringInfo and the ac-BarringForMO-Data is present:
3>	if the UE has one or more Access Classes, as stored on the USIM, with a value in the range 11..15, which is valid for the UE to use according to TS 22.011 [10] and TS 23.122 [11], and
3>	for at least one of these Access Classes the corresponding bit in the ac-BarringForSpecialAC contained in ac-BarringForMO-Data is set to zero:
4>	consider access to the cell as not barred;
3>	else:
4>	draw a random number rand uniformly distributed in the range: 0 ? rand < 1;
4>	if rand is lower than the value indicated by ac-BarringFactor included in ac-BarringForMO-Data:
5>	consider access to the cell as not barred;
4>	else:
5>	consider access to the cell as barred;
2>	else:
3>	consider access to the cell as not barred;
1>	else (the UE is establishing the RRC connection for mobile originating signalling):
2>	if timer T302 or T305 is running:
3>	consider access to the cell as barred;
2>	else if SystemInformationBlockType2 includes the ac-BarringInfo and the ac-BarringForMO-Signalling is present:
3>	if the UE has one or more Access Classes, as stored on the USIM, with a value in the range 11..15, which is valid for the UE to use according to TS 22.011 [10] and TS 23.122 [11], and
3>	for at least one of these Access Classes the corresponding bit in the ac-BarringForSpecialAC contained in ac-BarringForMO-Signalling is set to zero:
4>	consider access to the cell as not barred;
3>	else:
4>	draw a random number rand uniformly distributed in the range: 0 ? rand < 1;
4>	if rand is lower than the value indicated by ac-BarringFactor included in ac-BarringForMO-Signalling:
5>	consider access to the cell as not barred;
4>	else:
5>	consider access to the cell as barred;
2>	else:
3>	consider access to the cell as not barred;
1>	if access to the cell, as specified above, is not barred:
2>	apply the default physical channel configuration as specified in 9.2.4;
2> apply the default semi-persistent scheduling configuration as specified in 9.2.3;
2> apply the default MAC main configuration as specified in 9.2.2;
2> apply the CCCH configuration as specified in 9.1.1.2;
2>	apply the timeAlignmentTimerCommon included in SystemInformationBlockType2;
2>	start timer T300;
2>	initiate transmission of the RRCConnectionRequest message in accordance with 5.3.3.3;
NOTE 2:	Upon initiating the connection establishment procedure, the UE is not required to ensure it maintains up to date system information applicable only for UEs in RRC_IDLE state. However, the UE needs to perform system information acquisition upon cell re-selection.
1>	else:
2>	if the UE is establishing the RRC connection for mobile originating calls and if both timers T302 and T303 are not running:
3>	draw a random number rand that is uniformly distributed in the range 0 ? rand < 1;
3>	start timer T303 with the timer value calculated as follows, using the ac-BarringTime included in ac-BarringForMO-Data:
T303= (0.7+ 0.6 * rand) * ac-BarringTime
3>	inform upper layers about the failure to establish the RRC connection and that access barring for mobile originating calls is applicable, upon which the procedure ends;
2>	else if the UE is establishing the RRC connection for mobile originating signalling and if both timers T302 and T305 are not running:
3>	draw a random number rand that is uniformly distributed in the range 0 ? rand < 1;
3>	start timer T305 with the timer value calculated as follows, using the ac-BarringTime included in ac-BarringForMO-Signalling:
T305= (0.7+ 0.6 * rand) * ac-BarringTime
3>	inform upper layers about the failure to establish the RRC connection and that access barring for mobile originating signalling is applicable, upon which the procedure ends;
2>	else if the UE is establishing the RRC connection for emergency calls:
3>	inform upper layers about the failure to establish the RRC connection and that access barring for emergency calls is applicable, upon which the procedure ends;
2>	else:
3>	inform upper layers about the failure to establish the RRC connection, upon which the procedure ends;
5.3.3.3	Actions related to transmission of RRCConnectionRequest message
The UE shall set the contents of RRCConnectionRequest message as follows:
1>	set the ue-Identity as follows:
2>	if upper layers provide an S-TMSI:
3>	set the ue-Identity to the value received from upper layers;
2>	else:
3>	draw a random value in the range 0 .. 240-1 and set the ue-Identity to this value;
NOTE 1:	Upper layers provide the S-TMSI if the UE is registered in the TA of the current cell.
1>	set the establishmentCause in accordance with the information received from upper layers;
The UE shall submit the RRCConnectionRequest message to lower layers for transmission.
The UE shall continue cell re-selection related measurements as well as cell re-selection evaluation. If the conditions for cell re-selection are fulfilled, the UE shall perform cell re-selection as specified in 5.3.3.5.
5.3.3.4	Reception of the RRCConnectionSetup by the UE
NOTE:	Prior to this, lower layer signalling is used to allocate a C-RNTI. For further details see TS 36.321 [6];
The UE shall:
1>	perform the radio resource configuration procedure in accordance with the received radioResourceConfigDedicated and as specified in 5.3.10;
1>	if stored, discard the cell reselection priority information provided by the idleModeMobilityControlInfo or inherited from another RAT;
1>	stop timer T300;
1>	stop timer T302, if running;
1>	stop timer T303, if running;
1>	stop timer T305, if running;
1>	perform the actions as specified in 5.3.3.7;
1>	stop timer T320, if running;
1>	enter RRC_CONNECTED;
1>	stop the cell re-selection procedure;
1>	set the content of RRCConnectionSetupComplete message as follows:
2>	set the selectedPLMN-Identity to the PLMN selected by upper layers (see TS 23.122 [11], TS 24.301 [35]) from the PLMN(s) included in the plmn-IdentityList in SystemInformationBlockType1;
2>		if upper layers provide the Registered MME, include and set the registeredMME as follows:
3>	if the PLMN identity of the Registered MME is different from the PLMN selected by the upper layers:
4>	include the plmnIdentity in the registeredMME and set it to the value of the PLMN identity in the Registered MME received from upper layers;
3> set the mmegi and the mmec to the value received from upper layers;
2>	set the dedicatedInfoNAS to include the information received from upper layers;
2> submit the RRCConnectionSetupComplete message to lower layers for transmission, upon which the procedure ends;
5.3.3.5	Cell re-selection while T300, T302, T303 or T305 is running
The UE shall:
1>	if cell reselection occurs while T300, T302, T303 or T305 is running:
2>	if timer T302, T303 and/ or T305 is running:
3>	stop timer T302, T303 and T305, whichever ones were running;
3>	perform the actions as specified in 5.3.3.7;
2>	if timer T300 is running:
3>	stop timer T300;
3>	reset MAC, release the MAC configuration and re-establish RLC for all RBs that are established;
3>	inform upper layers about the failure to establish the RRC connection, upon which the procedure ends;
5.3.3.6	T300 expiry
The UE shall:
1>	if timer T300 expires:
2>	reset MAC, release the MAC configuration and re-establish RLC for all RBs that are established;
2>	inform upper layers about the failure to establish the RRC connection, upon which the procedure ends;
5.3.3.7	T302, T303 or T305 expiry or stop
The UE shall:
1>	if timer T302 expires or is stopped:
2>	inform upper layers about barring alleviation for mobile terminating access;
2>	if timer T303 is not running:
3>	inform upper layers about barring alleviation for mobile originating calls;
2>	if timer T305 is not running:
3>	inform upper layers about barring alleviation for mobile originating signalling;
1>	if timer T303 expires or is stopped:
2>	if timer T302 is not running:
3>	inform upper layers about barring alleviation for mobile originating calls;
1>	if timer T305 expires or is stopped:
2>	if timer T302 is not running:
3>	inform upper layers about barring alleviation for mobile originating signalling;
5.3.3.8	Reception of the RRCConnectionReject by the UE
The UE shall:
1>	stop timer T300;
1>	reset MAC and release the MAC configuration;
1>	start timer T302, with the timer value set to the waitTime;
1>	inform upper layers about the failure to establish the RRC connection and that access barring for mobile originating calls, mobile originating signalling and mobile terminating access is applicable, upon which the procedure ends;
5.3.3.9	Abortion of RRC connection establishment
If upper layers abort the RRC connection establishment procedure while the UE has not yet entered RRC_CONNECTED, the UE shall:
1>	stop timer T300, if running;
1>	reset MAC, release the MAC configuration and re-establish RLC for all RBs that are established;
5.3.4	Initial security activation
5.3.4.1	General

Figure 5.3.4.1-1: Security mode command, successful

Figure 5.3.4.1-2: Security mode command, failure
The purpose of this procedure is to activate AS security upon RRC connection establishment.
5.3.4.2	Initiation
E-UTRAN initiates the security mode command procedure to a UE in RRC_CONNECTED. Moreover, E-UTRAN applies the procedure as follows:
-	when only SRB1 is established, i.e. prior to establishment of SRB2 and/ or DRBs.
5.3.4.3	Reception of the SecurityModeCommand by the UE
The UE shall:
1>	derive the KeNB key, as specified in TS 33.401 [32];
1> derive the KRRCint key associated with the integrityProtAlgorithm indicated in the SecurityModeCommand message, as specified in TS 33.401 [32];
1>	request lower layers to verify the integrity protection of the SecurityModeCommand message, using the algorithm indicated by the integrityProtAlgorithm as included in the SecurityModeCommand message and the KRRCint key;
1>	if the SecurityModeCommand message passes the integrity protection check:
2> derive the KRRCenc key and the KUPenc key associated with the cipheringAlgorithm indicated in the SecurityModeCommand message, as specified in TS 33.401 [32];
2>	configure lower layers to apply integrity protection using the indicated algorithm and the KRRCint key immediately, i.e. integrity protection shall be applied to all subsequent messages received and sent by the UE, including the SecurityModeComplete message;
2>	configure lower layers to apply ciphering using the indicated algorithm, the KRRCenc key and the KUPenc key after completing the procedure, i.e. ciphering shall be applied to all subsequent messages received and sent by the UE, except for the SecurityModeComplete message which is sent unciphered;
2>	consider AS security to be activated;
2>	submit the SecurityModeComplete message to lower layers for transmission, upon which the procedure ends;
1>	else:
2>	continue using the configuration used prior to the reception of the SecurityModeCommand message, i.e. neither apply integrity protection nor ciphering.
2>	submit the SecurityModeFailure message to lower layers for transmission, upon which the procedure ends;
5.3.5	RRC connection reconfiguration
5.3.5.1	General

Figure 5.3.5.1-1: RRC connection reconfiguration, successful

Figure 5.3.5.1-2: RRC connection reconfiguration, failure
The purpose of this procedure is to modify an RRC connection, e.g. to establish/ modify/ release RBs, to perform handover, to setup/ modify/ release measurements. As part of the procedure, NAS dedicated information may be transferred from E-UTRAN to the UE.
5.3.5.2	Initiation
E-UTRAN may initiate the RRC connection reconfiguration procedure to a UE in RRC_CONNECTED. E-UTRAN applies the procedure as follows:
-	the mobilityControlInfo is included only when AS-security has been activated, and SRB2 with at least one DRB are setup and not suspended;
-	the establishment of RBs (other than SRB1, that is established during RRC connection establishment) is included only when AS security has been activated;
5.3.5.3	Reception of an RRCConnectionReconfiguration not including the mobilityControlInfo by the UE
If the RRCConnectionReconfiguration message does not include the mobilityControlInfo and the UE is able to comply with the configuration included in this message, the UE shall:
1>	if this is the first RRCConnectionReconfiguration message after successful completion of the RRC Connection Re-establishment procedure:
2>	re-establish PDCP for SRB2 and for all DRBs that are established, if any;
2>	re-establish RLC for SRB2 and for all DRBs that are established, if any;
2>	if the RRCConnectionReconfiguration message includes the radioResourceConfigDedicated:
3>	perform the radio resource configuration procedure as specified in 5.3.10;
2> resume SRB2 and all DRBs that are suspended, if any;
NOTE 1:	The handling of the radio bearers after the successful completion of the PDCP re-establishment, e.g. the re-transmission of unacknowledged PDCP SDUs (as well as the associated status reporting), the handling of the SN and the HFN, is specified in TS 36.323 [8].
1>	else:
2>	if the RRCConnectionReconfiguration message includes the radioResourceConfigDedicated:
3>	perform the radio resource configuration procedure as specified in 5.3.10;
NOTE 2:	If the RRCConnectionReconfiguration message includes the establishment of radio bearers other than SRB1, the UE may start using these radio bearers immediately, i.e. there is no need to wait for an outstanding acknowledgment of the SecurityModeComplete message.
1>	if the RRCConnectionReconfiguration message includes the dedicatedInfoNASList:
2>	forward each element of the dedicatedInfoNASList to upper layers;
1>	if the RRCConnectionReconfiguration message includes the measConfig:
2>	perform the measurement configuration procedure as specified in 5.5.2;
1>	submit the RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete message to lower layers for transmission using the new configuration, upon which the procedure ends;
5.3.5.4	Reception of an RRCConnectionReconfiguration including the mobilityControlInfo by the UE (handover)
If the RRCConnectionReconfiguration message includes the mobilityControlInfo and the UE is able to comply with the configuration included in this message, the UE shall:
1>	stop timer T310, if running;
1>	start timer T304 with the timer value set to t304, as included in the mobilityControlInfo;
1>	if the carrierFreq is included:
2>	consider the target cell to be one on the frequency indicated by the carrierFreq with a physical cell identity indicated by the targetPhysCellId;
1>	else:
2>	consider the target cell to be one on the current frequency with a physical cell identity indicated by the targetPhysCellId;
1>	start synchronising to the DL of the target cell;
NOTE 1:	The UE should perform the handover as soon as possible following the reception of the RRC message triggering the handover, which could be before confirming successful reception (HARQ and ARQ) of this message.
1>	reset MAC;
1>	re-establish PDCP for all RBs that are established;
NOTE 2:	The handling of the radio bearers after the successful completion of the PDCP re-establishment, e.g. the re-transmission of unacknowledged PDCP SDUs (as well as the associated status reporting), the handling of the SN and the HFN, is specified in TS 36.323 [8].
1>	re-establish RLC for all RBs that are established;
1>	apply the value of the newUE-Identity as the C-RNTI;
1>	 configure lower layers in accordance with the received radioResourceConfigCommon;
1>	if the RRCConnectionReconfiguration message includes the radioResourceConfigDedicated:
2>	perform the radio resource configuration procedure as specified in 5.3.10;
1>	if the keyChangeIndicator received in the securityConfigHO is set to TRUE:
2>	update the KeNB key based on the fresh KASME key taken into use with the previous successful NAS SMC procedure, as specified in TS 33.401 [32];
1>	else:
2>	update the KeNB key based on the current KeNB or the NH, using the nextHopChainingCount value indicated in the securityConfigHO, as specified in TS 33.401 [32];
1>	store the nextHopChainingCount value;
1>	if the securityAlgorithmConfig is included in the securityConfigHO:
2>	derive the KRRCint key associated with the integrityProtAlgorithm, as specified in TS 33.401 [32];
2>	derive the KRRCenc key and the KUPenc key associated with the cipheringAlgorithm, as specified in TS 33.401 [32];
1>	else:
2>	derive the KRRCint key associated with the current integrity algorithm, as specified in TS 33.401 [32];
2>	derive the KRRCenc key and the KUPenc key associated with the current ciphering algorithm, as specified in TS 33.401 [32];
1>	configure lower layers to apply the integrity protection algorithm and the KRRCint key, i.e. the integrity protection configuration shall be applied to all subsequent messages received and sent by the UE, including the message used to indicate the successful completion of the procedure;
1>	configure lower layers to apply the ciphering algorithm, the KRRCenc key and the KUPenc key, i.e. the ciphering configuration shall be applied to all subsequent messages received and sent by the UE, including the message used to indicate the successful completion of the procedure;
1>	perform the measurement related actions as specified in 5.5.6.1;
1>	if the RRCConnectionReconfiguration message includes the measConfig:
2>	perform the measurement configuration procedure as specified in 5.5.2;
1>	submit the RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete message to lower layers for transmission;
1>	if MAC successfully completes the random access procedure:
2>	stop timer T304;
2>	apply the parts of the configuration that do not require the UE to know the SFN of the target cell;
2>	apply the parts of the measurement and the radio resource configuration that require the UE to know the SFN of the target cell (e.g. measurement gaps, periodic CQI reporting, scheduling request configuration, sounding RS configuration), if any, upon acquiring the SFN of the target cell;
2>	the procedure ends;
NOTE 3:	The UE is not required to determine the SFN of the target cell by acquiring system information from that cell before performing RACH access in the target cell.
5.3.5.5	Reconfiguration failure
The UE shall:
1>	if the UE is unable to comply with (part of) the configuration included in the RRCConnectionReconfiguration message:
2>	continue using the configuration used prior to the reception of RRCConnectionReconfiguration message;
2>	if security has not been activated:
3>	perform the actions upon leaving RRC_CONNECTED as specified in 5.3.12, with release cause other;
2>	else:
3>	initiate the connection re-establishment procedure as specified in 5.3.7, upon which the connection reconfiguration procedure ends;
NOTE 1:	The UE may apply above failure handling also in case the RRCConnectionReconfiguration message causes a protocol error for which the generic error handling as defined in 5.7 specifies that the UE shall ignore the message.
NOTE 2:	If the UE is unable to comply with part of the configuration, it does not apply any part of the configuration, i.e. there is no partial success/ failure.
5.3.5.6	T304 expiry (handover failure)
The UE shall:
1>	if T304 expires (handover failure):
NOTE:	Following T304 expiry any dedicated preamble, if provided within the rach-ConfigDedicated, is not available for use by the UE anymore.
2>	revert back to the configuration used in the source cell, excluding the configuration configured by the physicalConfigDedicated, the mac-MainConfig and the sps-Config;
2>	initiate the connection re-establishment procedure as specified in 5.3.7, upon which the RRC connection reconfiguration procedure ends;
5.3.6	Counter check
5.3.6.1	General

Figure 5.3.6.1-1: Counter check procedure
The counter check procedure is used by E-UTRAN to request the UE to verify the amount of data sent/ received on each DRB. More specifically, the UE is requested to check if, for each DRB, the most significant bits of the COUNT match with the values indicated by E-UTRAN.
NOTE:	The procedure enables E-UTRAN to detect packet insertion by an intruder (a man in the middle).
5.3.6.2	Initiation
E-UTRAN initiates the procedure by sending a CounterCheck message.
NOTE:	E-UTRAN may initiate the procedure when any of the COUNT values reaches a specific value.
5.3.6.3	Reception of the CounterCheck message by the UE
Upon receiving the CounterCheck message, the UE shall:
1>	for each DRB that is established:
2>	if no COUNT exists for a given direction (uplink or downlink) because it is a uni-directional bearer configured only for the other direction:
3>	assume the COUNT value to be 0 for the unused direction;
2>	if the drb-Identity is not included in the drb-CountMSB-InfoList:
3>	include the DRB in the drb-CountInfoList in the CounterCheckResponse message by including the drb-Identity, the count-Uplink and the count-Downlink set to the value of the corresponding COUNT;
2>	else if, for at least one direction, the most significant bits of the COUNT are different from the value indicated in the drb-CountMSB-InfoList:
3>	include the DRB in the drb-CountInfoList in the CounterCheckResponse message by including the drb-Identity, the count-Uplink and the count-Downlink set to the value of the corresponding COUNT;
1>	for each DRB that is included in the drb-CountMSB-InfoList in the CounterCheck message that is not established:
2>	include the DRB in the drb-CountInfoList in the CounterCheckResponse message by including the drb-Identity, the count-Uplink and the count-Downlink with the most significant bits set identical to the corresponding values in the drb-CountMSB-InfoList and the least significant bits set to zero;
1>	submit the CounterCheckResponse message to lower layers for transmission upon which the procedure ends;
5.3.7	RRC connection re-establishment
5.3.7.1	General
	
Figure 5.3.7.1-1: RRC connection re-establishment, successful
	
Figure 5.3.7.1-2: RRC connection re-establishment, failure
The purpose of this procedure is to re-establish the RRC connection, which involves the resumption of SRB1 operation and the re-activation of security.
A UE in RRC_CONNECTED, for which security has been activated, may initiate the procedure in order to continue the RRC connection. The connection re-establishment succeeds only if the concerned cell is prepared i.e. has a valid UE context. In case E-UTRAN accepts the re-establishment, SRB1 operation resumes while the operation of other radio bearers remains suspended. If AS security has not been activated, the UE does not initiate the procedure but instead moves to RRC_IDLE directly.
E-UTRAN applies the procedure as follows:
-	to reconfigure SRB1 and to resume data transfer only for this RB;
-	to re-activate AS security without changing algorithms.
5.3.7.2	Initiation
The UE shall only initiate the procedure when AS security has been activated. The UE initiates the procedure when one of the following conditions is met:
1>	upon detecting radio link failure, in accordance with 5.3.11; or
1>	upon handover failure, in accordance with 5.3.5.6; or
1>	upon mobility from E-UTRA failure, in accordance with 5.4.3.5; or
1>	upon integrity check failure indication from lower layers; or
1>	upon an RRC connection reconfiguration failure, in accordance with 5.3.5.5;
Upon initiation of the procedure, the UE shall:
1>	stop timer T310, if running;
1>	start timer T311;
1> suspend all RBs except SRB0;
1>	reset MAC;
1>	apply the default physical channel configuration as specified in 9.2.4;
1>	apply the default semi-persistent scheduling configuration as specified in 9.2.3;
1>	apply the default MAC main configuration as specified in 9.2.2;
1>	perform cell selection in accordance with the cell selection process as specified in TS 36.304 [4];
5.3.7.3	Actions following cell selection while T311 is running
Upon selecting a suitable E-UTRA cell, the UE shall:
1>	stop timer T311;
1>	start timer T301;
1>	apply the timeAlignmentTimerCommon included in SystemInformationBlockType2;
1>	initiate transmission of the RRCConnectionReestablishmentRequest message in accordance with 5.3.7.4;
NOTE:	This procedure applies also if the UE returns to the source cell.
Upon selecting an inter-RAT cell, the UE shall:
1>	perform the actions upon leaving RRC_CONNECTED as specified in 5.3.12, with release cause RRC connection failure;
5.3.7.4	Actions related to transmission of RRCConnectionReestablishmentRequest message
The UE shall set the contents of RRCConnectionReestablishmentRequest message as follows:
1>	set the ue-Identity as follows:
2>	set the c-RNTI to the C-RNTI used in the source cell (handover and mobility from E-UTRA failure) or used in the cell in which the trigger for the re-establishment occurred (other cases);
2>	set the physCellId to the physical cell identity of the source cell (handover and mobility from E-UTRA failure) or of the cell in which the trigger for the re-establishment occurred (other cases);
2>	set the shortMAC-I to the 16 least significant bits of the MAC-I calculated:
3>	over the ASN.1 encoded as per section 8 (i.e., a multiple of 8 bits) VarShortMAC-Input;
3>	with the KRRCint key and integrity protection algorithm that was used in the source cell (handover and mobility from E-UTRA failure) or of the cell in which the trigger for the re-establishment occurred (other cases); and
3>	with all input bits for COUNT, BEARER and DIRECTION set to binary ones;
1>	set the reestablishmentCause as follows:
2>	if the re-establishment procedure was initiated due to reconfiguration failure as specified in 5.3.5.5 (the UE is unable to comply with the reconfiguration):
3>	set the reestablishmentCause to the value reconfigurationFailure;
2>	else if the re-establishment procedure was initiated due to handover failure as specified in 5.3.5.6 (intra-LTE handover failure) or 5.4.3.5 (inter-RAT mobility from EUTRA failure):
3>	set the reestablishmentCause to the value handoverFailure;
2>	else:
3>	set the reestablishmentCause to the value otherFailure;
The UE shall submit the RRCConnectionReestablishmentRequest message to lower layers for transmission.
5.3.7.5	Reception of the RRCConnectionReestablishment by the UE
NOTE:	Prior to this, lower layer signalling is used to allocate a C-RNTI. For further details see TS 36.321 [6];
The UE shall:
1>	stop timer T301;
1>	re-establish PDCP for SRB1;
1>	re-establish RLC for SRB1;
1>	perform the radio resource configuration procedure in accordance with the received radioResourceConfigDedicated and as specified in 5.3.10;
1>	resume SRB1;
1>	update the KeNB key based on the KASME key to which the current KeNB is associated, using the nextHopChainingCount value indicated in the RRCConnectionReestablishment message, as specified in TS 33.401 [32];
1>	store the nextHopChainingCount value;
1>	derive the KRRCint key associated with the previously configured integrity algorithm, as specified in TS 33.401 [32];
1>	derive the KRRCenc key and the KUPenc key associated with the previously configured ciphering algorithm, as specified in TS 33.401 [32];
1>	configure lower layers to activate integrity protection using the previously configured algorithm and the KRRCint key immediately, i.e., integrity protection shall be applied to all subsequent messages received and sent by the UE, including the message used to indicate the successful completion of the procedure;
1>	configure lower layers to apply ciphering using the previously configured algorithm, the KRRCenc key and the KUPenc key immediately, i.e., ciphering shall be applied to all subsequent messages received and sent by the UE, including the message used to indicate the successful completion of the procedure;
1>	perform the measurement related actions as specified in 5.5.6.1;
1> submit the RRCConnectionReestablishmentComplete message to lower layers for transmission, upon which the procedure ends;
5.3.7.6	T311 expiry
Upon T311 expiry, the UE shall:
1>	perform the actions upon leaving RRC_CONNECTED as specified in 5.3.12, with release cause RRC connection failure;
5.3.7.7	T301 expiry or selected cell no longer suitable
The UE shall:
1>	if timer T301 expires; or
1>	if the selected cell becomes no longer suitable according to the cell selection criteria as specified in TS 36.304 [4]:
2>	perform the actions upon leaving RRC_CONNECTED as specified in 5.3.12, with release cause RRC connection failure;
5.3.7.8	Reception of RRCConnectionReestablishmentReject by the UE
Upon receiving the RRCConnectionReestablishmentReject message, the UE shall:
1>	perform the actions upon leaving RRC_CONNECTED as specified in 5.3.12, with release cause RRC connection failure;
5.3.8	RRC connection release
5.3.8.1	General

Figure 5.3.8.1-1: RRC connection release, successful
The purpose of this procedure is to release the RRC connection, which includes the release of the established radio bearers as well as all radio resources.
5.3.8.2	Initiation
E-UTRAN initiates the RRC connection release procedure to a UE in RRC_CONNECTED.
5.3.8.3	Reception of the RRCConnectionRelease by the UE
The UE shall:
1>	delay the following actions defined in this sub-clause 60 ms from the moment the RRCConnectionRelease message was received or optionally when lower layers indicate that the receipt of the RRCConnectionRelease message has been successfully acknowledged, whichever is earlier;
1>	if the RRCConnectionRelease message includes the idleModeMobilityControlInfo:
2>	store the cell reselection priority information provided by the idleModeMobilityControlInfo;
2>	if the t320 is included:
3>	start timer T320, with the timer value set according to the value of t320;
1>	else:
2>	apply the cell reselection priority information broadcast in the system information;
1>	if the releaseCause received in the RRCConnectionRelease message indicates loadBalancingTAURequired:
2>	perform the actions upon leaving RRC_CONNECTED as specified in 5.3.12, with release cause load balancing TAU required;
1>	else:
2>	perform the actions upon leaving RRC_CONNECTED as specified in 5.3.12, with release cause other;
5.3.8.4	T320 expiry
The UE shall:
1>	if T320 expires:
2>	if stored, discard the cell reselection priority information provided by the idleModeMobilityControlInfo or inherited from another RAT;
2>	apply the cell reselection priority information broadcast in the system information;
5.3.9	RRC connection release requested by upper layers
5.3.9.1	General
The purpose of this procedure is to release the RRC connection. Access to the current cell may be barred as a result of this procedure.
NOTE:	Upper layers invoke the procedure, e.g. upon determining that the network has failed an authentication check, see TS 24.301 [35].
5.3.9.2	Initiation
The UE initiates the procedure when upper layers request the release of the RRC connection.
The UE shall:
1>	perform the actions upon leaving RRC_CONNECTED as specified in 5.3.12, with release cause other;
1>	if the upper layers indicate barring of the serving cell:
2>	treat the cell used prior to entering RRC_IDLE as barred according to TS 36.304 [4];
5.3.10	Radio resource configuration
5.3.10.0	General
The UE shall:
1>	if the received radioResourceConfigDedicated includes the srb-ToAddModList:
2>	perform the SRB addition or reconfiguration as specified in 5.3.10.1;
1>	if the received radioResourceConfigDedicated includes the drb-ToReleaseList:
2>	perform DRB release as specified in 5.3.10.2;
1>	if the received radioResourceConfigDedicated includes the drb-ToAddModList:
2>	perform DRB addition or reconfiguration as specified in 5.3.10.3;
1>	if the received radioResourceConfigDedicated includes the mac-MainConfig:
2>	perform MAC main reconfiguration as specified in 5.3.10.4;
1>	if the received radioResourceConfigDedicated includes sps-Config:
2>	perform SPS reconfiguration according to 5.3.10.5;
1>	if the received radioResourceConfigDedicated includes the physicalConfigDedicated:
2>	reconfigure the physical channel configuration as specified in 5.3.10. 6.
5.3.10.1	SRB addition/ modification
The UE shall:
1>	for each srb-Identity value included in the srb-ToAddModList that is not part of the current UE configuration (SRB establishment):
2>	apply the specified configuration defined in 9.1.2 for the corresponding SRB;
2> establish a PDCP entity and configure it with the current security configuration, if applicable;
2>	establish an RLC entity in accordance with the received rlc-Config;
2>	establish a DCCH logical channel in accordance with the received logicalChannelConfig and with the logical channel identity set in accordance with 9.1.2;
1>	for each srb-Identity value included in the srb-ToAddModList that is part of the current UE configuration (SRB reconfiguration):
2>	reconfigure the RLC entity in accordance with the received rlc-Config;
2>	reconfigure the DCCH logical channel in accordance with the received logicalChannelConfig;
5.3.10.2	DRB release
The UE shall:
1>	for each drb-Identity value included in the drb-ToReleaseList that is part of the current UE configuration (DRB release):
2>	release the PDCP entity;
2>	release the RLC entity or entities;
2>	release the DTCH logical channel;
1>	indicate the release of the DRB(s) and the eps-BearerIdentity of the released DRB(s) to upper layers;
NOTE:	The UE does not consider the message as erroneous if the drb-ToReleaseList includes any drb-Identity value that is not part of the current UE configuration.
5.3.10.3	DRB addition/ modification
The UE shall:
1>	for each drb-Identity value included in the drb-ToAddModList that is not part of the current UE configuration (DRB establishment):
2>	establish a PDCP entity and configure it with the current security configuration and in accordance with the received pdcp-Config;
2>	establish an RLC entity or entities in accordance with the received rlc-Config;
2>	establish a DTCH logical channel in accordance with the received logicalChannelIdentity and the received logicalChannelConfig;
1>	indicate the establishment of the DRB(s) and the eps-BearerIdentity of the established DRB(s) to upper layers;
1>	for each drb-Identity value included in the drb-ToAddModList that is part of the current UE configuration (DRB reconfiguration):
2>	if the pdcp-Config is included:
3>	reconfigure the PDCP entity in accordance with the received pdcp-Config;
2>	if the rlc-Config is included:
3>	reconfigure the RLC entity or entities in accordance with the received rlc-Config;
2>	if the logicalChannelConfig is included:
3>	reconfigure the DTCH logical channel in accordance with the received logicalChannelConfig;
NOTE:	Removal and addition of the same drb-Identity in single radioResourceConfiguration is not supported.
5.3.10.4	MAC main reconfiguration
The UE shall:
1>	reconfigure the MAC main configuration in accordance with the received mac-MainConfig;
5.3.10.5	Semi-persistent scheduling reconfiguration
The UE shall:
1> reconfigure the semi-persistent scheduling in accordance with the received sps-Config:
5.3.10.6	Physical channel reconfiguration
The UE shall:
1>	reconfigure the physical channel configuration in accordance with the received physicalConfigDedicated;
1>	if the antennaInfo is included and set to explicitValue:
2>	if the configured transmissionMode is not tm3 or tm4 release ri-ConfigIndex in cqi-ReportPeriodic, if previously configured;
1>	else if the antennaInfo is included and set to defaultValue:
2>	release ri-ConfigIndex in cqi-ReportPeriodic, if previously configured;
5.3.11	Radio link failure related actions
5.3.11.1	Detection of physical layer problems in RRC_CONNECTED
The UE shall:
1>	upon receiving N310 consecutive "out-of-sync" indications from lower layers while neither T300, T301, T304 nor T311 is running:
2>	start timer T310;
5.3.11.2	Recovery of physical layer problems
Upon receiving N311 consecutive "in-sync" indications from lower layers while T310 is running, the UE shall:
1>	stop timer T310;
NOTE 1:		In this case, the UE resumes the RRC connection without explicit signalling, i.e. the UE resumes the entire radio resource configuration.
NOTE 2:		Periods in time where neither "in-sync" nor "out-of-sync" is reported by layer 1 do not affect the evaluation of the number of consecutive "in-sync" or "out-of-sync" indications.
5.3.11.3	Detection of radio link failure
The UE shall:
1>	upon T310 expiry; or
1>	upon random access problem indication from MAC while neither T300, T301, T304 nor T311 is running; or
1>	upon indication from RLC that the maximum number of retransmissions has been reached:
2>	consider radio link failure to be detected;
2>	if AS security has not been activated:
3>	perform the actions upon leaving RRC_CONNECTED as specified in 5.3.12, with release cause other;
2>	else:
3>	initiate the connection re-establishment procedure as specified in 5.3.7;
5.3.12	UE actions upon leaving RRC_CONNECTED
Upon leaving RRC_CONNECTED, the UE shall:
1>	reset MAC;
1>	stop all timers that are running except T320;
1>	release all radio resources, including release of the RLC entity, the MAC configuration and the associated PDCP entity for all established RBs;
1>	indicate the release of the RRC connection to upper layers together with the release cause;
1>	if leaving RRC_CONNECTED was not triggered by reception of the MobilityFromEUTRACommand message:
2>	enter RRC_IDLE by performing cell selection in accordance with the cell selection process, defined for the case of leaving RRC_CONNECTED, as specified in TS 36.304 [4];
5.3.13	UE actions upon PUCCH/ SRS release request
Upon receiving a PUCCH/ SRS release request from lower layers, the UE shall:
1>	apply the default physical channel configuration for CQI-ReportConfig as specified in 9.2.4;
1>	apply the default physical channel configuration for soundingRS-UL-ConfigDedicated as specified in 9.2.4;
1>	apply the default physical channel configuration for schedulingRequestConfig as specified in 9.2.4;
5.4	Inter-RAT mobility
5.4.1	Introduction
The general principles of connected mode mobility are described in 5.3.1.3. The general principles of the security handling upon connected mode mobility are described in 5.3.1.2.
For the (network controlled) inter RAT mobility from E-UTRA for a UE in RRC_CONNECTED, a single procedure is defined that supports both handover and cell change order with optional network assistance (NACC). In case of mobility to CDMA2000, the eNB decides when to move to the other RAT while the target RAT determines to which cell the UE shall move.
5.4.2	Handover to E-UTRA
5.4.2.1	General

Figure 5.4.2.1-1: Handover to E-UTRA, successful
The purpose of this procedure is to, under the control of the network, transfer a connection between the UE and another Radio Access Network (e.g. GERAN or UTRAN) to E-UTRAN.
The handover to E-UTRA procedure applies when SRBs, possibly in combination with DRBs, are established in another RAT. Handover from UTRAN to E-UTRAN applies only after integrity has been activated in UTRAN.
5.4.2.2	Initiation
The RAN using another RAT initiates the Handover to E-UTRA procedure, in accordance with the specifications applicable for the other RAT, by sending the RRCConnectionReconfiguration message via the radio access technology from which the inter-RAT handover is performed.
E-UTRAN applies the procedure as follows:
-	to activate ciphering, possibly using NULL algorithm, if not yet activated in the other RAT;
-	to establish SRB1, SRB2 and one or more DRBs, i.e. at least the DRB associated with the default EPS bearer is established;
5.4.2.3	Reception of the RRCConnectionReconfiguration by the UE
If the UE is able to comply with the configuration included in the RRCConnectionReconfiguration message, the UE shall:
1>	apply the default physical channel configuration as specified in 9.2.4;
1>	apply the default semi-persistent scheduling configuration as specified in 9.2.3;
1>	apply the default MAC main configuration as specified in 9.2.2;
1>	start timer T304 with the timer value set to t304, as included in the mobilityControlInfo;
1>	consider the target cell to be one on the frequency indicated by the carrierFreq with a physical cell identity indicated by the targetPhysCellId;
1>	start synchronising to the DL of the target cell;
1>	set the C-RNTI to the value of the newUE-Identity;
1>	for the target cell, apply the downlink bandwidth indicated by the dl-Bandwidth;
1>	for the target cell, apply the uplink bandwidth indicated by (the absence or presence of) the ul-Bandwidth;
1>	perform the radio resource configuration procedure as specified in 5.3.10;
1>	forward the nas-SecurityParamToEUTRA to the upper layers;
1>	derive the KeNB key, as specified in TS 33.401 [32];
1>	store the nextHopChainingCount value;
1>	derive the KRRCint key associated with the integrityProtAlgorithm, as specified in TS 33.401 [32];
1>	derive the KRRCenc key and the KUPenc key associated with the cipheringAlgorithm, as specified in TS 33.401 [32];
1>	configure lower layers to apply the indicated integrity protection algorithm and the KRRCint key immediately, i.e. the indicated integrity protection configuration shall be applied to all subsequent messages received and sent by the UE, including the message used to indicate the successful completion of the procedure;
1>	configure lower layers to apply the indicated ciphering algorithm, the KRRCenc key and the KUPenc key immediately, i.e. the indicated ciphering configuration shall be applied to all subsequent messages received and sent by the UE, including the message used to indicate the successful completion of the procedure;
1>	if the RRCConnectionReconfiguration message includes the measConfig:
2>	perform the measurement configuration procedure as specified in 5.5.2;
1>	submit the RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete message to lower layers for transmission using the new configuration;
1>	use the default values specified in 9.2.5 for timer T310, T311 and constant N310, N311;
1>	if MAC successfully completes the random access procedure:
2>	stop timer T304;
2>	apply the parts of the configuration that do not require the UE to know the SFN of the target cell;
2>	apply the parts of the measurement and the radio resource configuration that require the UE to know the SFN of the target cell (e.g. measurement gaps, periodic CQI reporting, scheduling request configuration, sounding RS configuration), if any, upon acquiring the SFN of the target cell;
2>	enter E-UTRA RRC_CONNECTED, upon which the procedure ends;
Editor's note:	The handling of outstanding signalling/ data may need to be clarified.
5.4.2.4	Reconfiguration failure
The UE shall:
1>	if the UE is unable to comply with (part of) the configuration included in the RRCConnectionReconfiguration message:
2>	perform the actions defined for this failure case as defined in the specifications applicable for the other RAT;
NOTE 1:	The UE may apply above failure handling also in case the RRCConnectionReconfiguration message causes a protocol error for which the generic error handling as defined in 5.7 specifies that the UE shall ignore the message. 
NOTE 2:	If the UE is unable to comply with part of the configuration, it does not apply any part of the configuration, i.e. there is no partial success/ failure.
5.4.2.5	T304 expiry (handover to E-UTRA failure)
The UE shall:
1>	upon T304 expiry (handover to E-UTRA failure):
2>	reset MAC;
2>	perform the actions defined for this failure case as defined in the specifications applicable for the other RAT;
5.4.3	Mobility from E-UTRA
5.4.3.1	General

Figure 5.4.3.1-1: Mobility from E-UTRA, successful

Figure 5.4.3.1-2: Mobility from E-UTRA, failure
The purpose of this procedure is to move a UE in RRC_CONNECTED to a cell using another Radio Access Technology (RAT), e.g. GERAN, UTRA or CDMA2000 systems. The mobility from E-UTRA procedure covers both:
-	handover, i.e. the MobilityFromEUTRACommand message includes radio resources that have been allocated for the UE in the target cell; and
-	cell change order, i.e. the MobilityFromEUTRACommand message may include information facilitating access of and/ or connection establishment in the target cell, e.g. system information. Cell change order is applicable only to GERAN.
5.4.3.2	Initiation
E-UTRAN initiates the mobility from E-UTRA procedure to a UE in RRC_CONNECTED, possibly in response to a MeasurementReport message, by sending a MobilityFromEUTRACommand message. E-UTRAN applies the procedure as follows:
-	the procedure is initiated only when AS-security has been activated, and SRB2 with at least one DRB are setup and not suspended;
5.4.3.3	Reception of the MobilityFromEUTRACommand by the UE
The UE shall be able to receive a MobilityFromEUTRACommand message and perform a cell change order to GERAN, even if no prior UE measurements have been performed on the target cell.
The UE shall:
1>	stop timer T310, if running;
1>	if the MobilityFromEUTRACommand message includes the purpose set to handover:
2>	if the targetRAT-Type is set to utra or geran:
3>	consider inter-RAT mobility as initiated towards the RAT indicated by the targetRAT-Type included in the MobilityFromEUTRACommand message;
3>	forward the nas-SecurityParamFromEUTRA to the upper layers;
3>	access the target cell indicated in the inter-RAT message in accordance with the specifications of the target RAT;
3>	if the targetRAT-Type is set to geran:
4>	use the contents of systemInformation, if provided for PS Handover, as the system information to begin access on the target GERAN cell;
NOTE 1:	If there are DRBs for which no radio bearers are established in the target RAT as indicated in the targetRAT-MessageContainer in the message, the E-UTRA RRC part of the UE does not indicate the release of the concerned DRBs to the upper layers. Upper layers may derive which bearers are not established from information received from the AS of the target RAT.
2>	else if the targetRAT-Type is set to cdma2000-1XRTT or cdma2000-HRPD:
3>	forward the targetRAT-Type and the targetRAT-MessageContainer to the CDMA2000 upper layers for the UE to access the cell indicated in the inter-RAT message in accordance with the specifications of the CDMA2000 target-RAT;
1>	else if the MobilityFromEUTRACommand message includes the purpose set to cellChangeOrder:
2>	start timer T304 with the timer value set to t304, as included in the MobilityFromEUTRACommand message;
2>	if the targetRAT-Type is set to geran:
3>	if networkControlOrder is included in the MobilityFromEUTRACommand message:
4>	apply the value as specified in TS 44.060 [36];
3>	else:
4>	acquire networkControlOrder and apply the value as specified in TS 44.060 [36];
3>	use the contents of systemInformation, if provided, as the system information to begin access on the target GERAN cell;
NOTE 2:	The systemInformation is constructed in the same way as in 2G to 2G NACC, i.e. the PSI messages are encoded as such, whereas the SI messages exclude 2 octets of headers, see TS 44.060[36].
2>	establish the connection to the target cell indicated in the CellChangeOrder;
NOTE 3:	The criteria for success or failure of the cell change order to GERAN are specified in TS 44.060[36].
5.4.3.4	Successful completion of the mobility from E-UTRA
Upon successfully completing the handover or the cell change order, the UE shall:
1>	perform the actions upon leaving RRC_CONNECTED as specified in 5.3.12, with release cause other;
1>	stop timer T304, if running;
5.4.3.5	Mobility from E-UTRA failure
The UE shall:
1>	if T304 expires (mobility from E-UTRA failure); or
1>	if the UE does not succeed in establishing the connection to the target radio access technology; or
1>	if the UE is unable to comply with (part of) the configuration included in the MobilityFromEUTRACommand message; or
1>	if there is a protocol error in the inter RAT information included in the MobilityFromEUTRACommand message, causing the UE to fail the procedure according to the specifications applicable for the target RAT:
2>	stop T304, if running;
2>	if the cs-FallbackIndicator in the MobilityFromEUTRACommand message was set to TRUE:
3>	 indicate to upper layers that the CS Fallback procedure has failed;
2>	revert back to the configuration used in the source cell, excluding the configuration configured by the physicalConfigDedicated, mac-MainConfig and sps-Config;
2>	initiate the connection re-establishment procedure as specified in 5.3.7;
5.4.4	Handover from E-UTRA preparation request (CDMA2000)
5.4.4.1	General

Figure 5.4.4.1-1: Handover from E-UTRA preparation request
The purpose of this procedure is to trigger the UE to prepare for handover to CDMA2000 by requesting a connection with this network. This procedure applies to CDMA2000 capable UEs only.
The handover from E-UTRA preparation request procedure applies when signalling radio bearers are established.
5.4.4.2	Initiation
E-UTRAN initiates the handover from E-UTRA preparation request procedure to a UE in RRC_CONNECTED, possibly in response to a MeasurementReport message, by sending a HandoverFromEUTRAPreparationRequest message. E-UTRA initiates the procedure only when AS security has been activated.
5.4.4.3	Reception of the HandoverFromEUTRAPreparationRequest by the UE
Upon reception of the HandoverFromEUTRAPreparationRequest message, the UE shall:
1>	indicate the request to prepare handover and forward the cdma2000-Type to the CDMA2000 upper layers;
1>	if cdma2000-Type is set to type1XRTT:
2>	forward the rand and the mobilityParametersCDMA2000 to the CDMA2000 upper layers;
5.4.5	UL handover preparation transfer (CDMA2000)
5.4.5.1	General

Figure 5.4.5.1-1: UL handover preparation transfer
The purpose of this procedure is to tunnel the handover related CDMA2000 dedicated information from UE to E-UTRAN when requested by the higher layers. The procedure is triggered by the higher layers on receipt of HandoverFromEUTRAPreparationRequest message. This procedure applies to CDMA2000 capable UEs only.
5.4.5.2	Initiation
A UE in RRC_CONNECTED initiates the UL Handover Preparation Transfer procedure whenever there is a need to transfer handover related non-3GPP dedicated information. The UE initiates the UL handover preparation transfer procedure by sending the ULHandoverPreparationTransfer message.
5.4.5.3	Actions related to transmission of the ULHandoverPreparationTransfer message
The UE shall set the contents of the ULHandoverPreparationTransfer message as follows:
1>	include the cdma2000-Type and the dedicatedInfoCDMA2000;
1>	if the cdma2000-Type is set to type1XRTT:
2>	include the meid and set it to the value received from the CDMA2000 upper layers;
1>	submit the ULHandoverPreparationTransfer message to lower layers for transmission, upon which the procedure ends;
5.4.5.4	Failure to deliver the ULHandoverPreparationTransfer message
The UE shall:
1>	if the UE is unable to guarantee successful delivery of ULHandoverPreparationTransfer messages:
2>	inform upper layers about the possible failure to deliver the information contained in the concerned ULHandoverPreparationTransfer message;
5.4.6	Inter-RAT cell change order to E-UTRAN
5.4.6.1	General
The purpose of the inter-RAT cell change order to E-UTRAN procedure is to transfer, under the control of the source radio access technology, a connection between the UE and another radio access technology (e.g. GSM/ GPRS) to E-UTRAN.
5.4.6.2	Initiation
The procedure is initiated when a radio access technology other than E-UTRAN, e.g. GSM/GPRS, using procedures specific for that RAT, orders the UE to change to an E-UTRAN cell. In response, upper layers request the establishment of an RRC connection as specified in subclause 5.3.3.
NOTE:	Within the message used to order the UE to change to an E-UTRAN cell, the source RAT should specify the identity of the target E-UTRAN cell as specified in the specifications for that RAT.
The UE shall:
1>	upon receiving an RRCConnectionSetup message:
2>	consider the inter-RAT cell change order procedure to have completed succesfully;
5.4.6.3	UE fails to complete an inter-RAT cell change order
If the inter-RAT cell change order fails the UE shall return to the other radio access technology and proceed as specified in the appropriate specifications for that RAT.
The UE shall:
1>	upon failure to establish the RRC connection as specified in subclause 5.3.3:
2>	consider the inter-RAT cell change order procedure to have failed;
NOTE:	The cell change was network ordered. Therefore, failure to change to the target cell should not cause the UE to move to UE-controlled cell selection.
5.5	Measurements
5.5.1	Introduction
The UE reports measurement information in accordance with the measurement configuration as provided by E-UTRAN. E-UTRAN provides the measurement configuration applicable for a UE in RRC_CONNECTED by means of dedicated signalling, i.e. using the RRCConnectionReconfiguration message.
The UE can be requested to perform the following types of measurements:
-	Intra-frequency measurements: measurements at the downlink carrier frequency of the serving cell.
-	Inter-frequency measurements: measurements at frequencies that differ from the downlink carrier frequency of the serving cell.
-	Inter-RAT measurements of UTRA frequencies.
-	Inter-RAT measurements of GERAN frequencies.
-	Inter-RAT measurements of CDMA2000 HRPD or CDMA2000 1xRTT frequencies.
The measurement configuration includes the following parameters:
1.	Measurement objects: The objects on which the UE shall perform the measurements.
-	For intra-frequency and inter-frequency measurements a measurement object is a single E-UTRA carrier frequency. Associated with this carrier frequency, E-UTRAN can configure a list of cell specific offsets and a list of blacklisted cells. Blacklisted cells are not considered in event evaluation or measurement reporting.
-	For inter-RAT UTRA measurements a measurement object is a set of cells on a single UTRA carrier frequency.
-	For inter-RAT GERAN measurements a measurement object is a set of GERAN carrier frequencies.
-	For inter-RAT CDMA2000 measurements a measurement object is a set of cells on a single (HRPD or 1xRTT) carrier frequency.
2.	Reporting configurations: A list of reporting configurations where each reporting configuration consists of the following:
-	Reporting criterion: The criterion that triggers the UE to send a measurement report. This can either be periodical or a single event description.
-	Reporting format: The quantities that the UE includes in the measurement report and associated information (e.g. number of cells to report).
3.	Measurement identities: A list of measurement identities where each measurement identity links one measurement object with one reporting configuration. By configuring multiple measurement identities it is possible to link more than one measurement object to the same reporting configuration, as well as to link more than one reporting configuration to the same measurement object. The measurement identity is used as a reference number in the measurement report.
4.	Quantity configurations: One quantity configuration is configured per RAT type. The quantity configuration defines the measurement quantities and associated filtering used for all event evaluation and related reporting of that measurement type. One filter can be configured per measurement quantity.
5.	Measurement gaps: Periods that the UE may use to perform measurements, i.e. no (UL, DL) transmissions are scheduled.
E-UTRAN only configures a single measurement object for a given frequency, i.e. it is not possible to configure two or more measurement objects for the same frequency with different associated parameters, e.g. different offsets and/ or blacklists. E-UTRAN may configure multiple instances of the same event e.g. by configuring two reporting configurations with different thresholds.
The UE maintains a single measurement object list, a single reporting configuration list, and a single measurement identities list. The measurement object list includes measurement objects, that are specified per RAT type, possibly including an intra-frequency object (i.e. the object corresponding to the serving frequency), inter-frequency object(s) and inter-RAT objects. Similarly, the reporting configuration list includes E-UTRA and inter-RAT reporting configurations. Any measurement object can be linked to any reporting configuration of the same RAT type. Some reporting configurations may not be linked to a measurement object. Likewise, some measurement objects may not be linked to a reporting configuration.
The measurement procedures distinguish the following types of cells:
1.	The serving cell.
2.	Listed cells - these are cells listed within the measurement object(s).
3.	Detected cells - these are cells that are not listed within the measurement object(s) but are detected by the UE on the carrier frequency(ies) indicated by the measurement object(s).
For E-UTRA, the UE measures and reports on the serving cell, listed cells and detected cells. For inter-RAT UTRA, the UE measures and reports on listed cells. For inter-RAT GERAN, the UE measures and reports on detected cells. For inter-RAT CDMA2000, the UE measures and reports on listed cells.
NOTE 1:	For inter-RAT UTRA and CDMA2000, the UE measures and reports also on detected cells for the purpose of SON.
NOTE 2:	This specification is based on the assumption that CSG cells of home deployment type are not indicated within the neighbour list. Furthermore, the assumption is that for non-home deployments, the physical cell identity is unique within the area of a large macro cell (i.e. as for UTRAN).
Whenever the procedural specification, other than contained in sub-clause 5.5.2, refers to a field it concerns a field included in the VarMeasConfig unless explictly stated otherwise i.e. only the measurement configuration procedure covers the direct UE action related to the received measConfig.
5.5.2	Measurement configuration
5.5.2.1	General
E-UTRAN applies the procedure as follows:
-	to configure at most one measurement identity using a reporting configuration with the purpose set to reportCGI;
The UE shall:
1>	if the received measConfig includes the measObjectToRemoveList:
2>	perform the measurement object removal procedure as specified in 5.5.2.4;
1>	if the received measConfig includes the measObjectToAddModList:
2>	perform the measurement object addition/ modification procedure as specified in 5.5.2.5;
1>	if the received measConfig includes the reportConfigToRemoveList:
2>	perform the reporting configuration removal procedure as specified in 5.5.2.6;
1>	if the received measConfig includes the reportConfigToAddModList:
2>	perform the reporting configuration addition/ modification procedure as specified in 5.5.2.7;
1>	if the received measConfig includes the quantityConfig:
2>	perform the quantity configuration procedure as specified in 5.5.2.8;
1>	if the received measConfig includes the measIdToRemoveList:
2>	perform the measurement identity removal procedure as specified in 5.5.2.2;
1>	if the received measConfig includes the measIdToAddModList:
2>	perform the measurement identity addition/ modification procedure as specified in 5.5.2.3;
1>	if the received measConfig includes the measGapConfig:
2>	perform the measurement gap configuration procedure as specified in 5.5.2.9;
1>	if the received measConfig includes the s-Measure:
2>	set the parameter s-Measure within VarMeasConfig to the lowest value of the RSRP ranges indicated by the received value of s-Measure;
1>	if the received measConfig includes the preRegistrationInfoHRPD:
2>	forward the preRegistrationInfoHRPD to CDMA2000 upper layers;
1>	if the received measConfig includes the speedStatePars:
2>	set the parameter speedStatePars within VarMeasConfig to the received value of speedStatePars;
5.5.2.2	Measurement identity removal
The UE shall:
1>	for each measId included in the received measIdToRemoveList that is part of the current UE configuration in varMeasConfig:
2>	remove the entry with the matching measId from the measIdList within the VarMeasConfig;
2>	remove the measurement reporting entry for this measId from the VarMeasReportList, if included;
2>	stop the periodical reporting timer or timer T321, whichever one is running, and reset the associated information (e.g. timeToTrigger) for this measId;
NOTE:	The UE does not consider the message as erroneous if the measIdToRemoveList includes any measId value that is not part of the current UE configuration.
5.5.2.3	Measurement identity addition/ modification
E-UTRAN applies the procedure as follows:
-	configure a measId only if the corresponding measurement object, the corresponding reporting configuration and the corresponding quantity configuration, are configured;
The UE shall:
1>	for each measId included in the received measIdToAddModList:
2>	if an entry with the matching measId exists in the measIdList within the VarMeasConfig:
3>	replace the entry with the value received for this measId;
2>	else:
3>	add a new entry  for this measId within the VarMeasConfig ;
2>	remove the measurement reporting entry for this measId from the VarMeasReportList, if included;
2>	stop the periodical reporting timer or timer T321, whichever one is running, and reset the associated information (e.g. timeToTrigger) for this measId;
2>	if the triggerType is set to periodical and the purpose is set to reportCGI in the reportConfig associated with this measId:
3>	if the measObject associated with this measId concerns E-UTRA:
4>	start timer T321 with the timer value set to 1 second for this measId;
3>	else:
4>	start timer T321 with the timer value set to 8 seconds for this measId;
5.5.2.4	Measurement object removal
The UE shall:
1>	for each measObjectId included in the received measObjectToRemoveList that is part of the current UE configuration in varMeasConfig:
2>	remove the entry with the matching measObjectId from the measObjectList within the VarMeasConfig;
2>	remove all measId associated with this measObjectId from the measIdList within the VarMeasConfig, if any;
2>	if a measId is removed from the measIdList:
3>	remove the measurement reporting entry for this measId from the VarMeasReportList, if included;
3>	stop the periodical reporting timer or timer T321, whichever one is running, and reset the associated information (e.g. timeToTrigger) for this measId;
NOTE:	The UE does not consider the message as erroneous if the measObjectToRemoveList includes any measObjectId value that is not part of the current UE configuration.
5.5.2.5	Measurement object addition/ modification
The UE shall:
1>	for each measObjectId included in the received measObjectToAddModList:
2>	if an entry with the matching measObjectId exists in the measObjectList within the VarMeasConfig, for this entry:
3>	replace the entry with the value received for this measObject, except for the fields cellsToAddModList, blackCellsToAddModList, cellsToRemoveList and blackCellsToRemoveList:
3>	if the received measObject includes the cellsToRemoveList:
4>	for each cellIndex included in the cellsToRemoveList:
5>	remove the entry with the matching cellIndex from the cellsToAddModList;
3>	if the received measObject includes the cellsToAddModList:
4>	for each cellIndex value included in the cellsToAddModList:
5> if an entry with the matching cellIndex exists in the cellsToAddModList:
6>	replace the entry with the value received for this cellIndex;
5> else:
6>	add a new entry for the received cellIndex to the cellsToAddModList;
3>	if the received measObject includes the blackCellsToRemoveList:
4>	for each cellIndex included in the blackCellsToRemoveList:
5>	remove the entry with the matching cellIndex from the blackCellsToAddModList;
3>	if the received measObject includes the blackCellsToAddModList:
4>	for each cellIndex included in the blackCellsToAddModList:
5> if an entry with the matching cellIndex is included in the blackCellsToAddModList:
6>	replace the entry with the value received for this cellIndex;
5> else:
6> add a new entry for the received cellIndex to the blackCellsToAddModList;
3>	for each measId associated with this measObjectId in the measIdList within the VarMeasConfig, if any:
4>	remove the measurement reporting entry for this measId from the VarMeasReportList, if included;
4>	stop the periodical reporting timer or timer T321, whichever one is running, and reset the associated information (e.g. timeToTrigger) for this measId;
2>	else:
3>	add a new entry for the received measObject to the measObjectList within VarMeasConfig;
5.5.2.6	Reporting configuration removal
The UE shall:
1>	for each reportConfigId included in the received reportConfigToRemoveList that is part of the current UE configuration in varMeasConfig:
2>	remove the entry with the matching reportConfigId from the reportConfigList within the VarMeasConfig;
2>	remove all measId associated with the reportConfigId from the measIdList within the VarMeasConfig, if any;
2>	if a measId is removed from the measIdList:
3>	remove the measurement reporting entry for this measId from the VarMeasReportList, if included;
3>	stop the periodical reporting timer or timer T321, whichever one is running, and reset the associated information (e.g. timeToTrigger) for this measId;
NOTE:	The UE does not consider the message as erroneous if the reportConfigToRemoveList includes any reportConfigId value that is not part of the current UE configuration.
5.5.2.7	Reporting configuration addition/ modification
The UE shall:
1>	for each reportConfigId included in the received reportConfigToAddModList:
2>	if an entry with the matching reportConfigId exists in the reportConfigList within the VarMeasConfig, for this entry:
3>	replace the entry with the value received for this reportConfig;
3>	for each measId associated with this reportConfigId included in the measIdList within the VarMeasConfig, if any:
4>	remove the measurement reporting entry for this measId from in VarMeasReportList, if included;
4>	stop the periodical reporting timer or timer T321, whichever one is running, and reset the associated information (e.g. timeToTrigger) for this measId;
2>	else:
3>	add a new entry for the received reportConfig to the reportConfigList within the VarMeasConfig;
5.5.2.8	Quantity configuration
The UE shall:
1>	set the parameter quantityConfig within VarMeasConfig to the received value of quantityConfig;
1>	for each measId included in the measIdList within VarMeasConfig:
2>		remove the measurement reporting entry for this measId from the VarMeasReportList, if included;
2>	stop the periodical reporting timer or timer T321, whichever one is running, and reset the associated information (e.g. timeToTrigger) for this measId;
5.5.2.9	Measurement gap configuration
The UE shall:
1>	if measGapConfig is set to setup:
2>	if a measurement gap configuration is already setup, release the measurement gap configuration;
2>	setup the measurement gap configuration indicated by the measGapConfig in accordance with the received gapOffset, i.e., each gap starts at an SFN and subframe meeting the following condition:
SFN mod T = FLOOR(gapOffset/10);
subframe = gapOffset mod 10;
with T = MGRP/10 as defined in TS 36.133 [16];
1>	else:
2>	release the measurement gap configuration;
5.5.3	Performing measurements
5.5.3.1	General
The UE supports measurements using a reporting configuration with the purpose set to reportCGI, if the network provides sufficient idle periods.
The UE applies the layer 3 filtering as specified in 5.5.3.2, before using the measured results for evaluation of reporting criteria or for measurement reporting.
The UE shall:
1>	for each measId included in the measIdList within VarMeasConfig:
2>	if a measurement gap configuration is setup; or
2>	the UE does not require measurement gaps to perform the concerned measurement:
3>	if s-Measure is not configured; or
3>	if s-Measure is configured and the serving cell RSRP, after layer 3 filtering, is lower than this value; or
3>	if the purpose for the associated reportConfig is set to reportCGI:
4>	perform the corresponding measurements of neighbouring cells on the frequencies and RATs indicated in the concerned measObject;
2>	perform the evaluation of reporting criteria as specified in section 5.5.4;
1>	if a measId is configuredfor which the purpose within the associated reportConfig is set to reportCGI:
2>	try to acquire the global cell identity of the cell indicated by the cellForWhichToReportCGI in the associated measObject by acquiring the relevant system information from the concerned cell;
2>	if the cell indicated by the cellForWhichToReportCGI included in the associated measObject is an E-UTRAN cell:
3>	try to acquire the list of additional PLMN Identities, as included in the plmn-IdentityList, if multiple PLMN identities are broadcast in the concerned cell;
NOTE:	The primary PLMN is part of the global cell identity.
2>	if the cell indicated by the cellForWhichToReportCGI included in the associated measObject is a UTRAN cell:
3>	try to acquire the LAC, the RAC and the list of additional PLMN Identities, if multiple PLMN identities are broadcast in the concerned cell;
2>	if the cell indicated by the cellForWhichToReportCGI included in the associated measObject is a GERAN cell:
3>	try to acquire the RAC in the concerned cell;
2>	if the cell indicated by the cellForWhichToReportCGI included in the associated measObject is a CDMA2000 cell and the cdma2000-Type included in the measObject is typeHRPD:
3>	try to acquire the Sector ID in the concerned cell;
2>	if the cell indicated by the cellForWhichToReportCGI included in the associated measObject is a CDMA2000 cell and the cdma2000-Type included in the measObject is type1XRTT:
3>	try to acquire the BASE ID, SID and NID in the concerned cell;
5.5.3.2	Layer 3 filtering
The UE shall:
1>	for each measurement quantity that the UE performs measurements according to 5.5.3.1:
2>	filter the measured result, before using for evaluation of reporting criteria or for measurement reporting, by the following formula:
	
where
Mn is the latest received measurement result from the physical layer;
Fn is the updated filtered measurement result, that is used for evaluation of reporting criteria or for measurement reporting;
Fn-1 is the old filtered measurement result, where F0 is set to M1 when the first measurement result from the physical layer is received; and
a = 1/2(k/4), where k is the filterCoefficent for the corresponding measurement quantity received by the quantityConfig;
2>	adapt the filter such that the time characteristics of the filter are preserved at different input rates, observing that the filterCoefficent k assumes a sample rate equal to 200 ms;
NOTE 1:	If k is set to 0, no layer 3 filtering is applicable.
NOTE 2:	The filtering is performed in the same domain as used for evaluation of reporting criteria or for measurement reporting, i.e., logarithmic filtering for logarithmic measurements.
NOTE 3:	The filter input rate is implementation dependent, to fulfil the performance requirements set in [16]. For further details about the physical layer measurements, see TS 36.133 [16].
5.5.4	Measurement report triggering
5.5.4.1	General
The UE shall:
1>	for each measId included in the measIdList within VarMeasConfig:
2>	if the corresponding reportConfig includes a purpose set to reportStrongestCellsForSON:
3>	consider any neighbouring cell detected on the associated frequency to be applicable;
2>	else if the corresponding reportConfig includes a purpose set to reportCGI:
3>	consider any neighbouring cell detected on the associated frequency/ set of frequencies (GERAN) which has a physical cell identity matching the value of the cellForWhichToReportCGI included in the corresponding measObject within the VarMeasConfig to be applicable;
2>	else:
3>	if the corresponding measObject concerns E-UTRA:
4>	consider any neighbouring cell detected on the associated frequency to be applicable when the concerned cell is not included in the blackCellsToAddModList defined within the VarMeasConfig for this measId;
3>	else if the corresponding measObject concerns UTRA or CDMA2000:
4>	consider a neighbouring cell on the associated frequency to be applicable when the concerned cell is included in the cellsToAddModList defined within the VarMeasConfig for this measId (i.e. the cell is included in the white-list);
3>	else if the corresponding measObject concerns GERAN:
4>	consider a neighbouring cell on the associated set of frequencies to be applicable when the concerned cell matches the ncc-Permitted defined within the VarMeasConfig for this measId;
2>	if the triggerType is set to event and if the entry condition applicable for this event, i.e. the event corresponding with the eventId of the corresponding reportConfig within VarMeasConfig, is fulfilled for one or more applicable cells for all measurements after layer 3 filtering taken during timeToTrigger defined for this event within the VarMeasConfig, while the VarMeasReportList does not include an measurement reporting entry for this measId (a first cell triggers the event):
3>	include a measurement reporting entry within the VarMeasReportList for this measId;
3>	set the numberOfReportsSent defined within the VarMeasReportList for this measId to 0;
3>	include the concerned cell(s) in the cellsTriggeredList defined within the VarMeasReportList for this measId;
3>	initiate the measurement reporting procedure, as specified in 5.5.5;
2>	if the triggerType is set to event and if the entry condition applicable for this event, i.e. the event corresponding with the eventId of the corresponding reportConfig within VarMeasConfig, is fulfilled for one or more applicable cells not included in the cellsTriggeredList for all measurements after layer 3 filtering taken during timeToTrigger defined for this event within the VarMeasConfig (a subsequent cell triggers the event):
3>	set the numberOfReportsSent defined within the VarMeasReportList for this measId to 0;
3>	include the concerned cell(s) in the cellsTriggeredList defined within the VarMeasReportList for this measId;
3>	initiate the measurement reporting procedure, as specified in 5.5.5;
2>		if the triggerType is set to event and if the leaving condition applicable for this event is fulfilled for one or more of the cells included in the cellsTriggeredList defined within the VarMeasReportList for this measId for all measurements after layer 3 filtering taken during timeToTrigger defined within the VarMeasConfig for this event:
3>	remove the concerned cell(s) in the cellsTriggeredList defined within the VarMeasReportList for this measId;
3>	if reportOnLeave is set to TRUE for the corresponding reporting configuration:
4>	initiate the measurement reporting procedure, as specified in 5.5.5;
3>	if the cellsTriggeredList defined within the VarMeasReportList for this measId is empty:
4>	remove the measurement reporting entry within the VarMeasReportList for this measId;
4>	stop the periodical reporting timer for this measId, if running;
2>	if the purpose is included and set to reportStrongestCells or to reportStrongestCellsForSON and if a (first) measurement result is available for one or more applicable cells:
3>	include a measurement reporting entry within the VarMeasReportList for this measId;
3>	set the numberOfReportsSent defined within the VarMeasReportList for this measId to 0;
3>	initiate the measurement reporting procedure, as specified in 5.5.5;
NOTE 1:	If the purpose is set to reportStrongestCells, the UE initiates a first measurement report immediately after the quantity to be reported becomes available for at least either serving cell or one of the applicable cells. If the purpose is set to reportStrongestCellsForSON, the UE initiates a first measurement report when it has determined the strongest cells on the associated frequency.
2>	upon expiry of the periodical reporting timer for this measId:
3>	initiate the measurement reporting procedure, as specified in 5.5.5;
2>	if the purpose is included and set to reportCGI and if the UE acquired the information needed to set all fields of cellGlobalId for the requested cell:
3>	include a measurement reporting entry within the VarMeasReportList for this measId;
3>	set the numberOfReportsSent defined within the VarMeasReportList for this measId to 0;
3>	stop timer T321;
3>	initiate the measurement reporting procedure, as specified in 5.5.5;
2>	upon expiry of the T321 for this measId:
3>	include a measurement reporting entry within the VarMeasReportList for this measId;
3>	set the numberOfReportsSent defined within the VarMeasReportList for this measId to 0;
3>	initiate the measurement reporting procedure, as specified in 5.5.5;
NOTE 2:	The UE does not stop the periodical reporting with triggerType set to event or to periodical while the corresponding measurement is not performed due to the serving cell RSRP being equal to or better than s-Measure or due to the measurement gap not being setup.
NOTE 3:	If the UE is configured with DRX, the UE may delay the measurement reporting for event triggered and periodical triggered measurements until the Active Time, which is defined in TS 36.321 [6].
5.5.4.2	Event A1 (Serving becomes better than threshold)
The UE shall:
1>	consider the entering condition for this event to be satisfied when condition A1-1, as specified below, is fulfilled;
1>	consider the leaving condition for this event to be satisfied when condition A1-2, as specified below, is fulfilled;
Inequality A1-1 (Entering condition)

Inequality A1-2 (Leaving condition)

The variables in the formula are defined as follows:
Ms is the measurement result of the serving cell, not taking into account any offsets.
Hys is the hysteresis parameter for this event (i.e. hysteresis as defined within reportConfigEUTRA for this event).
Thresh is the threshold parameter for this event (i.e. a1-Threshold as defined within reportConfigEUTRA for this event).
Ms is expressed in dBm in case of RSRP, or in dB in case of RSRQ.
Hys is expressed in dB.
Thresh is expressed in the same unit as Ms.
5.5.4.3	Event A2 (Serving becomes worse than threshold)
The UE shall:
1>	consider the entering condition for this event to be satisfied when condition A2-1, as specified below, is fulfilled;
1>	consider the leaving condition for this event to be satisfied when condition A2-2, as specified below, is fulfilled;
Inequality A2-1 (Entering condition)

Inequality A2-2 (Leaving condition)

The variables in the formula are defined as follows:
Ms is the measurement result of the serving cell, not taking into account any offsets.
Hys is the hysteresis parameter for this event (i.e. hysteresis as defined within reportConfigEUTRA for this event).
Thresh is the threshold parameter for this event (i.e. a2-Threshold as defined within reportConfigEUTRA for this event).
Ms is expressed in dBm in case of RSRP, or in dB in case of RSRQ.
Hys is expressed in dB.
Thresh is expressed in the same unit as Ms.
5.5.4.4	Event A3 (Neighbour becomes offset better than serving)
The UE shall:
1>	consider the entering condition for this event to be satisfied when condition A3-1, as specified below, is fulfilled;
1>	consider the leaving condition for this event to be satisfied when condition A3-2, as specified below, is fulfilled;
Inequality A3-1 (Entering condition)

Inequality A3-2 (Leaving condition)

The variables in the formula are defined as follows:
Mn is the measurement result of the neighbouring cell, not taking into account any offsets. 
Ofn is the frequency specific offset of the frequency of the neighbour cell (i.e. offsetFreq as defined within measObjectEUTRA corresponding to the frequency of the neighbour cell).
Ocn is the cell specific offset of the neighbour cell (i.e. cellIndividualOffset as defined within measObjectEUTRA corresponding to the frequency of the neighbour cell), and set to zero if not configured for the neighbour cell.
Ms is the measurement result of the serving cell, not taking into account any offsets.
Ofs is the frequency specific offset of the serving frequency (i.e. offsetFreq as defined within measObjectEUTRA corresponding to the serving frequency).
Ocs is the cell specific offset of the serving cell (i.e. cellIndividualOffset as defined within measObjectEUTRA corresponding to the serving frequency), and is set to zero if not configured for the serving cell.
Hys is the hysteresis parameter for this event (i.e. hysteresis as defined within reportConfigEUTRA for this event).
Off is the offset parameter for this event (i.e. a3-Offset as defined within reportConfigEUTRA for this event).
Mn, Ms are expressed in dBm in case of RSRP, or in dB in case of RSRQ.
Ofn, Ocn, Ofs, Ocs, Hys, Off are expressed in dB.
5.5.4.5	Event A4 (Neighbour becomes better than threshold)
The UE shall:
1>	consider the entering condition for this event to be satisfied when condition A4-1, as specified below, is fulfilled;
1>	consider the leaving condition for this event to be satisfied when condition A4-2, as specified below, is fulfilled;
Inequality A4-1 (Entering condition)

Inequality A4-2 (Leaving condition)

The variables in the formula are defined as follows:
Mn is the measurement result of the neighbouring cell, not taking into account any offsets.
Ofn is the frequency specific offset of the frequency of the neighbour cell (i.e. offsetFreq as defined within measObjectEUTRA corresponding to the frequency of the neighbour cell).
Ocn is the cell specific offset of the neighbour cell (i.e. cellIndividualOffset as defined within measObjectEUTRA corresponding to the frequency of the neighbour cell), and set to zero if not configured for the neighbour cell.
Hys is the hysteresis parameter for this event (i.e. hysteresis as defined within reportConfigEUTRA for this event).
Thresh is the threshold parameter for this event (i.e. a4-Threshold as defined within reportConfigEUTRA for this event).
Mn is expressed in dBm in case of RSRP, or in dB in case of RSRQ.
Ofn, Ocn, Hys are expressed in dB.
Thresh is expressed in the same unit as Ms.
5.5.4.6	Event A5 (Serving becomes worse than threshold1 and neighbour becomes better than threshold2)
The UE shall:
1>	consider the entering condition for this event to be satisfied when both conditions A5-1 and condition A5-2, as specified below, are fulfilled;
1>	consider the leaving condition for this event to be satisfied when condition A5-3 or condition A5-4, i.e. at least one of the two, as specified below, is fulfilled;
Inequality A5-1 (Entering condition 1)

Inequality A5-2 (Entering condition 2)

Inequality A5-3 (Leaving condition 1)

Inequality A5-4 (Leaving condition 2)

The variables in the formula are defined as follows:
Ms is the measurement result of the serving cell, not taking into account any offsets.
Mn is the measurement result of the neighbouring cell, not taking into account any offsets.
Ofn is the frequency specific offset of the frequency of the neighbour cell (i.e. offsetFreq as defined within measObjectEUTRA corresponding to the frequency of the neighbour cell).
Ocn is the cell specific offset of the neighbour cell (i.e. cellIndividualOffset as defined within measObjectEUTRA corresponding to the frequency of the neighbour cell), and set to zero if not configured for the neighbour cell.
Hys is the hysteresis parameter for this event (i.e. hysteresis as defined within reportConfigEUTRA for this event).
Thresh1 is the threshold parameter for this event (i.e. a5-Threshold1 as defined within reportConfigEUTRA for this event).
Thresh2 is the threshold parameter for this event (i.e. a5-Threshold2 as defined within reportConfigEUTRA for this event).
Mn, Ms are expressed in dBm in case of RSRP, or in dB in case of RSRQ.
Ofn, Ocn, Hys are expressed in dB.
Thresh1 is expressed in the same unit as Ms.
Thresh2 is expressed in the same unit as Mn.
5.5.4.7	Event B1 (Inter RAT neighbour becomes better than threshold)
The UE shall:
1>	for UTRA and CDMA2000, only trigger the event for cells included in the corresponding measurement object;
1>	consider the entering condition for this event to be satisfied when condition B1-1, as specified below, is fulfilled;
1>	consider the leaving condition for this event to be satisfied when condition B1-2, as specified below, is fulfilled;
Inequality B1-1 (Entering condition)

Inequality B1-2 (Leaving condition)

The variables in the formula are defined as follows:
Mn is the measurement result of the inter-RAT neighbour cell, not taking into account any offsets.
Ofn is the frequency specific offset of the frequency of the inter-RAT neighbour cell (i.e. offsetFreq as defined within the measObject corresponding to the frequency of the neighbour inter-RAT cell).
Hys is the hysteresis parameter for this event (i.e. hysteresis as defined within reportConfigInterRAT for this event).
Thresh is the threshold parameter for this event (i.e. b1-Threshold as defined within reportConfigInterRAT for this event).
Mn is expressed in dBm or in dB, depending on the measurement quantity of the inter-RAT neighbour cell.
Ofn, Hys are expressed in dB.
Thresh is expressed in the same unit as Mn.
5.5.4.8	Event B2 (Serving becomes worse than threshold1 and inter RAT neighbour becomes better than threshold2)
The UE shall:
1>	for UTRA and CDMA2000, only trigger the event for cells included in the corresponding measurement object;
1>	consider the entering condition for this event to be satisfied when both condition B2-1 and condition B2-2, as specified below, are fulfilled;
1>	consider the leaving condition for this event to be satisfied when condition B2-3 or condition B2-4, i.e. at least one of the two, as specified below, is fulfilled;
Inequality B2-1 (Entering condition 1)

Inequality B2-2 (Entering condition 2)

Inequality B2-3 (Leaving condition 1)

Inequality B2-4 (Leaving condition 2)

The variables in the formula are defined as follows:
Ms is the measurement result of the serving cell, not taking into account any offsets.
Mn is the measurement result of the inter-RAT neighbour cell, not taking into account any offsets.
Ofn is the frequency specific offset of the frequency of the inter-RAT neighbour cell (i.e. offsetFreq as defined within the measObject corresponding to the frequency of the inter-RAT neighbour cell).
Hys is the hysteresis parameter for this event (i.e. hysteresis as defined within reportConfigInterRAT for this event).
Thresh1 is the threshold parameter for this event (i.e. b2-Threshold1 as defined within reportConfigInterRAT for this event).
Thresh2 is the threshold parameter for this event (i.e. b2-Threshold2 as defined within reportConfigInterRAT for this event).
Ms is expressed in dBm in case of RSRP, or in dB in case of RSRQ.
Mn is expressed in dBm or dB, depending on the measurement quantity of the inter-RAT neighbour cell.
Ofn, Hys are expressed in dB.
Thresh1 is expressed in the same unit as Ms.
Thresh2 is expressed in the same unit as Mn.
5.5.5	Measurement reporting

Figure 5.5.5-1: Measurement reporting
The purpose of this procedure is to transfer measurement results from the UE to E-UTRAN.
For the measId for which the measurement reporting procedure was triggered, the UE shall set the measResults within the MeasurementReport message as follows:
1>	set the measId to the measurement identity that triggered the measurement reporting;
1>	set the measResultServCell to include the quantities of serving cell;
1>	if there is at least one applicable neighbouring cell to report:
2>	set the measResultNeighCells to include the best neighbouring cells up to maxReportCells in accordance with the following:
3>	if the triggerType is set to event:
4>	include the cells included in the cellsTriggeredList as defined within the VarMeasReportList for this measId;
3>	else:
4>	include the applicable cells for which the new measurement results became available since the last periodical reporting or since the measurement was initiated or reset;
NOTE:	The reliability of the report (i.e. the certainty it contains the strongest cells on the concerned frequency) depends on the measurement configuration i.e. the reportInterval. The related performance requirements are specified in TS 36.133 [16].
3>	for each cell that is included in the measResultNeighCells, include the physCellId;
3>	if the triggerType is set to event; or the purpose is set to reportStrongestCells or to reportStrongestCellsForSON:
4>	for each included cell, include the layer 3 filtered measured results in accordance with the reportConfig for this measId, ordered as follows:
5>	if the measObject associated with this measId concerns E-UTRA:
6>	set the measResult to include the quantity(ies) indicated in the reportQuantity within the concerned reportConfig in order of decreasing triggerQuantity, i.e. the best cell is included first;
5>	else:
6>	set the measResult to the quantity as configured for the concerned RAT within the quantityConfig in order of decreasing quantity, i.e. the best cell is included first;
3>	else if the purpose is set to reportCGI:
4>	if the mandatory present fields of the cellGlobalId for the cell indicated by the cellForWhichToReportCGI in the associated measObject have been obtained:
5>	include the cgi-Info containing all the fields that have been successfully acquired;
1>	increment the numberOfReportsSent as defined within the VarMeasReportList for this measId by 1;
1>	stop the periodical reporting timer, if running;
1>	if the numberOfReportsSent as defined within the VarMeasReportList for this measId is less than the reportAmount as defined within the corresponding reportConfig for this measId:
2>	start the periodical reporting timer with the value of reportInterval as defined within the corresponding reportConfig for this measId;
1>	else:
2>	if the triggerType is set to periodical:
3> remove the entry within the VarMeasReportList for this measId;
3> remove this measId from the measIdList within VarMeasConfig;
1>	if the measured results are for CDMA2000 HRPD:
2>	set the preRegistrationStatusHRPD to the UEs CDMA2000 upper layers HRPD preRegistrationStatus;
1>	if the measured results are for CDMA2000 1xRTT:
2>	set the preRegistrationStatusHRPD to FALSE;
1>	submit the MeasurementReport message to lower layers for transmission, upon which the procedure ends;
5.5.6	Measurement related actions
5.5.6.1	Actions upon handover and re-establishment
E-UTRAN applies the handover procedure as follows:
-	when performing the handover procedure, as specified in 5.3.5.4, ensure that a measObjectId corresponding to the handover target carrier frequency is configured as a result of the procedures described in this sub-clause and in 5.3.5.4;
E-UTRAN applies the re-establishment procedure as follows:
-	when performing the connection re-establishment procedure, as specified in 5.3.7, ensure that a measObjectId corresponding to the target carrier frequency is configured as a result of the procedure described in this sub-clause and the subsequent connection reconfiguration procedure immediately following the re-establishment procedure;
The UE shall:
1>	for each measId included in the measIdList within VarMeasConfig:
2>	if the triggerType is set to periodical:
3>	remove this measId from the measIdList within VarMeasConfig:
1>	if the procedure was triggered due to inter-frequency handover or successful re-establishment to an inter-frequency cell, update the measId values in the measIdList within VarMeasConfig as follows:
2>	if a measObjectId value corresponding to the target carrier frequency exists in the measObjectList within VarMeasConfig:
3>	for each measId value in the measIdList:
4>	if the measId value is linked to the measObjectId value corresponding to the source carrier frequency:
5>	link this measId value to the measObjectId value corresponding to the target carrier frequency;
4>	else if the measId value is linked to the measObjectId value corresponding to the target carrier frequency:
5>	link this measId value to the measObjectId value corresponding to the source carrier frequency;
2>	else:
3>	remove all measId values that are linked to the measObjectId value corresponding to the source carrier frequency;
1>	remove all measurement reporting entries within VarMeasReportList;
1>	reset the periodical reporting timer or timer T321, whichever one is running, as well as associated information (e.g. timeToTrigger) for all measId;
1>	release the measurement gaps, if activated;
NOTE:	If the UE requires measurement gaps to perform inter-frequency or inter-RAT measurements, the UE resumes the inter-frequency and inter-RAT measurements after the E-UTRAN has setup the measurement gaps.
5.5.6.2	Speed dependant scaling of measurement related parameters
The UE shall adjust the value of the following parameter configured by the E-UTRAN depending on the UE speed: timeToTrigger. The UE shall apply 3 different levels, which are selected as follows:
The UE shall:
1>	perform mobility state detection using the mobility state detection as specified in TS 36.304 [4] with the following modifications:
2>	counting handovers instead of cell reselections;
2>	applying the parameter applicable for RRC_CONNECTED as included in speedStatePars within VarMeasConfig;
1>	if high mobility state is detected:
2>	use the timeToTrigger value multiplied by sf-High within VarMeasConfig;
1>	else if medium mobility state is detected:
2>	use the timeToTrigger value multiplied by sf-Medium within VarMeasConfig;
   1>	else
2>	no scaling is applied;
5.6	Other
5.6.1	DL information transfer
5.6.1.1	General

Figure 5.6.1.1-1: DL information transfer
The purpose of this procedure is to transfer NAS or (tunnelled) non-3GPP dedicated information from E-UTRAN to a UE in RRC_CONNECTED.
5.6.1.2	Initiation
E-UTRAN initiates the DL information transfer procedure whenever there is a need to transfer NAS or non-3GPP dedicated information. E-UTRAN initiates the DL information transfer procedure by sending the DLInformationTransfer message.
5.6.1.3	Reception of the DLInformationTransfer by the UE
Upon receiving DLInformationTransfer message, the UE shall:
1>	if the dedicatedInfoType is set to dedicatedInfoNAS:
2>	forward the dedicatedInfoNAS to the NAS upper layers.
1>	if the dedicatedInfoType is set to dedicatedInfoCDMA2000-1XRTT or to dedicatedInfoCDMA2000-HRPD:
2>	forward the dedicatedInfoCDMA2000 to the CDMA2000 upper layers;
5.6.2	UL information transfer
5.6.2.1	General

Figure 5.6.2.1-1: UL information transfer
The purpose of this procedure is to transfer NAS or (tunnelled) non-3GPP dedicated information from the UE to E-UTRAN.
5.6.2.2	Initiation
A UE in RRC_CONNECTED initiates the UL information transfer procedure whenever there is a need to transfer NAS or non-3GPP dedicated information, except at RRC connection establishment in which case the NAS information is piggybacked to the RRCConnectionSetupComplete message. The UE initiates the UL information transfer procedure by sending the ULInformationTransfer message. When CDMA2000 information has to be transferred, the UE shall initiate the procedure only if SRB2 is established.
5.6.2.3	Actions related to transmission of ULInformationTransfer message
The UE shall set the contents of the ULInformationTransfer message as follows:
1>	if there is a need to transfer NAS information:
2>	set the dedicatedInfoType to include the dedicatedInfoNAS;
1>	if there is a need to transfer CDMA2000 1XRTT information:
2>	set the dedicatedInfoType to include the dedicatedInfoCDMA2000-1XRTT;
1>	if there is a need to transfer CDMA2000 HRPD information:
2>	set the dedicatedInfoType to include the dedicatedInfoCDMA2000-HRPD;
1> submit the ULInformationTransfer message to lower layers for transmission, upon which the procedure ends;
5.6.2.4	Failure to deliver ULInformationTransfer message
The UE shall:
1> if mobility (i.e. handover, RRC connection re-establishment) occurs before the successful delivery of ULInformationTransfer messages has been confirmed by lower layers:
2>	inform upper layers about the possible failure to deliver the information contained in the concerned ULInformationTransfer messages;
5.6.3	UE capability transfer
5.6.3.1	General

Figure 5.6.3.1-1: UE capability transfer
The purpose of this procedure is to transfer UE radio access capability information from the UE to E-UTRAN.
If the UE has changed its E-UTRAN radio access capabilities, the UE shall request higher layers to initiate the necessary NAS procedures (see TS 23.401) that would result in the update of UE radio access capabilities using a new RRC connection.
NOTE:	Change of the UEs GERAN and/ or UTRAN UE radio capabilities in RRC_IDLE is supported by use of Tracking Area Update.
5.6.3.2	Initiation
E-UTRAN initiates the procedure to a UE in RRC_CONNECTED when it needs (additional) UE radio access capability information.
5.6.3.3	Reception of the UECapabilityEnquiry by the UE
The UE shall:
1>	set the contents of UECapabilityInformation message as follows:
2>	if the ue-CapabilityRequest includes eutra:
3>	include the UE-EUTRA-Capability within a ue-CapabilityRAT-Container and with the rat-Type set to eutra;
2>	if the ue-CapabilityRequest includes geran-cs and if the UE supports GERAN CS domain:
3>	include the UE radio access capabilities for GERAN CS within a ue-CapabilityRAT-Container and with the rat-Type set to geran-cs;
2>	if the ue-CapabilityRequest includes geran-ps and if the UE supports GERAN PS domain:
3>	include the UE radio access capabilities for GERAN PS within a ue-CapabilityRAT-Container and with the rat-Type set to geran-ps;
2>	if the ue-CapabilityRequest includes utra and if the UE supports UTRA:
3>	include the UE radio access capabilities for UTRA within a ue-CapabilityRAT-Container and with the rat-Type set to utra;
2>	if the ue-CapabilityRequest includes cdma2000-1XRTT and if the UE supports CDMA2000 1xRTT:
3>	include the UE radio access capabilities for CDMA2000 within a ue-CapabilityRAT-Container and with the rat-Type set to cdma2000-1XRTT;
1> submit the UECapabilityInformation message to lower layers for transmission, upon which the procedure ends;
5.6.4	CSFB to 1x Parameter transfer
5.6.4.1	General

Figure 5.6.4.1-1: CSFB to 1x Parameter transfer
The purpose of this procedure is to transfer the CDMA2000 1xRTT parameters required to register the UE in the CDMA2000 1xRTT network for CSFB support.
5.6.4.2	Initiation
A UE in RRC_CONNECTED initiates the CSFB to 1x Parameter transfer procedure upon request from the CDMA2000 upper layers. The UE initiates the CSFB to 1x Parameter transfer procedure by sending the CSFBParametersRequestCDMA2000 message.
5.6.4.3	Actions related to transmission of CSFBParametersRequestCDMA2000 message
The UE shall:
1>	submit the CSFBParametersRequestCDMA2000 message to lower layers for transmission using the current configuration;
5.6.4.4	Reception of the CSFBParametersResponseCDMA2000 message
Upon reception of the CSFBParametersResponseCDMA2000 message, the UE shall:
1>	forward the rand and the mobilityParameters to the CDMA2000 1xRTT upper layers;
5.7	Generic error handling
5.7.1	General
The generic error handling defined in the subsequent sub-clauses applies unless explicitly specified otherwise e.g. within the procedure specific error handling.
The UE shall consider a value as not comprehended when it is set:
-	to an extended value that is not defined in the version of the transfer syntax supported by the UE.
-	to a spare or reserved value unless the specification defines specific behaviour that the UE shall apply upon receiving the concerned spare/ reserved value.
The UE shall consider a field as not comprehended when it is defined:
-	as spare or reserved unless the specification defines specific behaviour that the UE shall apply upon receiving the concerned spare/ reserved field.
5.7.2	ASN.1 violation or encoding error
The UE shall:
1>	when receiving an RRC message on the BCCH, PCCH or CCCH for which the abstract syntax is invalid:
2>	ignore the message;
NOTE	This section applies in case one or more fields is set to a code point not defined in this version of the transfer syntax. In this case, it may not be  possible to reliably detect which field is in the error hence the error handling is at the message level.
5.7.3	Field set to a not comprehended value
The UE shall, when receiving an RRC message on any logical channel:
1>	if the message includes a field that has a value that the UE does not comprehend:
2>	if a default value is defined for this field:
3>	treat the message while using the default value defined for this field;
2>	else if the concerned field is optional:
3>	treat the message as if the field were absent and in accordance with the need code for absence of the concerned field;
2>	else:
3>	treat the message as if the field were absent and in accordance with sub-clause 5.7.4;
5.7.4	Mandatory field missing
The UE shall:
1>	if the message includes a field that is mandatory to include in the message (e.g. because conditions for mandatory presence are fulfilled) and that field is absent or treated as absent:
2>	if the RRC message was received on DCCH or CCCH:
3>	ignore the message;
2>	else:
3>	if the field concerns a (sub-field of) an entry of a list (i.e. a SEQUENCE OF):
4>	treat the list as if the entry including the missing or not comprehended field was not present;
3>	else if the field concerns a sub-field of another field, referred to as the 'parent' field i.e. the field that is one nesting level up compared to the erroneous field:
4>	consider the 'parent' field to be set to a not comprehended value;
4>	apply the generic error handling to the subsequent 'parent' field(s), until reaching the top nesting level i.e. the message level;
3>	else (field at message level):
4>	ignore the message;
NOTE:	The error handling defined in these sub-clauses implies that the UE ignores a message with the message type or version set to a not comprehended value.
5.7.5	Not comprehended field
The UE shall, when receiving an RRC message on any logical channel:
1>	if the message includes a field that the UE does not comprehend:
2>	treat the rest of the message as if the field was absent;
NOTE:	This section does not apply to the case of an extension to the value range of a field.  Such cases are addressed instead by the requirements in section 5.7.3.
6	Protocol data units, formats and parameters (tabular & ASN.1)
6.1	General
The contents of each RRC message is specified in sub-clause 6.2 using ASN.1 to specify the message syntax and using tables when needed to provide further detailed information about the information elements specified in the message syntax. The syntax of the information elements that are defined as stand-alone abstract types is further specified in a similar manner in sub-clause 6.3.
The need for information elements to be present in a message or an abstract type, i.e., the ASN.1 fields that are specified as OPTIONAL in the abstract notation (ASN.1), is specified by means of comment text tags attached to the OPTIONAL statement in the abstract syntax. All comment text tags are available for use in the downlink direction only. The meaning of each tag is specified in table 6.1-1.
Table 6.1-1: Meaning of abbreviations used to specify the need for information elements to be present
Abbreviation
Meaning
Cond conditionTag
(Used in downlink only)
Conditionally present
An information element for which the need is specified by means of conditions. For each conditionTag, the need is specified in a tabular form following the ASN.1 segment. In case, according to the conditions, a field is not present, the UE takes no action and where applicable shall continue to use the existing value (and/ or the associated functionality) unless explicitly stated otherwise in the description of the field itself.
Need OP
(Used in downlink only)
 Optionally present
An information element that is optional to signal. For downlink messages, the UE is not required to take any special action on absence of the IE beyond what is specified in the procedural text or the field description table following the ASN.1 segment. The UE behaviour on absence should be captured either in the procedural text or in the field description.
Need ON
(Used in downlink only)
Optionally present, No action
An information element that is optional to signal. If the message is received by the UE, and in case the information element is absent, the UE takes no action and where applicable shall continue to use the existing value (and/ or the associated functionality).
Need OR
(Used in downlink only)
 Optionally present, Release
An information element that is optional to signal. If the message is received by the UE, and in case the information element is absent, the UE shall discontinue/ stop using/ delete any existing value (and/ or the associated functionality).

Any IE with Need ON in system information shall be interpreted as Need OR.
6.2	RRC messages
NOTE:	The messages included in this section reflect the current status of the discussions. Additional messages may be included at a later stage.
6.2.1	General message structure
	EUTRA-RRC-Definitions
This ASN.1 segment is the start of the EUTRA RRC PDU definitions.
-- ASN1START

EUTRA-RRC-Definitions DEFINITIONS AUTOMATIC TAGS ::=

BEGIN

-- ASN1STOP

	BCCH-BCH-Message
The BCCH-BCH-Message class is the set of RRC messages that may be sent from the EUTRAN to the UE via BCH on the BCCH logical channel.
-- ASN1START

BCCH-BCH-Message ::= SEQUENCE {
	message					BCCH-BCH-MessageType
}

BCCH-BCH-MessageType ::=						MasterInformationBlock

-- ASN1STOP

	BCCH-DL-SCH-Message
The BCCH-DL-SCH-Message class is the set of RRC messages that may be sent from the EUTRAN to the UE via DLSCH on the BCCH logical channel.
-- ASN1START

BCCH-DL-SCH-Message ::= SEQUENCE {
	message					BCCH-DL-SCH-MessageType
}

BCCH-DL-SCH-MessageType ::= CHOICE {
	c1						CHOICE {
		systemInformation						SystemInformation,
		systemInformationBlockType1				SystemInformationBlockType1
	},
	messageClassExtension	SEQUENCE {}
}

-- ASN1STOP

	PCCH-Message
The PCCH-Message class is the set of RRC messages that may be sent from the EUTRAN to the UE on the PCCH logical channel.
-- ASN1START

PCCH-Message ::= SEQUENCE {
	message					PCCH-MessageType
}

PCCH-MessageType ::= CHOICE {
	c1						CHOICE {
		paging									Paging
	},
	messageClassExtension	SEQUENCE {}
}

-- ASN1STOP

	DL-CCCH-Message
The DL-CCCH-Message class is the set of RRC messages that may be sent from the EUTRAN to the UE on the downlink CCCH logical channel.
-- ASN1START

DL-CCCH-Message ::= SEQUENCE {
	message					DL-CCCH-MessageType
}

DL-CCCH-MessageType ::= CHOICE {
	c1						CHOICE {
		rrcConnectionReestablishment			RRCConnectionReestablishment,
		rrcConnectionReestablishmentReject		RRCConnectionReestablishmentReject,
		rrcConnectionReject						RRCConnectionReject,
		rrcConnectionSetup						RRCConnectionSetup
	},
	messageClassExtension	SEQUENCE {}
}

-- ASN1STOP

	DL-DCCH-Message
The DL-DCCH-Message class is the set of RRC messages that may be sent from the EUTRAN to the UE on the downlink DCCH logical channel.
-- ASN1START

DL-DCCH-Message ::= SEQUENCE {
	message					DL-DCCH-MessageType
}

DL-DCCH-MessageType ::= CHOICE {
	c1						CHOICE {
		csfbParametersResponseCDMA2000			CSFBParametersResponseCDMA2000,
		dlInformationTransfer					DLInformationTransfer,
		handoverFromEUTRAPreparationRequest		HandoverFromEUTRAPreparationRequest,
		mobilityFromEUTRACommand				MobilityFromEUTRACommand,
		rrcConnectionReconfiguration			RRCConnectionReconfiguration,
		rrcConnectionRelease					RRCConnectionRelease,
		securityModeCommand						SecurityModeCommand,
		ueCapabilityEnquiry						UECapabilityEnquiry,
		counterCheck							CounterCheck,
		spare7 NULL,
		spare6 NULL, spare5 NULL, spare4 NULL,
		spare3 NULL, spare2 NULL, spare1 NULL
	},
	messageClassExtension	SEQUENCE {}
}

-- ASN1STOP

	UL-CCCH-Message
The UL-CCCH-Message class is the set of RRC messages that may be sent from the UE to the EUTRAN on the uplink CCCH logical channel.
-- ASN1START

UL-CCCH-Message ::= SEQUENCE {
	message					UL-CCCH-MessageType
}

UL-CCCH-MessageType ::= CHOICE {
	c1						CHOICE {
		rrcConnectionReestablishmentRequest		RRCConnectionReestablishmentRequest,
		rrcConnectionRequest					RRCConnectionRequest
	},
	messageClassExtension	SEQUENCE {}
}

-- ASN1STOP

	UL-DCCH-Message
The UL-DCCH-Message class is the set of RRC messages that may be sent from the UE to the EUTRAN on the uplink DCCH logical channel.
-- ASN1START

UL-DCCH-Message ::= SEQUENCE {
	message					UL-DCCH-MessageType
}

UL-DCCH-MessageType ::= CHOICE {
	c1						CHOICE {
		csfbParametersRequestCDMA2000			CSFBParametersRequestCDMA2000,
		measurementReport						MeasurementReport,
		rrcConnectionReconfigurationComplete	RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete,
		rrcConnectionReestablishmentComplete	RRCConnectionReestablishmentComplete,
		rrcConnectionSetupComplete				RRCConnectionSetupComplete,
		securityModeComplete					SecurityModeComplete,
		securityModeFailure						SecurityModeFailure,
		ueCapabilityInformation					UECapabilityInformation,
          ulHandoverPreparationTransfer			ULHandoverPreparationTransfer,
		ulInformationTransfer					ULInformationTransfer,
		counterCheckResponse					CounterCheckResponse,
		spare5 NULL, spare4 NULL,
		spare3 NULL, spare2 NULL, spare1 NULL
	},
	messageClassExtension	SEQUENCE {}
}

-- ASN1STOP

6.2.2	Message definitions
	CounterCheck
The CounterCheck message is used by the E-UTRAN to indicate the current COUNT MSB values associated to each DRB and to request the UE to compare these to its COUNT MSB values and to report the comparison results to E-UTRAN.
Signalling radio bearer: SRB1
RLC-SAP: AM
Logical channel: DCCH
Direction: EUTRAN to UE
CounterCheck message
-- ASN1START

CounterCheck ::=			SEQUENCE {
	rrc-TransactionIdentifier			RRC-TransactionIdentifier,
	criticalExtensions					CHOICE {
		c1									CHOICE {
			counterCheck-r8						CounterCheck-r8-IEs,
			spare3 NULL, spare2 NULL, spare1 NULL
		},
		criticalExtensionsFuture			SEQUENCE {}
	}
}

CounterCheck-r8-IEs ::=	SEQUENCE {
	drb-CountMSB-InfoList				DRB-CountMSB-InfoList,
	nonCriticalExtension				SEQUENCE {}							OPTIONAL	--Need OP
}

DRB-CountMSB-InfoList::=		SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxDRB)) OF DRB-CountMSB-Info

DRB-CountMSB-Info ::=	SEQUENCE {
	drb-Identity					DRB-Identity,
	countMSB-Uplink					INTEGER(0..33554431),
	countMSB-Downlink				INTEGER(0..33554431)
}

-- ASN1STOP

CounterCheck field descriptions
drb-CountMSB-InfoList
Indicates the MSBs of the COUNT values of the DRBs.
count-MSB-Uplink
Indicates the value of 25 MSBs from uplink COUNT associated to this DRB.
count-MSB-Downlink
Indicates the value of 25 MSBs from downlink COUNT associated to this DRB.

	CounterCheckResponse
The CounterCheckResponse message is used by the UE to respond to a CounterCheck message.
Signalling radio bearer: SRB1
RLC-SAP: AM
Logical channel: DCCH
Direction: UE to EUTRAN
CounterCheckResponse message
-- ASN1START

CounterCheckResponse ::=			SEQUENCE {
	rrc-TransactionIdentifier			RRC-TransactionIdentifier,
	criticalExtensions					CHOICE {
		counterCheckResponse-r8				CounterCheckResponse-r8-IEs,
		criticalExtensionsFuture			SEQUENCE {}
	}
}

CounterCheckResponse-r8-IEs ::=	SEQUENCE {
	drb-CountInfoList					DRB-CountInfoList,
	nonCriticalExtension				SEQUENCE {}							OPTIONAL
}

DRB-CountInfoList ::=			SEQUENCE (SIZE (0..maxDRB)) OF DRB-CountInfo

DRB-CountInfo ::=	SEQUENCE {
	drb-Identity					DRB-Identity,
	count-Uplink					INTEGER(0..4294967295),
	count-Downlink					INTEGER(0..4294967295)
}

-- ASN1STOP

CounterCheckResponse field descriptions
drb-CountInfoList
Indicates the COUNT values of the DRBs.
count-Uplink
Indicates the value of uplink COUNT associated to this DRB.
count-Downlink
Indicates the value of downlink COUNT associated to this DRB.

	CSFBParametersRequestCDMA2000
The CSFBParametersRequestCDMA2000 message is used by the UE to obtain the CDMA2000 1xRTT Parameters from the network. The UE needs these parameters to generate the CDMA2000 1xRTT Registration message used to register with the CDMA2000 1xRTT Network which is required to support CSFB to CDMA2000 1xRTT.
Signalling radio bearer: SRB1
RLC-SAP: AM
Logical channel: DCCH
Direction: UE to EUTRAN
CSFBParametersRequestCDMA2000 message
-- ASN1START

CSFBParametersRequestCDMA2000 ::= SEQUENCE {
	criticalExtensions					CHOICE {
		csfbParametersRequestCDMA2000-r8	CSFBParametersRequestCDMA2000-r8-IEs,
		criticalExtensionsFuture			SEQUENCE {}
	}
}

CSFBParametersRequestCDMA2000-r8-IEs ::= SEQUENCE {
	nonCriticalExtension				SEQUENCE {}						OPTIONAL
}
-- ASN1STOP

	CSFBParametersResponseCDMA2000
The CSFBParametersResponseCDMA2000 message is used to provide the CDMA2000 1xRTT Parameters to the UE so the UE can register with the CDMA2000 1xRTT Network to support CSFB to CDMA2000 1xRTT.
Signalling radio bearer: SRB1
RLC-SAP: AM
Logical channel: DCCH
Direction: EUTRAN to UE
CSFBParametersResponseCDMA2000 message
-- ASN1START

CSFBParametersResponseCDMA2000 ::= SEQUENCE {
	rrc-TransactionIdentifier			RRC-TransactionIdentifier,
	criticalExtensions						CHOICE {
		csfbParametersResponseCDMA2000-r8		CSFBParametersResponseCDMA2000-r8-IEs,
		criticalExtensionsFuture				SEQUENCE {}
	}
}

CSFBParametersResponseCDMA2000-r8-IEs ::= SEQUENCE {
	rand									RAND-CDMA2000,
	mobilityParameters						MobilityParametersCDMA2000,
	nonCriticalExtension					SEQUENCE {}						OPTIONAL	--Need OP
}

-- ASN1STOP

	DLInformationTransfer
The DLInformationTransfer message is used for the downlink transfer of dedicated NAS information.
Signalling radio bearer: SRB2 or SRB1 (only if SRB2 not established yet. If SRB2 is suspended, E-UTRAN does not send this message until SRB2 is resumed.)
RLC-SAP: AM
Logical channel: DCCH
Direction: EUTRAN to UE
DLInformationTransfer message
-- ASN1START

DLInformationTransfer ::=			SEQUENCE {
	rrc-TransactionIdentifier			RRC-TransactionIdentifier,
	criticalExtensions					CHOICE {
		c1									CHOICE {
			dlInformationTransfer-r8			DLInformationTransfer-r8-IEs,
			spare3 NULL, spare2 NULL, spare1 NULL
		},
		criticalExtensionsFuture			SEQUENCE {}
	}
}

DLInformationTransfer-r8-IEs ::=	SEQUENCE {
	dedicatedInfoType					CHOICE {
		dedicatedInfoNAS					DedicatedInfoNAS,
		dedicatedInfoCDMA2000-1XRTT			DedicatedInfoCDMA2000,
		dedicatedInfoCDMA2000-HRPD			DedicatedInfoCDMA2000
	},
	nonCriticalExtension				SEQUENCE {}						OPTIONAL	--Need OP
}

-- ASN1STOP

	HandoverFromEUTRAPreparationRequest (CDMA2000)
The HandoverFromEUTRAPreparationRequest message is used to trigger the handover preparation procedure with a CDMA2000 RAT.
Signalling radio bearer: SRB1
RLC-SAP: AM
Logical channel: DCCH
Direction: EUTRAN to UE
HandoverFromEUTRAPreparationRequest message
-- ASN1START

HandoverFromEUTRAPreparationRequest ::= SEQUENCE {
	rrc-TransactionIdentifier		RRC-TransactionIdentifier,
	criticalExtensions					CHOICE {
		c1									CHOICE {
			handoverFromEUTRAPreparationRequest-r8
												HandoverFromEUTRAPreparationRequest-r8-IEs,
			spare3 NULL, spare2 NULL, spare1 NULL
		},
		criticalExtensionsFuture			SEQUENCE {}
	}
}

HandoverFromEUTRAPreparationRequest-r8-IEs ::= SEQUENCE {
	cdma2000-Type						CDMA2000-Type,
	rand								RAND-CDMA2000				OPTIONAL,  -- Cond cdma2000-Type
	mobilityParameters					MobilityParametersCDMA2000	OPTIONAL,  -- Cond cdma2000-Type
	nonCriticalExtension				SEQUENCE {}					OPTIONAL	-- Need OP
}

-- ASN1STOP


Conditional presence
Explanation
cdma2000-Type
The field is mandatory present if the cdma2000-Type = type1XRTT; otherwise it is not present.

	MasterInformationBlock
The MasterInformationBlock includes the system information transmitted on BCH.
Signalling radio bearer: N/A
RLC-SAP: TM
Logical channel: BCCH
Direction: EUTRAN to UE
MasterInformationBlock
-- ASN1START

MasterInformationBlock ::=			SEQUENCE {
	dl-Bandwidth						ENUMERATED {
											n6, n15, n25, n50, n75, n100},
	phich-Config						PHICH-Config,
	systemFrameNumber					BIT STRING (SIZE (8)),
	spare								BIT STRING (SIZE (10))
}


-- ASN1STOP

MasterInformationBlock field descriptions
dl-Bandwidth
Parameter: transmission bandwidth configuration, NRB in downlink, see TS 36.101 [42, table 5.6-1]. n6 corresponds to 6 resource blocks, n15 to 15 resource blocks and so on.
systemFrameNumber
Defines the 8 most significant bits of the SFN, see TS 36.211 [21, 6.6.1]. The 2 least significant bits of the SFN are acquired implicitly in the P-BCH decoding, i.e. timing of 40ms P-BCH TTI indicates 2 least significant bits (within 40ms P-BCH TTI, the first radio frame: 00, the second radio frame: 01, the third radio frame: 10, the last radio frame: 11).

	MeasurementReport
The MeasurementReport message is used for the indication of measurement results.
Signalling radio bearer: SRB1
RLC-SAP: AM
Logical channel: DCCH
Direction: UE to EUTRAN
MeasurementReport message
-- ASN1START

MeasurementReport ::=				SEQUENCE {
	criticalExtensions					CHOICE {
		c1									CHOICE{
			measurementReport-r8				MeasurementReport-r8-IEs,
			spare7 NULL,
			spare6 NULL, spare5 NULL, spare4 NULL,
			spare3 NULL, spare2 NULL, spare1 NULL
		},
		criticalExtensionsFuture			SEQUENCE {}
	}
}

MeasurementReport-r8-IEs ::=		SEQUENCE {
	measResults							MeasResults,
	nonCriticalExtension				SEQUENCE {}							OPTIONAL
}

-- ASN1STOP

	MobilityFromEUTRACommand
The MobilityFromEUTRACommand message is used to command handover or a cell change from EUTRA to another RAT (3GPP or non-3GPP).
Signalling radio bearer: SRB1
RLC-SAP: AM
Logical channel: DCCH
Direction: EUTRAN to UE
MobilityFromEUTRACommand message
-- ASN1START

MobilityFromEUTRACommand ::=		SEQUENCE {
	rrc-TransactionIdentifier			RRC-TransactionIdentifier,
	criticalExtensions					CHOICE {
		c1									CHOICE{
			mobilityFromEUTRACommand-r8			MobilityFromEUTRACommand-r8-IEs,
			spare3 NULL, spare2 NULL, spare1 	NULL
		},
		criticalExtensionsFuture			SEQUENCE {}
	}
}

MobilityFromEUTRACommand-r8-IEs ::=	SEQUENCE {
	cs-FallbackIndicator				BOOLEAN,
	purpose								CHOICE{
		handover							Handover,
		cellChangeOrder						CellChangeOrder
	},
	nonCriticalExtension				SEQUENCE {}							OPTIONAL	-- Need OP
}

Handover ::=						SEQUENCE {
	targetRAT-Type						ENUMERATED {
											utra, geran, cdma2000-1XRTT, cdma2000-HRPD,
											spare4,	spare3, spare2, spare1, ...},
	targetRAT-MessageContainer			OCTET STRING,
	nas-SecurityParamFromEUTRA			OCTET STRING (SIZE (1)) 	OPTIONAL,  	-- Cond UTRAGERAN
	systemInformation					SI-OrPSI-GERAN				OPTIONAL	-- Cond PSHO
}

CellChangeOrder ::=					SEQUENCE {
	t304								ENUMERATED {
											ms100, ms200, ms500, ms1000,
											ms2000, ms4000, ms8000, spare1},
	targetRAT-Type						CHOICE {
			geran							SEQUENCE {
				physCellId						PhysCellIdGERAN,
				carrierFreq						CarrierFreqGERAN,
				networkControlOrder				BIT STRING (SIZE (2)) 		OPTIONAL,	-- Need OP
				systemInformation				SI-OrPSI-GERAN				OPTIONAL	-- Need OP
			},
			...
	}
}

SI-OrPSI-GERAN ::=					CHOICE {
	si									SystemInfoListGERAN,
	psi									SystemInfoListGERAN
}

SystemInfoListGERAN ::=				SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxGERAN-SI)) OF
										OCTET STRING (SIZE (1..23))

-- ASN1STOP

MobilityFromEUTRACommand field descriptions
t304
Timer T304 as described in section 7.3. Value ms100 corresponds with 100 ms, ms200 corresponds with 200 ms and so on.
cs-FallbackIndicator
Indicates whether or not the CS Fallback procedure is triggered. E-UTRAN only applies value 'false' when targetRAT-Type is set to cdma2000-1XRTT or to cdma2000-HRPD.
targetRAT-Type
Indicates the target RAT type.
targetRAT-MessageContainer
The field contains a message specified in another standard, as indicated by the targetRAT-Type, and carries information about the target cell identifier(s) and radio parameters relevant for the target radio access technology. The correspondence between the value of the targetRAT-Type, the standard to apply and the message contained within the targetRAT-MessageContainer is shown below

A complete message is included, as specified in the other standard.
nas-SecurityParamFromEUTRA
Used to deliver the key synchronisation and Key freshness for the E-UTRAN to UTRAN handovers as specified in TS 33.401. The content of the parameter is defined in TS24.301.
carrierFreq
contains the carrier frequency of the target GERAN cell.
networkControlOrder
Parameter NETWORK_CONTROL_ORDER in TS 44.060 [36].
SystemInfoListGERAN
Each OCTET STRING contains one complete System Information (SI) message as defined in TS 44.018 [45, table 9.1.1] or a complete Packet System Information (PSI) message as defined in TS 44.060 [36, table 11.2.1]. If purpose = 'CellChangeOrder' and if the field is not present, the UE has to acquire this from the GERAN cell.

Conditional presence
Explanation
UTRAGERAN
The field is mandatory present if the targetRAT-Type is set to utra or geran; otherwise the field is not present
PSHO
The field is mandatory present in case of PS handover toward GERAN; otherwise the field is optionally present, but not used by the UE

	Paging
The Paging message is used for the notification of one or more UEs.
Signalling radio bearer: N/A
RLC-SAP: TM
Logical channel: PCCH
Direction: EUTRAN to UE
Paging message
-- ASN1START

Paging ::=					SEQUENCE {
	pagingRecordList					PagingRecordList 					OPTIONAL,	-- Need ON
	systemInfoModification				ENUMERATED {true}					OPTIONAL,	-- Need ON
	etws-Indication						ENUMERATED {true}					OPTIONAL,	-- Need ON
	nonCriticalExtension				SEQUENCE {}							OPTIONAL	-- Need OP
}

PagingRecordList ::=				SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxPageRec)) OF PagingRecord

PagingRecord ::=					SEQUENCE {
	ue-Identity							PagingUE-Identity,
	cn-Domain							ENUMERATED	{ps, cs},
	...
}

PagingUE-Identity ::=				CHOICE {
	s-TMSI								S-TMSI,
	imsi								IMSI,
	...
}

IMSI ::=							SEQUENCE (SIZE (6..21)) OF IMSI-Digit

IMSI-Digit::=						INTEGER (0..9)

-- ASN1STOP

Paging field descriptions
cn-Domain
Indicates the origin of paging.
ue-Identity
Provides the NAS identity of the UE that is being paged.
systemInfoModification
If present: indication of a BCCH modification other than SIB10 and SIB11.
etws-Indication
If present: indication of an ETWS primary notification and/ or ETWS secondary notification.
imsi
The International Mobile Subscriber Identity, a globally unique permanent subscriber identity, see TS 23.003 [27]. The first element contains the first IMSI digit, the second element contains the second IMSI digit and so on.

	RRCConnectionReconfiguration
The RRCConnectionReconfiguration message is the command to modify an RRC connection. It may convey information for measurement configuration, mobility control, radio resource configuration (including RBs, MAC main configuration and physical channel configuration) including any associated dedicated NAS information and security configuration.
Signalling radio bearer: SRB1
RLC-SAP: AM
Logical channel: DCCH
Direction: EUTRAN to UE
RRCConnectionReconfiguration message
-- ASN1START

RRCConnectionReconfiguration ::=	SEQUENCE {
	rrc-TransactionIdentifier			RRC-TransactionIdentifier,
	criticalExtensions					CHOICE {
		c1									CHOICE{
			rrcConnectionReconfiguration-r8		RRCConnectionReconfiguration-r8-IEs,
			spare7 NULL,
			spare6 NULL, spare5 NULL, spare4 NULL,
			spare3 NULL, spare2 NULL, spare1 NULL
		},
		criticalExtensionsFuture			SEQUENCE {}
	}
}

RRCConnectionReconfiguration-r8-IEs ::= SEQUENCE {
	measConfig							MeasConfig						OPTIONAL,	-- Need ON
	mobilityControlInfo					MobilityControlInfo				OPTIONAL,	-- Cond HO
	dedicatedInfoNASList				SEQUENCE (SIZE(1..maxDRB)) OF
											DedicatedInfoNAS			OPTIONAL,	-- Cond nonHO
	radioResourceConfigDedicated		RadioResourceConfigDedicated	OPTIONAL, -- Cond HO-toEUTRA
	securityConfigHO					SecurityConfigHO				OPTIONAL,	-- Cond HO
	nonCriticalExtension				SEQUENCE {}						OPTIONAL	-- Need OP
}

SecurityConfigHO ::=				SEQUENCE {
	handoverType						CHOICE {
		intraLTE							SEQUENCE {
			securityAlgorithmConfig				SecurityAlgorithmConfig		OPTIONAL,	-- Need OP
			keyChangeIndicator					BOOLEAN,
			nextHopChainingCount				NextHopChainingCount
		},
		interRAT							SEQUENCE {
			securityAlgorithmConfig				SecurityAlgorithmConfig,
			nas-SecurityParamToEUTRA			OCTET STRING (SIZE(6))
		}
	},
	...
}

-- ASN1STOP

RRCConnectionReconfiguration field descriptions
dedicatedInfoNASList
This field is used to transfer UE specific NAS layer information between the network and the UE. The RRC layer is transparent for each PDU in the list.
nas-securityParamToEUTRA
This field is used to transfer UE specific NAS layer information between the network and the UE. The RRC layer is transparent for this field, although it affects activation of AS- security after inter-RAT handover to E-UTRA. The content is defined in TS 24.301.
keyChangeIndicator
true is used only in an intra-cell handover when a KeNB key is derived from a native KASME key taken into use through the successful NAS SMC, as described in TS 33.401 [32] for KeNB re-keying. false is used in an intra-LTE handover when the new KeNB key is obtained from the current KeNB key or from the NH as described in TS 33.401 [32].
nextHopChainingCount
Parameter NCC: See TS 33.401 [32]

Conditional presence
Explanation
HO
The field is mandatory present in case of handover within E-UTRA or to E-UTRA; otherwise the field is not present.
nonHO
The field is not present in case of handover within E-UTRA or to E-UTRA; otherwise it is optional present, need ON.
HO-toEUTRA
The field is mandatory present in case of handover to E-UTRA; otherwise the field is optionally present, need ON.

	RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete
The RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete message is used to confirm the successful completion of an RRC connection reconfiguration.
Signalling radio bearer: SRB1
RLC-SAP: AM
Logical channel: DCCH
Direction: UE to EUTRAN
RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete message
-- ASN1START

RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete ::= SEQUENCE {
	rrc-TransactionIdentifier			RRC-TransactionIdentifier,
	criticalExtensions					CHOICE {
		rrcConnectionReconfigurationComplete-r8
											RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete-r8-IEs,
		criticalExtensionsFuture			SEQUENCE {}
	}
}

RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete-r8-IEs ::= SEQUENCE {
	nonCriticalExtension				SEQUENCE {}							OPTIONAL
}

-- ASN1STOP

	RRCConnectionReestablishment
The RRCConnectionReestablishment message is used to resolve contention and to re-establish SRB1.
Signalling radio bearer: SRB0
RLC-SAP: TM
Logical channel: CCCH
Direction: EUTRAN to UE
RRCConnectionReestablishment message
-- ASN1START

RRCConnectionReestablishment ::=	SEQUENCE {
	rrc-TransactionIdentifier			RRC-TransactionIdentifier,
	criticalExtensions					CHOICE {
		c1									CHOICE{
			rrcConnectionReestablishment-r8		RRCConnectionReestablishment-r8-IEs,
			spare7 NULL,
			spare6 NULL, spare5 NULL, spare4 	NULL,
			spare3 NULL, spare2 NULL, spare1 	NULL
		},
		criticalExtensionsFuture			SEQUENCE {}
	}
}

RRCConnectionReestablishment-r8-IEs ::= SEQUENCE {
	radioResourceConfigDedicated		RadioResourceConfigDedicated,
	nextHopChainingCount				NextHopChainingCount,
	nonCriticalExtension				SEQUENCE {}							OPTIONAL	-- Need OP
}

-- ASN1STOP

	RRCConnectionReestablishmentComplete
The RRCConnectionReestablishmentComplete message is used to confirm the successful completion of an RRC connection reestablishment.
Signalling radio bearer: SRB1
RLC-SAP: AM
Logical channel: DCCH
Direction: UE to EUTRAN
RRCConnectionReestablishmentComplete message
-- ASN1START

RRCConnectionReestablishmentComplete ::= SEQUENCE {
	rrc-TransactionIdentifier			RRC-TransactionIdentifier,
	criticalExtensions					CHOICE {
		rrcConnectionReestablishmentComplete-r8
											RRCConnectionReestablishmentComplete-r8-IEs,
		criticalExtensionsFuture			SEQUENCE {}
	}
}

RRCConnectionReestablishmentComplete-r8-IEs ::= SEQUENCE {
	nonCriticalExtension				SEQUENCE {}							OPTIONAL
}

-- ASN1STOP

	RRCConnectionReestablishmentReject
The RRCConnectionReestablishmentReject message is used to indicate the rejection of an RRC connection reestablishment request.
Signalling radio bearer: SRB0
RLC-SAP: TM
Logical channel: CCCH
Direction: EUTRAN to UE
RRCConnectionReestablishmentReject message
-- ASN1START

RRCConnectionReestablishmentReject ::= SEQUENCE {
	criticalExtensions					CHOICE {
		rrcConnectionReestablishmentReject-r8
											RRCConnectionReestablishmentReject-r8-IEs,
		criticalExtensionsFuture			SEQUENCE {}
	}
}

RRCConnectionReestablishmentReject-r8-IEs ::= SEQUENCE {
	nonCriticalExtension				SEQUENCE {}							OPTIONAL	-- Need OP
}

-- ASN1STOP

	RRCConnectionReestablishmentRequest
The RRCConnectionReestablishmentRequest message is used to request the reestablishment of an RRC connection.
Signalling radio bearer: SRB0
RLC-SAP: TM
Logical channel: CCCH
Direction: UE to EUTRAN
RRCConnectionReestablishmentRequest message
-- ASN1START

RRCConnectionReestablishmentRequest ::= SEQUENCE {
	criticalExtensions					CHOICE {
		rrcConnectionReestablishmentRequest-r8
											RRCConnectionReestablishmentRequest-r8-IEs,
		criticalExtensionsFuture			SEQUENCE {}
	}
}

RRCConnectionReestablishmentRequest-r8-IEs ::= SEQUENCE {
	ue-Identity							ReestabUE-Identity,
	reestablishmentCause				ReestablishmentCause,
	spare								BIT STRING (SIZE (2))
}

ReestabUE-Identity ::=				SEQUENCE {
	c-RNTI								C-RNTI,
	physCellId							PhysCellId,
	shortMAC-I							ShortMAC-I
}

ReestablishmentCause ::=			ENUMERATED {
										reconfigurationFailure, handoverFailure,
										otherFailure, spare1}

-- ASN1STOP

RRCConnectionReestablishmentRequest field descriptions
ue-Identity
UE identity included to retrieve UE context and to facilitate contention resolution by lower layers.
reestablishmentCause
Indicates the failure cause that triggered the re-establishment procedure.
physCellId
The Physical Cell Identity of the cell the UE was connected to prior to the failure.

	RRCConnectionReject
The RRCConnectionReject message is used to reject the RRC connection establishment.
Signalling radio bearer: SRB0
RLC-SAP: TM
Logical channel: CCCH
Direction: EUTRAN to UE
RRCConnectionReject message
-- ASN1START

RRCConnectionReject ::=				SEQUENCE {
	criticalExtensions					CHOICE {
		c1									CHOICE {
			rrcConnectionReject-r8				RRCConnectionReject-r8-IEs,
			spare3 NULL, spare2 NULL, spare1 NULL
		},
		criticalExtensionsFuture			SEQUENCE {}
	}
}

RRCConnectionReject-r8-IEs ::=		SEQUENCE {
	waitTime							INTEGER (1..16),
	nonCriticalExtension				SEQUENCE {}							OPTIONAL	-- Need OP
}

-- ASN1STOP

RRCConnectionReject field descriptions
waitTime
Wait time value in seconds.

	RRCConnectionRelease
The RRCConnectionRelease message is used to command the release of an RRC connection.
Signalling radio bearer: SRB1
RLC-SAP: AM
Logical channel: DCCH
Direction: EUTRAN to UE
RRCConnectionRelease message
-- ASN1START

RRCConnectionRelease ::=			SEQUENCE {
	rrc-TransactionIdentifier			RRC-TransactionIdentifier,
	criticalExtensions					CHOICE {
		c1									CHOICE {
			rrcConnectionRelease-r8				RRCConnectionRelease-r8-IEs,
			spare3 NULL, spare2 NULL, spare1 NULL
		},
		criticalExtensionsFuture			SEQUENCE {}
	}
}

RRCConnectionRelease-r8-IEs ::=		SEQUENCE {
	releaseCause						ReleaseCause,
	redirectedCarrierInfo				RedirectedCarrierInfo				OPTIONAL,	-- Need ON
	idleModeMobilityControlInfo			IdleModeMobilityControlInfo			OPTIONAL,	-- Need OP
	nonCriticalExtension				SEQUENCE {}							OPTIONAL	-- Need OP
}

ReleaseCause ::=				ENUMERATED {loadBalancingTAUrequired,
											other,spare2, spare1 }

RedirectedCarrierInfo ::=			CHOICE {
	eutra								ARFCN-ValueEUTRA,
	geran								CarrierFreqsGERAN,
	utra-FDD							ARFCN-ValueUTRA,
	utra-TDD							ARFCN-ValueUTRA,
	cdma2000-HRPD						CarrierFreqCDMA2000,
	cdma2000-1xRTT						CarrierFreqCDMA2000,
	...
}

IdleModeMobilityControlInfo ::=		SEQUENCE {
	freqPriorityListEUTRA				FreqPriorityListEUTRA			OPTIONAL,		-- Need ON
	freqPriorityListGERAN				FreqsPriorityListGERAN			OPTIONAL,		-- Need ON
	freqPriorityListUTRA-FDD			FreqPriorityListUTRA-FDD		OPTIONAL,		-- Need ON
	freqPriorityListUTRA-TDD			FreqPriorityListUTRA-TDD		OPTIONAL,		-- Need ON
	bandClassPriorityListHRPD			BandClassPriorityListHRPD		OPTIONAL,		-- Need ON
	bandClassPriorityList1XRTT			BandClassPriorityList1XRTT		OPTIONAL,		-- Need ON
	t320								ENUMERATED {
											min5, min10, min20, min30, min60, min120, min180,
											spare1}						OPTIONAL,		-- Need OR
	...
}

FreqPriorityListEUTRA ::=			SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxFreq)) OF FreqPriorityEUTRA

FreqPriorityEUTRA ::=				SEQUENCE {
	carrierFreq							ARFCN-ValueEUTRA,
	cellReselectionPriority				CellReselectionPriority
}

FreqsPriorityListGERAN ::=			SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxGNFG)) OF FreqsPriorityGERAN

FreqsPriorityGERAN ::=				SEQUENCE {
	carrierFreqs						CarrierFreqsGERAN,
	cellReselectionPriority				CellReselectionPriority
}

FreqPriorityListUTRA-FDD ::=		SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxUTRA-FDD-Carrier)) OF FreqPriorityUTRA-FDD

FreqPriorityUTRA-FDD ::=			SEQUENCE {
	carrierFreq							ARFCN-ValueUTRA,
	cellReselectionPriority				CellReselectionPriority
}

FreqPriorityListUTRA-TDD ::=		SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxUTRA-TDD-Carrier)) OF FreqPriorityUTRA-TDD

FreqPriorityUTRA-TDD ::=			SEQUENCE {
	carrierFreq							ARFCN-ValueUTRA,
	cellReselectionPriority				CellReselectionPriority
}

BandClassPriorityListHRPD ::=		SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxCDMA-BandClass)) OF BandClassPriorityHRPD 

BandClassPriorityHRPD ::=			SEQUENCE {
	bandClass							BandclassCDMA2000,
	cellReselectionPriority				CellReselectionPriority
}

BandClassPriorityList1XRTT ::=	SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxCDMA-BandClass)) OF BandClassPriority1XRTT 

BandClassPriority1XRTT ::=		SEQUENCE {
	bandClass							BandclassCDMA2000,
	cellReselectionPriority				CellReselectionPriority
}
-- ASN1STOP

RRCConnectionRelease field descriptions
releaseCause
The releaseCause is used to indicate the reason for releasing the RRC Connection.
redirectedCarrierInfo
The redirectedCarrierInfo indicates a carrier frequency (downlink for FDD) and is used to redirect the UE to another EUTRA or an inter-RAT carrier frequency, by means of the cell selection upon leaving RRC_CONNECTED as specified in TS 36.304 [4].
idleModeMobilityControlInfo
Provides dedicated cell reselection priorities. Used for cell reselection as specified in TS 36.304 [4].
freqPriorityListX
Provides a cell reselection priority for each frequency, by means of separate lists for each RAT (including E-UTRA).
carrierFreq or bandClass
The carrier frequency (UTRA and E-UTRA) and band class (HRPD and 1xRTT) for which the associated cellReselectionPriority is applied.
t320
Timer T320 as described in section 7.3. Value minN corresponds to N minutes.
carrierFreqs
The list of GERAN carrier frequencies organised into one group of GERAN carrier frequencies.

	RRCConnectionRequest
The RRCConnectionRequest message is used to request the establishment of an RRC connection.
Signalling radio bearer: SRB0
RLC-SAP: TM
Logical channel: CCCH
Direction: UE to EUTRAN
RRCConnectionRequest message
-- ASN1START

RRCConnectionRequest ::=			SEQUENCE {
	criticalExtensions					CHOICE {
		rrcConnectionRequest-r8				RRCConnectionRequest-r8-IEs,
		criticalExtensionsFuture			SEQUENCE {}
	}
}

RRCConnectionRequest-r8-IEs ::=		SEQUENCE {
	ue-Identity							InitialUE-Identity,
	establishmentCause					EstablishmentCause,
	spare								BIT STRING (SIZE (1))
}

InitialUE-Identity ::=				CHOICE {
	s-TMSI								S-TMSI,
	randomValue							BIT STRING (SIZE (40))
}

EstablishmentCause ::=				ENUMERATED {
										emergency, highPriorityAccess, mt-Access, mo-Signalling,
										mo-Data, spare3, spare2, spare1}

-- ASN1STOP

RRCConnectionRequest field descriptions
ue-Identity
UE identity included to facilitate contention resolution by lower layers.
establishmentCause
Provides the establishment cause for the RRC connection request as provided by the upper layers. W.r.t. the cause value names: highPriorityAccess concerns AC11..AC15, mt stands for Mobile Terminating and mo for Mobile Originating.
randomValue
Integer value in the range 0 to 240 ? 1.

	RRCConnectionSetup
The RRCConnectionSetup message is used to establish SRB1.
Signalling radio bearer: SRB0
RLC-SAP: TM
Logical channel: CCCH
Direction: EUTRAN to UE
RRCConnectionSetup message
-- ASN1START

RRCConnectionSetup ::=				SEQUENCE {
	rrc-TransactionIdentifier			RRC-TransactionIdentifier,
	criticalExtensions					CHOICE {
		c1									CHOICE {
			rrcConnectionSetup-r8				RRCConnectionSetup-r8-IEs,
			spare7 NULL,
			spare6 NULL, spare5 NULL, spare4 NULL,
			spare3 NULL, spare2 NULL, spare1 NULL
		},
		criticalExtensionsFuture			SEQUENCE {}
	}
}

RRCConnectionSetup-r8-IEs ::=		SEQUENCE {
	radioResourceConfigDedicated		RadioResourceConfigDedicated,
	nonCriticalExtension				SEQUENCE {}							OPTIONAL	-- Need OP
}

-- ASN1STOP

	RRCConnectionSetupComplete
The RRCConnectionSetupComplete message is used to confirm the successful completion of an RRC connection establishment.
Signalling radio bearer: SRB1
RLC-SAP: AM
Logical channel: DCCH
Direction: UE to EUTRAN
RRCConnectionSetupComplete message
-- ASN1START

RRCConnectionSetupComplete ::=		SEQUENCE {
	rrc-TransactionIdentifier			RRC-TransactionIdentifier,
	criticalExtensions					CHOICE {
		c1									CHOICE{
			rrcConnectionSetupComplete-r8		RRCConnectionSetupComplete-r8-IEs,
			spare3 NULL, spare2 NULL, spare1 NULL
		},
		criticalExtensionsFuture			SEQUENCE {}
	}
}

RRCConnectionSetupComplete-r8-IEs ::= SEQUENCE {
	selectedPLMN-Identity				INTEGER (1..6),
	registeredMME						RegisteredMME						OPTIONAL,
	dedicatedInfoNAS					DedicatedInfoNAS,
	nonCriticalExtension				SEQUENCE {}							OPTIONAL
}

RegisteredMME ::=					SEQUENCE {
	plmn-Identity						PLMN-Identity						OPTIONAL,
	mmegi								BIT STRING (SIZE (16)),
	mmec								MMEC
}

-- ASN1STOP

RRCConnectionSetupComplete field descriptions
selectedPLMN-Identity
Index of the PLMN selected by the UE from the plmn-IdentityList included in SIB1. 1 if the 1st PLMN is selected from the plmn-IdentityList included in SIB1, 2 if the 2nd PLMN is selected from the plmn-IdentityList included in SIB1 and so on.
registeredMME
This field is used to transfer the GUMMEI of the MME where the UE is registered, as provided by upper layers.
mmegi
Provides the Group Identity of the registered MME within the PLMN, as provided by upper layers, see TS 23.003 [27].

	SecurityModeCommand
The SecurityModeCommand message is used to command the activation of AS security.
Signalling radio bearer: SRB1
RLC-SAP: AM
Logical channel: DCCH
Direction: EUTRAN to UE
SecurityModeCommand message
-- ASN1START

SecurityModeCommand ::=				SEQUENCE {
	rrc-TransactionIdentifier			RRC-TransactionIdentifier,
	criticalExtensions					CHOICE {
		c1									CHOICE{
			securityModeCommand-r8				SecurityModeCommand-r8-IEs,
			spare3 NULL, spare2 NULL, spare1 NULL
		},
		criticalExtensionsFuture			SEQUENCE {}
	}
}

SecurityModeCommand-r8-IEs ::=		SEQUENCE {
	securityConfigSMC					SecurityConfigSMC,
	nonCriticalExtension				SEQUENCE {}							OPTIONAL	-- Need OP
}

SecurityConfigSMC ::=					SEQUENCE {
	securityAlgorithmConfig					SecurityAlgorithmConfig,
	...
}

-- ASN1STOP

	SecurityModeComplete
The SecurityModeComplete message is used to confirm the successful completion of a security mode command.
Signalling radio bearer: SRB1
RLC-SAP: AM
Logical channel: DCCH
Direction: UE to EUTRAN
SecurityModeComplete message
-- ASN1START

SecurityModeComplete ::=			SEQUENCE {
	rrc-TransactionIdentifier			RRC-TransactionIdentifier,
	criticalExtensions					CHOICE {
		securityModeComplete-r8				SecurityModeComplete-r8-IEs,
		criticalExtensionsFuture			SEQUENCE {}
	}
}

SecurityModeComplete-r8-IEs ::=		SEQUENCE {
	nonCriticalExtension				SEQUENCE {}							OPTIONAL
}

-- ASN1STOP

	SecurityModeFailure
The SecurityModeFailure message is used to indicate an unsuccessful completion of a security mode command.
Signalling radio bearer: SRB1
RLC-SAP: AM
Logical channel: DCCH
Direction: UE to EUTRAN
SecurityModeFailure message
-- ASN1START

SecurityModeFailure ::=				SEQUENCE {
	rrc-TransactionIdentifier			RRC-TransactionIdentifier,
	criticalExtensions					CHOICE {
		securityModeFailure-r8				SecurityModeFailure-r8-IEs,
		criticalExtensionsFuture			SEQUENCE {}
	}
}

SecurityModeFailure-r8-IEs ::=		SEQUENCE {
	nonCriticalExtension				SEQUENCE {}							OPTIONAL
}

-- ASN1STOP

	SystemInformation
The SystemInformation message is used to convey one or more System Information Blocks. All the SIBs included are transmitted with the same periodicity.
Signalling radio bearer: N/A
RLC-SAP: TM
Logical channel: BCCH
Direction: EUTRAN to UE
SystemInformation message
-- ASN1START

SystemInformation ::=				SEQUENCE {
	criticalExtensions					CHOICE {
		systemInformation-r8				SystemInformation-r8-IEs,
		criticalExtensionsFuture			SEQUENCE {}
	}
}
SystemInformation-r8-IEs ::=		SEQUENCE {
	sib-TypeAndInfo						SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxSIB)) OF CHOICE {
		sib2								SystemInformationBlockType2,
		sib3								SystemInformationBlockType3,
		sib4								SystemInformationBlockType4,
		sib5								SystemInformationBlockType5,
		sib6								SystemInformationBlockType6,
		sib7								SystemInformationBlockType7,
		sib8								SystemInformationBlockType8,
		sib9								SystemInformationBlockType9,
		sib10								SystemInformationBlockType10,
		sib11								SystemInformationBlockType11,
		...
	},
	nonCriticalExtension				SEQUENCE {}							OPTIONAL	-- Need OP
}

-- ASN1STOP

	SystemInformationBlockType1
SystemInformationBlockType1 contains information relevant when evaluating if a UE is allowed to access a cell and defines the scheduling of other system information.
Signalling radio bearer: N/A
RLC-SAP: TM
Logical channel: BCCH
Direction: EUTRAN to UE
SystemInformationBlockType1 message
-- ASN1START

SystemInformationBlockType1 ::=		SEQUENCE {
	cellAccessRelatedInfo				SEQUENCE {
		plmn-IdentityList					PLMN-IdentityList,
		trackingAreaCode					TrackingAreaCode,
		cellIdentity						CellIdentity,
		cellBarred							ENUMERATED {barred, notBarred},
		intraFreqReselection				ENUMERATED {allowed, notAllowed},
		csg-Indication						BOOLEAN,
		csg-Identity						BIT STRING (SIZE (27))	OPTIONAL	-- Need OR
	},
	cellSelectionInfo					SEQUENCE {
		q-RxLevMin							Q-RxLevMin,
		q-RxLevMinOffset					INTEGER (1..8)			OPTIONAL	-- Need OP
	},
	p-Max								P-Max						OPTIONAL,			-- Need OP
	freqBandIndicator					INTEGER (1..64),
	schedulingInfoList					SchedulingInfoList,
	tdd-Config							TDD-Config					OPTIONAL,	-- Cond TDD
	si-WindowLength						ENUMERATED {
											ms1, ms2, ms5, ms10, ms15, ms20,
											ms40},
	systemInfoValueTag					INTEGER (0..31),
	nonCriticalExtension				SEQUENCE {}					OPTIONAL	-- Need OP
}

PLMN-IdentityList ::=					SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..6)) OF PLMN-IdentityInfo

PLMN-IdentityInfo ::=					SEQUENCE {
	plmn-Identity							PLMN-Identity,
	cellReservedForOperatorUse				ENUMERATED {reserved, notReserved}
}

SchedulingInfoList ::= SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxSI-Message)) OF SchedulingInfo

SchedulingInfo ::=	SEQUENCE {
	si-Periodicity						ENUMERATED {
											rf8, rf16, rf32, rf64, rf128, rf256, rf512},
	sib-MappingInfo						SIB-MappingInfo
}

SIB-MappingInfo ::= SEQUENCE (SIZE (0..maxSIB-1)) OF SIB-Type

SIB-Type ::=						ENUMERATED {
										sibType3, sibType4, sibType5, sibType6,
										sibType7, sibType8, sibType9, sibType10,
										sibType11, spare7, spare6, spare5,
										spare4, spare3, spare2, spare1, ...}

-- ASN1STOP

SystemInformationBlockType1 field descriptions
plmn-IdentityList
List of PLMN identities. The first listed PLMN-Identity is the primary PLMN.
cellReservedForOperatorUse
As defined in TS 36.304 [4].
trackingAreaCode
A trackingAreaCode that is common for all the PLMNs listed.
cellBarred
barred means the cell is barred, as defined in TS 36.304 [4].
intraFreqReselection
Used to control cell reselection to intra-frequency cells when the highest ranked cell is barred, or treated as barred by the UE, as specified in TS 36.304 [4].
csg-Indication
If set to TRUE the UE is only allowed to access the cell if the CSG identity matches an entry in the allowed CSG list that the UE has stored.
q-RxLevMinOffset
Parameter Qrxlevminoffset in 36.304 [4]. Actual value Qrxlevminoffset = IE value * 2 [dB]. If absent, apply the (default) value of 0 [dB] for Qrxlevminoffset. Affects the minimum required Rx level in the cell.
p-Max
Value applicable for the cell.
freqBandIndicator
Defined in TS 36.101 [42, table 5.5-1].
si-Periodicity
Periodicity of the SI-message in radio frames, such that rf8 denotes 8 radio frames, rf16 denotes 16 radio frames, and so on.
sib-MappingInfo
List of the SIBs mapped to this SystemInformation message.There is no mapping information of SIB2; it is always present in the first SystemInformation message listed in the schedulingInfoList list.
si-WindowLength
Common SI scheduling window for all SIs. Unit in milliseconds, where ms1 denotes 1 millisecond, ms2 denotes 2 milliseconds and so on.
systemInfoValueTag
Common for all SIBs other than MIB, SIB1, SIB10 and SIB11.
csg-Identity
Identity of the Closed Subscriber Group within the primary PLMN the cell belongs to. The IE is present in a CSG cell.

Conditional presence
Explanation
TDD
This field is mandatory present for TDD; it is not present for FDD and the UE shall delete any existing value for this field.

	UECapabilityEnquiry
The UECapabilityEnquiry message is used to request the transfer of UE radio access capabilities for EUTRA as well as for other RATs.
Signalling radio bearer: SRB1
RLC-SAP: AM
Logical channel: DCCH
Direction: EUTRAN to UE
UECapabilityEnquiry message
-- ASN1START

UECapabilityEnquiry ::=				SEQUENCE {
	rrc-TransactionIdentifier			RRC-TransactionIdentifier,
	criticalExtensions					CHOICE {
		c1									CHOICE {
			ueCapabilityEnquiry-r8				UECapabilityEnquiry-r8-IEs,
			spare3 NULL, spare2 NULL, spare1 NULL
		},
		criticalExtensionsFuture			SEQUENCE {}
	}
}

UECapabilityEnquiry-r8-IEs ::=		SEQUENCE {
	ue-CapabilityRequest				UE-CapabilityRequest,
	nonCriticalExtension				SEQUENCE {}							OPTIONAL	-- Need OP
}

UE-CapabilityRequest ::=		SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxRAT-Capabilities)) OF RAT-Type

-- ASN1STOP

UECapabilityEnquiry field descriptions
ue-CapabilityRequest
List of the RATs for which the UE is requested to transfer the UE radio access capabilities i.e. E-UTRA, UTRA, GERAN-CS, GERAN-PS, CDMA2000.

	UECapabilityInformation
The UECapabilityInformation message is used to transfer of UE radio access capabilities requested by the EUTRAN.
Signalling radio bearer: SRB1
RLC-SAP: AM
Logical channel: DCCH
Direction: UE to EUTRAN
UECapabilityInformation message
-- ASN1START

UECapabilityInformation ::=			SEQUENCE {
	rrc-TransactionIdentifier			RRC-TransactionIdentifier,
	criticalExtensions					CHOICE {
		c1									CHOICE{
			ueCapabilityInformation-r8			UECapabilityInformation-r8-IEs,
			spare7 NULL,
			spare6 NULL, spare5 NULL, spare4 NULL,
			spare3 NULL, spare2 NULL, spare1 NULL
		},
		criticalExtensionsFuture			SEQUENCE {}
	}
}

UECapabilityInformation-r8-IEs ::=	SEQUENCE {
	ue-CapabilityRAT-ContainerList		UE-CapabilityRAT-ContainerList,
	nonCriticalExtension				SEQUENCE {}							OPTIONAL
}

-- ASN1STOP

	ULHandoverPreparationTransfer (CDMA2000)
The ULHandoverPreparationTransfer message is used for the uplink transfer of handover related CDMA2000 information when requested by the higher layers.
Signalling radio bearer: SRB1
RLC-SAP: AM
Logical channel: DCCH
Direction: UE to EUTRAN
ULHandoverPreparationTransfer message
-- ASN1START

ULHandoverPreparationTransfer ::=	SEQUENCE {
	criticalExtensions					CHOICE {
		c1									CHOICE {
			ulHandoverPreparationTransfer-r8		ULHandoverPreparationTransfer-r8-IEs,
			spare3 NULL, spare2 NULL, spare1 NULL
		},
		criticalExtensionsFuture				SEQUENCE {}
	}
}

ULHandoverPreparationTransfer-r8-IEs ::= SEQUENCE {
	cdma2000-Type						CDMA2000-Type,
	meid								BIT STRING (SIZE (56))	OPTIONAL,
	dedicatedInfo						DedicatedInfoCDMA2000,
	nonCriticalExtension				SEQUENCE {}							OPTIONAL
}

-- ASN1STOP

ULHandoverPreparationTransfer field descriptions
meid
The 56 bit mobile identification number provided by the CDMA2000 Upper layers.

	ULInformationTransfer
The ULInformationTransfer message is used for the uplink transfer of dedicated NAS information.
Signalling radio bearer: SRB2 or SRB1(only if SRB2 not established yet). If SRB2 is suspended, the UE does not send this message until SRB2 is resumed
RLC-SAP: AM
Logical channel: DCCH
Direction: UE to EUTRAN
ULInformationTransfer message
-- ASN1START

ULInformationTransfer ::=			SEQUENCE {
	criticalExtensions					CHOICE {
		c1									CHOICE {
			ulInformationTransfer-r8			ULInformationTransfer-r8-IEs,
			spare3 NULL, spare2 NULL, spare1 NULL
		},
		criticalExtensionsFuture			SEQUENCE {}
	}
}

ULInformationTransfer-r8-IEs ::=	SEQUENCE {
	dedicatedInfoType			CHOICE {
		dedicatedInfoNAS					DedicatedInfoNAS,
		dedicatedInfoCDMA2000-1XRTT			DedicatedInfoCDMA2000,
		dedicatedInfoCDMA2000-HRPD			DedicatedInfoCDMA2000
	},
	nonCriticalExtension				SEQUENCE {}							OPTIONAL
}

-- ASN1STOP

6.3	RRC information elements
6.3.1	System information blocks
	SystemInformationBlockType2
The IE SystemInformationBlockType2 contains radio resource configuration information that is common for all UEs.
NOTE:	UE timers and constants related to functionality for which parameters are provided in another SIB are included in the corresponding SIB.
SystemInformationBlockType2 information element
-- ASN1START

SystemInformationBlockType2 ::=		SEQUENCE {
	ac-BarringInfo						SEQUENCE {
		ac-BarringForEmergency				BOOLEAN,
		ac-BarringForMO-Signalling			AC-BarringConfig				OPTIONAL,	-- Need OP
		ac-BarringForMO-Data				AC-BarringConfig				OPTIONAL	-- Need OP
	}																		OPTIONAL,	-- Need OP
	radioResourceConfigCommon			RadioResourceConfigCommonSIB,
	ue-TimersAndConstants				UE-TimersAndConstants,
	freqInfo							SEQUENCE {
		ul-CarrierFreq						ARFCN-ValueEUTRA				OPTIONAL,	-- Need OP
		ul-Bandwidth						ENUMERATED {n6, n15, n25, n50, n75, n100}
																			OPTIONAL,	-- Need OP
		additionalSpectrumEmission			AdditionalSpectrumEmission
	},
	mbsfn-SubframeConfigList			MBSFN-SubframeConfigList			OPTIONAL, 	-- Need OR
	timeAlignmentTimerCommon			TimeAlignmentTimer,
	...
}

AC-BarringConfig ::=				SEQUENCE {
	ac-BarringFactor					ENUMERATED {
											p00, p05, p10, p15, p20, p25, p30, p40,
											p50, p60, p70, p75, p80, p85, p90, p95},
	ac-BarringTime						ENUMERATED {s4, s8, s16, s32, s64, s128, s256, s512},
	ac-BarringForSpecialAC				BIT STRING (SIZE(5))
}

MBSFN-SubframeConfigList ::= 		SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxMBSFN-Allocations)) OF MBSFN-SubframeConfig

MBSFN-SubframeConfig ::=			SEQUENCE {
	radioframeAllocationPeriod			ENUMERATED {n1, n2, n4, n8, n16, n32},
	radioframeAllocationOffset			INTEGER (0..7),
	subframeAllocation					CHOICE {
		oneFrame							BIT STRING (SIZE(6)),
		fourFrames							BIT STRING (SIZE(24))
	}
}
-- ASN1STOP

SystemInformationBlockType2 field descriptions
ac-BarringForEmergency
Access class barring for AC 10.
ac-BarringForMO-Signalling
Access class barring for mobile originating signalling.
ac-BarringForMO-Data
Access class barring for mobile originating calls.
ac-BarringFactor
If the random number drawn by the UE is lower than this value, access is allowed. Otherwise the access is barred. The values are interpreted in the range [0,1): p00 = 0, p05 = 0.05, p10 = 0.10,,p95 = 0.95.
ac-BarringTime
Mean access barring time value in seconds.
ac-BarringForSpecialAC
Access class barring for AC 11-15. The first/ leftmost bit is for AC 11, the second bit is for AC 12, and so on.
ul-CarrierFreq
For FDD: If absent, the (default) value determined from the default TX-RX frequency separation defined in TS 36.101 [42, table 5.7.3-1] applies.
For TDD: This parameter is absent and it is equal to the downlink frequency.
ul-Bandwidth
Parameter: transmission bandwidth configuration, NRB, in uplink, see TS 36.101 [42, table 5.6-1]. Value n6 corresponds to 6 resource blocks, n15 to 15 resource blocks and so on. If for FDD this parameter is absent, the uplink bandwidth is equal to the downlink bandwidth. For TDD this parameter is absent and it is equal to the downlink bandwidth.
mbsfn-SubframeConfigList
Defines the subframes that are reserved for MBSFN in downlink.
radioFrameAllocationPeriod, radioFrameAllocationOffset
Radio-frames that contain MBSFN subframes occur when equation SFN mod radioFrameAllocationPeriod = radioFrameAllocationOffset is satisfied. Value n1 for radioframeAllocationPeriod denotes value 1, n2 denotes value 2, and so on. When fourFrames is used for subframeAllocation, the equation defines the first radio frame referred to in the description below. Values n1 and n2 are not applicable when fourFrames is used.
subframeAllocation
Defines the subframes that are allocated for MBSFN within the radio frame allocation period defined by the radioFrameAllocationPeriod and the radioFrameAllocationOffset.
oneFrame
1 denotes that the corresponding subframe is allocated for MBSFN. The following mapping applies:
FDD: The first/leftmost bit defines the MBSFN allocation for subframe #1, the second bit for #2, third bit for #3 , fourth bit for #6, fifth bit for #7, sixth bit for #8.
TDD: The first/leftmost bit defines the allocation for subframe #3, the second bit for #4, third bit for #7, fourth bit for #8, fifth bit for #9. Uplink subframes are not allocated. The last bit is not used.
fourFrames
A bit-map indicating MBSFN subframe allocation in four consecutive radio frames, 1 denotes that the corresponding subframe is allocated for MBSFN. The bitmap is interpreted as follows:
FDD: Starting from the first radioframe and from the first/leftmost bit in the bitmap, the allocation applies to subframes #1, #2, #3 , #6, #7, and #8 in the sequence of the four radio-frames.
TDD: Starting from the first radioframe and from the first/leftmost bit in the bitmap, the allocation applies to subframes #3, #4, #7, #8, and #9 in the sequence of the four radio-frames. The last four bits are not used. Uplink subframes are not allocated.

	SystemInformationBlockType3
The IE SystemInformationBlockType3 contains cell re-selection information common for intra-frequency, inter-frequency and/ or inter-RAT cell re-selection (i.e. applicable for more than one type of cell re-selection but not necessarily all) as well as intra-frequency cell re-selection information other than neighbouring cell related.
SystemInformationBlockType3 information element
-- ASN1START

SystemInformationBlockType3 ::=		SEQUENCE {
	cellReselectionInfoCommon			SEQUENCE {
		q-Hyst								ENUMERATED {
												dB0, dB1, dB2, dB3, dB4, dB5, dB6, dB8, dB10,
												dB12, dB14, dB16, dB18, dB20, dB22, dB24},
		speedStateReselectionPars			SEQUENCE {
			mobilityStateParameters				MobilityStateParameters,
			q-HystSF						SEQUENCE {
				sf-Medium						ENUMERATED {
														dB-6, dB-4, dB-2, dB0},
				sf-High							ENUMERATED {
														dB-6, dB-4, dB-2, dB0}
			}
		}																OPTIONAL		-- Need OP
	},
	cellReselectionServingFreqInfo		SEQUENCE {
		s-NonIntraSearch					ReselectionThreshold		OPTIONAL,		-- Need OP
		threshServingLow					ReselectionThreshold,
		cellReselectionPriority				CellReselectionPriority
	},
	intraFreqCellReselectionInfo		SEQUENCE {
		q-RxLevMin							Q-RxLevMin,
		p-Max								P-Max						OPTIONAL,		-- Need OP
		s-IntraSearch						ReselectionThreshold		OPTIONAL,		-- Need OP
		allowedMeasBandwidth				AllowedMeasBandwidth		OPTIONAL,		-- Need OP
		presenceAntennaPort1				PresenceAntennaPort1,
		neighCellConfig						NeighCellConfig,
		t-ReselectionEUTRA					T-Reselection,
		t-ReselectionEUTRA-SF				SpeedStateScaleFactors		OPTIONAL		-- Need OP
	},
	...
}

-- ASN1STOP

SystemInformationBlockType3 field descriptions
cellReselectionInfoCommon
Cell re-selection information common for cells.
q-Hyst
Parameter Qhyst in 36.304 [4], Value in dB. Value dB1 corresponds to 1 dB, dB2 corresponds to 2 dB and so on.
speedStateReselectionPars
Speed dependent reselection parameters, see TS 36.304 [4]. If this field is absent, i.e, mobilityStateParameters is also not present, UE behaviour is specified in TS 36.304 [4].
q-HystSF
Parameter Speed dependent ScalingFactor for Qhyst in TS 36.304 [4]. The sf-Medium and sf-High concern the additional hysteresis to be applied, in Medium and High Mobility state respectively, to Qhyst as defined in TS 36.304 [4]. In dB. Value dB-6 corresponds to -6dB, dB-4 corresponds to -4dB and so on.
t-ReselectionEUTRA
Parameter TreselectionEUTRAN in TS 36.304 [4].
t-ReselectionEUTRA-SF
Parameter Speed dependent ScalingFactor for TreselectionEUTRAN in TS 36.304 [4]. If the field is not present, the UE behaviour is specified in TS 36.304 [4].
s-IntraSearch
Parameter Sintrasearch, see TS 36.304 [4]. If the field is not present, the UE behaviour is specified in TS 36.304 [4].
cellReselectionServingFreqInfo
Information common for Cell re-selection to inter-frequency and inter-RAT cells.
s-NonIntraSearch
Parameter Snonintrasearch, see TS 36.304 [4]. If the field is not present, the UE behaviour is specified in TS 36.304 [4].
threshServingLow
Parameter Threshserving, low, see TS 36.304 [4].
intraFreqcellReselectionInfo
Cell re-selection information common for intra-frequency cells.
p-Max
Value applicable for the intra-frequency neighbouring E-UTRA cells.
allowedMeasBandwidth
If absent, the value corresponding to the downlink bandwidth indicated by the dl-Bandwidth included in MasterInformationBlock applies.

	SystemInformationBlockType4
The IE SystemInformationBlockType4 contains neighbouring cell related information relevant only for intra-frequency cell re-selection. The IE includes cells with specific re-selection parameters as well as blacklisted cells.
SystemInformationBlockType4 information element
-- ASN1START

SystemInformationBlockType4 ::=		SEQUENCE {
	intraFreqNeighCellList				IntraFreqNeighCellList		OPTIONAL,	-- Need OR
	intraFreqBlackCellList				IntraFreqBlackCellList				OPTIONAL,	-- Need OR
	csg-PhysCellIdRange					PhysCellIdRange				OPTIONAL,	-- Cond CSG
	...
}

IntraFreqNeighCellList ::=		SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxCellIntra)) OF IntraFreqNeighCellInfo

IntraFreqNeighCellInfo ::=		SEQUENCE {
	physCellId								PhysCellId,
	q-OffsetCell							Q-OffsetRange,
	...
}

IntraFreqBlackCellList ::=		SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxCellBlack)) OF PhysCellIdRange

-- ASN1STOP

SystemInformationBlockType4 field descriptions
intraFreqNeighbCellList
List of intra-frequency neighbouring cells with specific cell re-selection parameters.
q-OffsetCell
Parameter Qoffsets,n in TS 36.304 [4].
intraFreqBlackCellList
List of blacklisted intra-frequency neighbouring cells.
csg-PhysCellIdRange
Set of physical cell identities reserved for CSG cells on the frequency on which this field was received. The received csg-PhysCellIdRange applies if less than 24 hours has elapsed since it was received and it was received in the same primary PLMN. The 3 hour validity restriction (section 5.2.1.3) does not apply to this field.

Conditional presence
Explanation
CSG
This field is optional, need OP, for non-CSG cells, and mandatory for CSG cells.

	SystemInformationBlockType5
The IE SystemInformationBlockType5 contains information relevant only for inter-frequency cell re-selection i.e. information about other EUTRA frequencies and inter-frequency neighbouring cells relevant for cell re-selection. The IE includes cell re-selection parameters common for a frequency as well as cell specific re-selection parameters.
SystemInformationBlockType5 information element
-- ASN1START

SystemInformationBlockType5 ::=		SEQUENCE {
	interFreqCarrierFreqList			InterFreqCarrierFreqList,
	...
}

InterFreqCarrierFreqList ::=		SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxFreq)) OF InterFreqCarrierFreqInfo

InterFreqCarrierFreqInfo ::=	SEQUENCE {
	dl-CarrierFreq						ARFCN-ValueEUTRA,
	q-RxLevMin							Q-RxLevMin,
	p-Max								P-Max							OPTIONAL,		-- Need OP
	t-ReselectionEUTRA					T-Reselection,
	t-ReselectionEUTRA-SF				SpeedStateScaleFactors			OPTIONAL,		-- Need OP
	threshX-High						ReselectionThreshold,
	threshX-Low							ReselectionThreshold,
	allowedMeasBandwidth				AllowedMeasBandwidth,
	presenceAntennaPort1				PresenceAntennaPort1,
	cellReselectionPriority				CellReselectionPriority			OPTIONAL,		-- Need OP
	neighCellConfig						NeighCellConfig,
	q-OffsetFreq						Q-OffsetRange					DEFAULT dB0,
	interFreqNeighCellList				InterFreqNeighCellList			OPTIONAL, 		-- Need OR
	interFreqBlackCellList				InterFreqBlackCellList			OPTIONAL, 		-- Need OR
	...
}

InterFreqNeighCellList ::=			SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxCellInter)) OF InterFreqNeighCellInfo

InterFreqNeighCellInfo ::=			SEQUENCE {
	physCellId							PhysCellId,
	q-OffsetCell						Q-OffsetRange
}

InterFreqBlackCellList ::=			SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxCellBlack)) OF PhysCellIdRange

-- ASN1STOP

SystemInformationBlockType5 field descriptions
p-Max
Value applicable for the neighbouring E-UTRA cells on this carrier frequency.
threshX-High
Parameter "Threshx,high", see TS 36.304 [4].
threshX-Low
Parameter "Threshx,low", see TS 36.304 [4].
t-ReselectionEUTRA
Parameter TreselectionEUTRAN in TS 36.304 [4].
t-ReselectionEUTRA-SF
Parameter Speed dependent ScalingFactor for TreselectionEUTRAN in TS 36.304 [4]. If the field is not present, the UE behaviour is specified in TS 36.304 [4].
q-OffsetFreq
Parameter Qoffsetfrequency in TS 36.304 [4].
interFreqNeighCellList
List of inter-frequency neighbouring cells with specific cell re-selection parameters.
q-OffsetCell
Parameter Qoffsets,n in TS 36.304 [4].
interFreqBlackCellList
List of blacklisted inter-frequency neighbouring cells.

	SystemInformationBlockType6
The IE SystemInformationBlockType6 contains information relevant only for inter-RAT cell re-selection i.e. information about UTRA frequencies and UTRA neighbouring cells relevant for cell re-selection. The IE includes cell re-selection parameters common for a frequency.
SystemInformationBlockType6 information element
-- ASN1START

SystemInformationBlockType6 ::=		SEQUENCE {
	carrierFreqListUTRA-FDD				CarrierFreqListUTRA-FDD			OPTIONAL, 		-- Need OR
	carrierFreqListUTRA-TDD				CarrierFreqListUTRA-TDD			OPTIONAL, 		-- Need OR
	t-ReselectionUTRA					T-Reselection,
	t-ReselectionUTRA-SF				SpeedStateScaleFactors			OPTIONAL,		-- Need OP
	...
}

CarrierFreqListUTRA-FDD ::=		SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxUTRA-FDD-Carrier)) OF CarrierFreqUTRA-FDD 

CarrierFreqUTRA-FDD ::=		SEQUENCE {
	carrierFreq							ARFCN-ValueUTRA,
	cellReselectionPriority				CellReselectionPriority			OPTIONAL, 		-- Need OP
	threshX-High						ReselectionThreshold,
	threshX-Low							ReselectionThreshold,
	q-RxLevMin							INTEGER (-60..-13),
	p-MaxUTRA							INTEGER (-50..33),
	q-QualMin							INTEGER (-24..0),
	...
}

CarrierFreqListUTRA-TDD ::=		SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxUTRA-TDD-Carrier)) OF CarrierFreqUTRA-TDD 

CarrierFreqUTRA-TDD ::=		SEQUENCE {
	carrierFreq							ARFCN-ValueUTRA,
	cellReselectionPriority				CellReselectionPriority			OPTIONAL, 		-- Need OP
	threshX-High						ReselectionThreshold,
	threshX-Low							ReselectionThreshold,
	q-RxLevMin							INTEGER (-60..-13),
	p-MaxUTRA							INTEGER (-50..33),
	...
}

-- ASN1STOP

SystemInformationBlockType6 field descriptions
t-ReselectionUTRA
Parameter TreselectionUTRAN in TS 36.304 [4].
t-ReselectionUTRA-SF
Parameter Speed dependent ScalingFactor for TreselectionUTRA in TS 36.304 [4]. If the field is not present, the UE behaviour is specified in TS 36.304 [4].
carrierFreqListUTRA-FDD
List of carrier frequencies of UTRA FDD.
carrierFreqListUTRA-TDD
List of carrier frequencies of UTRA TDD.
threshX-High
Parameter "Threshx,high" in TS 36.304 [4].
threshX-Low
 Parameter "Threshx,low" in TS 36.304 [4].
q-RxLevMin
Parameter Qrxlevmin, see TS 25.304 [40]. Actual value = IE value * 2+1. Specifies the minimum required Rx level in the cell expressedin dBm.
p-MaxUTRA
The maximum allowed transmission power on the (uplink) carrier frequency, see TS 25.304 [40]. In dBm
q-QualMin
Parameter Qqualmin in TS 25.304 [40]. In dB.

	SystemInformationBlockType7
The IE SystemInformationBlockType7 contains information relevant only for inter-RAT cell re-selection i.e. information about GERAN frequencies relevant for cell re-selection. The IE includes cell re-selection parameters for each frequency.
SystemInformationBlockType7 information element
-- ASN1START

SystemInformationBlockType7 ::=		SEQUENCE {
	t-ReselectionGERAN					T-Reselection,
	t-ReselectionGERAN-SF				SpeedStateScaleFactors				OPTIONAL,	-- Need OR
	carrierFreqsInfoList				CarrierFreqsInfoListGERAN			OPTIONAL,	-- Need OR
	...
}

CarrierFreqsInfoListGERAN ::=			SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxGNFG)) OF CarrierFreqsInfoGERAN

CarrierFreqsInfoGERAN ::=			SEQUENCE {
	carrierFreqs						CarrierFreqsGERAN,
	commonInfo							SEQUENCE {
		cellReselectionPriority				CellReselectionPriority			OPTIONAL,	-- Need OP
		ncc-Permitted						BIT STRING (SIZE (8)),
		q-RxLevMin							INTEGER (0..45),
		p-MaxGERAN							INTEGER (0..39)					OPTIONAL,	-- Need OP
		threshX-High						ReselectionThreshold,
		threshX-Low							ReselectionThreshold
	},
	...
}

-- ASN1STOP

SystemInformationBlockType7 field descriptions
carrierFreqsInfoList
Provides a list of neighbouring GERAN carrier frequencies, which may be monitored for neighbouring GERAN cells. The GERAN carrier frequencies are organised in groups and the cell reselection parameters are provided per group of GERAN carrier frequencies.
carrierFreqs
The list of GERAN carrier frequencies organised into one group of GERAN carrier frequencies.
commonInfo
Defines the set of cell reselection parameters for the group of GERAN carrier frequencies.
t-ReselectionGERAN
Parameter TreselectionGERAN in TS 36.304 [4].
t-ReselectionGERAN-SF
Parameter Speed dependent ScalingFactor for TreselectionGERAN in TS 36.304 [4]. If the field is not present, the UE behaviour is specified in TS 36.304 [4].
ncc-Permitted
Field encoded as a bit map, where bit N is set to "0" if a BCCH carrier with NCC = N-1 is not permitted for monitoring and set to "1" if the BCCH carrier with NCC = N-1 is permitted for monitoring; N = 1 to 8; bit 1 of the bitmap is the leading bit of the bit string.
q-RxLevMin
Parameter Qrxlevmin in TS 45.008 [28]. The actual value of Qrxlevmin in dBm = (IE value * 2) ? 115.
p-MaxGERAN
Maximum allowed transmission power for GERAN on an uplink carrier frequency, see TS 45.008 [28]. Value in dBm. Applicable for the neighbouring GERAN cells on this carrier frequency. If pmaxGERAN is absent, the maximum power according to the UE capability is used.
threshX-High
Parameter "Threshx,high" in TS 36.304 [4].
threshX-Low
Parameter "Threshx,low" in TS 36.304 [4].

	SystemInformationBlockType8
The IE SystemInformationBlockType8 contains information relevant only for inter-RAT cell re-selection i.e. information about CDMA2000 frequencies and CDMA2000 neighbouring cells relevant for cell re-selection. The IE includes cell re-selection parameters common for a frequency as well as cell specific re-selection parameters.
SystemInformationBlockType8 information element
-- ASN1START

SystemInformationBlockType8 ::=		SEQUENCE {
	systemTimeInfo						SystemTimeInfoCDMA2000				OPTIONAL,	-- Need OR
	searchWindowSize					INTEGER (0..15)						OPTIONAL,	-- Need OR
	parametersHRPD						SEQUENCE {
		preRegistrationInfoHRPD				PreRegistrationInfoHRPD,
		cellReselectionParametersHRPD		CellReselectionParametersCDMA2000	OPTIONAL -- Need OR
	}																		OPTIONAL,	-- Need OR
	parameters1XRTT						SEQUENCE {
		csfb-RegistrationParam1XRTT			CSFB-RegistrationParam1XRTT		OPTIONAL,	-- Need OP
		longCodeState1XRTT					BIT STRING (SIZE (42))			OPTIONAL,	-- Need OR
		cellReselectionParameters1XRTT		CellReselectionParametersCDMA2000	OPTIONAL -- Need OR
	}																		OPTIONAL,	-- Need OR
	...
}

CellReselectionParametersCDMA2000 ::= SEQUENCE {
	bandClassList						BandClassListCDMA2000,
	neighCellList						NeighCellListCDMA2000,
	t-ReselectionCDMA2000      			T-Reselection,
	t-ReselectionCDMA2000-SF			SpeedStateScaleFactors				OPTIONAL	-- Need OP
}
NeighCellListCDMA2000 ::=			SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..16)) OF NeighCellCDMA2000

NeighCellCDMA2000 ::=	SEQUENCE {
	bandClass							BandclassCDMA2000,
	neighCellsPerFreqList						NeighCellsPerBandclassListCDMA2000
}

NeighCellsPerBandclassListCDMA2000 ::= SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..16)) OF NeighCellsPerBandclassCDMA2000

NeighCellsPerBandclassCDMA2000 ::=	SEQUENCE {
	arfcn							ARFCN-ValueCDMA2000,
	physCellIdList						PhysCellIdListCDMA2000
}

PhysCellIdListCDMA2000 ::=			SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..16)) OF PhysCellIdCDMA2000

BandClassListCDMA2000 ::=			SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxCDMA-BandClass)) OF BandClassInfoCDMA2000

BandClassInfoCDMA2000 ::=	SEQUENCE {
	bandClass							BandclassCDMA2000,
	cellReselectionPriority				CellReselectionPriority				OPTIONAL,	-- Need OP
	threshX-High						INTEGER (0..63),
	threshX-Low							INTEGER (0..63),
	...
}

-- ASN1STOP

SystemInformationBlockType8 field descriptions
systemTimeInfo
Information on CDMA2000 system time. This field is required for a UE with rx-ConfigHRPD= `single' and/ or rx-Config1XRTT= `single' to perform handover, cell re-selection and UE measurement based redirection from E-UTRAN to CDMA2000 according to this specification and TS 36.304 [4]. This field is excluded when estimating changes in system information, i.e. changes of systemTimeInfo should neither result in system information change notifications nor in a modification of systemInfoValueTag in SIB1.
searchWindowSize
The search window size is a CDMA2000 parameter to be used to assist in searching for the neighbouring pilots. For values see C.S0005-A [25, Table 2.6.6.2.1-1] and C.S0024-A [26, Table 8.7.6.2-4]. This field is required for a UE with rx-ConfigHRPD= `single' and/ or rx-Config1XRTT= `single' to perform handover, cell re-selection and UE measurement based redirection from E-UTRAN to CDMA2000 according to this specification and TS 36.304 [4].
parametersHRPD
Parameters applicable only for interworking with CDMA2000 HRPD systems.
preRegistrationInfoHRPD
The CDMA2000 HRPD Pre-Registration Information tells the UE if it should pre-register with the CDMA2000 HRPD network and identifies the Pre-registration zone to the UE.
cellReselectionParametersHRPD
Cell reselection parameters applicable for cell reselection to CDMA2000 HRPD system
bandClassList
List of CDMA2000 frequency bands.
bandClass
Identifies the Frequency Band in which the Carrier can be found. Details can be found in C.S0057-B [24, Table 1.5].
threshX-High
Parameter "Threshx,high" in TS 36.304 [4]. This specifies the high threshold used in reselection towards this CDMA2000 band class expressed as an unsigned binary number equal to FLOOR (-2 x 10 x log10 Ec/Io) in units of 0.5 dB, as defined in C.S0005-A [25].
threshX-Low
Parameter "Threshx,low" in TS 36.304 [4]. This specifies the low threshold used in reselection towards this CDMA2000 band class expressed as an unsigned binary number equal to FLOOR (-2 x 10 x log10 Ec/Io) in units of 0.5 dB, as defined in C.S0005-A [25].
t-ReselectionCDMA2000
Parameter TreselectionCDMA_HRPD or TreselectionCDMA_1xRTT in TS 36.304 [4].
t-ReselectionCDMA2000-SF
Parameter Speed dependent ScalingFactor for TreselectionCDMA-HRPD or TreselectionCDMA-1xRTT in TS 36.304 [4]. If the field is not present, the UE behaviour is specified in TS 36.304 [4].
neighCellList
List of CDMA2000 neighbouring cells. The total number of neighbouring cells is limited to 32.
parameters1XRTT
Parameters applicable for interworking with CDMA2000 1XRTT system.
csfb-RegistrationParam1XRTT
Contains the parameters the UE will use to determine if it should perform a CDMA2000 1xRTT Registration/Re-Registration. This field is included if CSFB to CDMA2000 1xRTT is supported.
longCodeState1XRTT
The state of long code generation registers in CDMA2000 1XRTT system as defined in C.S0002-A [12, Section 1.3] at ms, where t equals to the cdma-SystemTime. This field is required for SRVCC handover to CDMA2000 1xRTT operation. Otherwise this IE is not needed. This field is excluded when estimating changes in system information, i.e. changes of longCodeState1XRTT should neither result in system information change notifications nor in a modification of systemInfoValueTag in SIB1.
cellReselectionParameters1XRTT
Cell reselection parameters applicable only to CDMA2000 1xRTT system.
NeighCellListCDMA2000
List of CDMA2000 1xRTT or of CDMA2000 HRPD neighbouring cells.
neighCellsPerFreqList
List of carrier frequencies and neighbour cell ids in each frequency within a CDMA2000 Band, see C.S0002-A [12].
physCellIdList
Identifies the list of CDMA2000 cells ids, see C.S0002-A [12].

	SystemInformationBlockType9
The IE SystemInformationBlockType9 contains a home eNB name (HNB Name).
SystemInformationBlockType9 information element
-- ASN1START

SystemInformationBlockType9 ::=		SEQUENCE {
	hnb-Name							OCTET STRING (SIZE(1..48))		OPTIONAL,	-- Need OR
	...
}

-- ASN1STOP

SystemInformationBlockType9 field descriptions
hnb-Name
Carries the name of the home eNB, coded in UTF-8 with variable number of bytes per character, see TS 22.011 [10].

	SystemInformationBlockType10
The IE SystemInformationBlockType10 contains an ETWS primary notification.
SystemInformationBlockType10 information element
-- ASN1START

SystemInformationBlockType10 ::=	SEQUENCE {
	messageIdentifier					BIT STRING (SIZE (16)),
	serialNumber						BIT STRING (SIZE (16)),
	warningType							OCTET STRING (SIZE (2)),
	warningSecurityInfo					OCTET STRING (SIZE (50))		OPTIONAL,		-- Need OP
	...
}

-- ASN1STOP


SystemInformationBlockType10 field descriptions
messageIdentifier
Identifies the source and type of ETWS notification. The first bit contains bit 1 of the equivalent IE defined in TS 23.041 [37, 9.4.1.2.2], TS 36.413 [39, 9.2.1.44] and encoded according to TS 23.041 [37] and so on.
serialNumber
Identifies variations of an ETWS notification. The first bit contains bit 1 of the equivalent IE defined in TS 23.041 [37, 9.4.1.2.1], TS 36.413 [39, 9.2.1.45] and encoded according to TS 23.041 [37] and so on.
warningType
Identifies the warning type of the ETWS primary notification and provides information on emergency user alert and UE popup. The first octet contains octet 1 of the equivalent IE defined in TS 23.041 [37, 9.3.24], TS 36.413 [39, 9.2.1.50] and encoded according to TS 23.041 [37], and so on.
warningSecurityInfo
Provides security information for the ETWS notification. The first octet contains octet 1 of the equivalent IE defined in TS 23.041 [37], TS 36.413 [39] and encoded according to TS 23.041 [37] and so on.

	SystemInformationBlockType11
The IE SystemInformationBlockType11 contains an ETWS secondary notification.
SystemInformationBlockType11 information element
-- ASN1START

SystemInformationBlockType11 ::=	SEQUENCE {
	messageIdentifier					BIT STRING (SIZE (16)),
	serialNumber						BIT STRING (SIZE (16)),
	warningMessageSegmentType			ENUMERATED {notLastSegment, lastSegment},
	warningMessageSegmentNumber			INTEGER (0..63),
	warningMessageSegment				OCTET STRING,
	dataCodingScheme					OCTET STRING (SIZE (1)) 		OPTIONAL, 	-- Cond Segment1
	...
}

-- ASN1STOP

SystemInformationBlockType11 field descriptions
messageIdentifier
Identifies the source and type of ETWS notification. The first bit contains bit 1 of the equivalent IE defined in TS 23.041 [37, 9.4.1.2.2], TS 36.413 [39, 9.2.1.44] and encoded according to TS 23.041 [37] and so on.
serialNumber
Identifies variations of an ETWS notification. The first bit contains bit 1 of the equivalent IE defined in TS 23.041 [37, 9.4.1.2.1], TS 36.413 [39, 9.2.1.45] and encoded according to TS 23.041 [37] and so on.
warningMessageSegmentType
Indicates whether the included ETWS warning message segment is the last segment or not.
warningMessageSegmentNumber
Segment number of the ETWS warning message segment contained in the SIB. A segment number of zero corresponds to the first segment, one corresponds to the second segment, and so on.
warningMessageSegment
Carries a segment of the Warning Message Contents IE defined in TS 36.413 [39]. The first octet of the Warning Message Contents IE is equivalent to the CB data IE defined in and encoded according to TS 23.041 [37] and so on.
dataCodingScheme
Identifies the alphabet/coding and the language applied variations of an ETWS notification. The octet contains the octet of the equivalent IE defined in TS 23.041 [37], TS 36.413 [39] and encoded according to TS 23.038 [38].

Conditional presence
Explanation
Segment1
The field is mandatory present in the first segment of SIB11, otherwise it is not present.

6.3.2	Radio resource control information elements
	AntennaInfo
The IE AntennaInfoCommon and the AntennaInfoDedicated are used to specify the common and the UE specific antenna configuration respectively.
AntennaInfo information elements
-- ASN1START

AntennaInfoCommon ::=				SEQUENCE {
	antennaPortsCount					ENUMERATED {an1, an2, an4, spare1}
}

AntennaInfoDedicated ::=			SEQUENCE {
	transmissionMode					ENUMERATED {
											tm1, tm2, tm3, tm4, tm5, tm6,
											tm7, spare1},
	codebookSubsetRestriction			CHOICE {
		n2TxAntenna-tm3						BIT STRING (SIZE (2)),
		n4TxAntenna-tm3						BIT STRING (SIZE (4)),
		n2TxAntenna-tm4						BIT STRING (SIZE (6)),
		n4TxAntenna-tm4						BIT STRING (SIZE (64)),
		n2TxAntenna-tm5						BIT STRING (SIZE (4)),
		n4TxAntenna-tm5						BIT STRING (SIZE (16)),
		n2TxAntenna-tm6						BIT STRING (SIZE (4)),
		n4TxAntenna-tm6						BIT STRING (SIZE (16))
	}		OPTIONAL, 															-- Cond TM
	ue-TransmitAntennaSelection			CHOICE{
		release							NULL,
		setup							ENUMERATED {closedLoop, openLoop}
	}
}

-- ASN1STOP

AntennaInfo field descriptions
antennaPortsCount
Parameter represents the number of cell specific antenna ports where an1 corresponds to 1, an2 to 2 antenna ports etc. see TS 36.211, 6.2.1.
transmissionMode
Points to one of Transmission modes defined in TS 36.213, 7.1 where tm1 refers to transmission mode 1, tm2 to transmission mode 2 etc.
codebookSubsetRestriction
Parameter: codebookSubsetRestriction, see TS 36.213 [23, 7.2] and TS 36.211 [21, 6.3.4.2.3].
ue-TransmitAntennaSelection
For value setup the field indicates whether UE transmit antenna selection control is closed-loop or open-loop as described in TS 36.213 [23, 8.7].

Conditional presence
Explanation
TM
The field is mandatory present if the transmissionMode is set to tm3, tm4, tm5 or tm6. Otherwise the IE is not present and the UE shall delete any existing value for this field.

	CQI-ReportConfig
The IE CQI-ReportConfig is used to specify the CQI reporting configuration.
CQI-ReportConfig information elements
-- ASN1START

CQI-ReportConfig ::=				SEQUENCE {
	cqi-ReportModeAperiodic			ENUMERATED {
											rm12, rm20, rm22, rm30, rm31,
											spare3, spare2, spare1} OPTIONAL, 			-- Need OR
	nomPDSCH-RS-EPRE-Offset				INTEGER (-1..6),
	cqi-ReportPeriodic				CQI-ReportPeriodic	OPTIONAL 				-- Need ON
}

CQI-ReportPeriodic ::=		CHOICE {
	release							NULL,
	setup							SEQUENCE {
		cqi-PUCCH-ResourceIndex				INTEGER (0.. 1185),
		cqi-pmi-ConfigIndex					INTEGER (0..1023),
		cqi-FormatIndicatorPeriodic			CHOICE {
			widebandCQI							NULL,
			subbandCQI							SEQUENCE {
				k									INTEGER (1..4)
			}
		},
		ri-ConfigIndex						INTEGER (0..1023) 	OPTIONAL, 				-- Need OR
		simultaneousAckNackAndCQI			BOOLEAN
	}
}

-- ASN1STOP

CQI-ReportConfig field descriptions
cqi-PUCCH-ResourceIndex
Parameter , see TS 36.213 [23, 7.2].
cqi-pmi-ConfigIndex
Parameter: CQI/PMI Periodicity and Offset Configuration Index ICQI/PMI, see TS 36.213 [23, tables 7.2.2-1A and 7.2.2-1C].
ri-ConfigIndex
Parameter: RI Config Index IRI, see TS 36.213 [23, 7.2.2-1B].
K
Parameter: K, see TS 36.213 [23, 7.2.2].
cqi-FormatIndicatorPeriodic
Parameter: PUCCH CQI Feedback Type, see TS 36.213 [23, table 7.2.2-1]. Depending on transmissionMode, reporting mode is implicitly given from the table.
simultaneousAckNackAndCQI
Parameter: Simultaneous-AN-and-CQI. see TS 36.213 [23, 10.1] TRUE indicates that simultaneous transmission of ACK/NACK and CQI is allowed.
cqi-ReportModeAperiodic
Parameter: reporting mode. Value rm12 corresponds to Mode 1-2, rm20 corresponds to Mode 2-0, rm22 corresponds to Mode 2-2 etc. PUSCH reporting modes are described in TS 36.213 [23, 7.2.1].
nomPDSCH-RS-EPRE-Offset
Parameter:  see TS 36.213 [23, 7.2.3]. Actual value = IE value * 2 [dB].

	DRB-Identity
The IE DRB-Identity is used to identify a DRB used by a UE.
DRB-Identity information elements
-- ASN1START

DRB-Identity ::=					INTEGER (1..32)

-- ASN1STOP

	LogicalChannelConfig
The IE LogicalChannelConfig is used to configure the logical channel parameters.
LogicalChannelConfig information element
-- ASN1START

LogicalChannelConfig ::=			SEQUENCE {
	ul-SpecificParameters				SEQUENCE {
		priority							INTEGER (1..16),
		prioritisedBitRate					ENUMERATED {
												kBps0, kBps8, kBps16, kBps32, kBps64, kBps128,
												kBps256, infinity, spare8, spare7, spare6,
												spare5, spare4, spare3, spare2, spare1},
		bucketSizeDuration					ENUMERATED {
												ms50, ms100, ms150, ms300, ms500, ms1000, spare2,
												spare1},
		logicalChannelGroup					INTEGER (0..3)			OPTIONAL			-- Need OR
	}		OPTIONAL,																	-- Cond UL
	...
}

-- ASN1STOP

LogicalChannelConfig field descriptions
priority
Logical channel priority in TS 36.321 [6]. Value is an integer.
prioritisedBitRate
Prioritized Bit Rate for logical channel prioritization in TS 36.321 [6]. Value in kilobytes/second. Value kBps0 corresponds to 0 kB/second, kBps8 corresponds to 8 kB/second, kBps16 corresponds to 16 kB/second and so on. Infinity is the only applicable value for SRB1 and SRB2
bucketSizeDuration
Bucket Size Duration for logical channel prioritization in TS 36.321 [6]. Value in milliseconds. Value ms50 corresponds to 50 ms, ms100 corresponds to 100 ms and so on.
logicalChannelGroup
Mapping of logical channel to logical channel group for BSR reporting in TS 36.321 [6].

Conditional presence
Explanation
UL
The field is mandatory present for UL logical channels; otherwise it is not present.

	MAC-MainConfig
The IE MAC-MainConfig is used to specify the MAC main configuration for signalling and data radio bearers.
MAC-MainConfig information element
-- ASN1START

MAC-MainConfig ::=					SEQUENCE {
	ul-SCH-Config						SEQUENCE {
		maxHARQ-Tx							ENUMERATED {
												n1, n2, n3, n4, n5, n6, n7, n8,
												n10, n12, n16, n20, n24, n28,
												spare2, spare1}		OPTIONAL,	-- Need ON
		periodicBSR-Timer					ENUMERATED {
												sf5, sf10, sf16, sf20, sf32, sf40, sf64, sf80,
												sf128, sf160, sf320, sf640, sf1280, sf2560,
												infinity, spare1}	OPTIONAL,	-- Need ON
		retxBSR-Timer						ENUMERATED {
												sf320, sf640, sf1280, sf2560, sf5120,
												sf10240, spare2, spare1},
		ttiBundling							BOOLEAN
	}																OPTIONAL, 	-- Need ON
	drx-Config							DRX-Config					OPTIONAL,	-- Need ON
	timeAlignmentTimerDedicated			TimeAlignmentTimer,
	phr-Config							CHOICE {
		release								NULL,
		setup								SEQUENCE {
			periodicPHR-Timer					ENUMERATED {sf10, sf20, sf50, sf100, sf200,
															sf500, sf1000, infinity},
			prohibitPHR-Timer					ENUMERATED {sf0, sf10, sf20, sf50, sf100,
																sf200, sf500, sf1000},
			dl-PathlossChange					ENUMERATED {dB1, dB3, dB6, infinity}
		}
	}																OPTIONAL,	-- Need ON
	...
}

DRX-Config ::=						CHOICE {
	release								NULL,
	setup								SEQUENCE {
		onDurationTimer						ENUMERATED {
												psf1, psf2, psf3, psf4, psf5, psf6,
												psf8, psf10, psf20, psf30, psf40,
												psf50, psf60, psf80, psf100,
												psf200},
		drx-InactivityTimer					ENUMERATED {
												psf1, psf2, psf3, psf4, psf5, psf6,
												psf8, psf10, psf20, psf30, psf40,
												psf50, psf60, psf80, psf100,
												psf200, psf300, psf500, psf750,
												psf1280, psf1920, psf2560, spare10,
												spare9, spare8, spare7, spare6,
												spare5, spare4, spare3, spare2,
												spare1},
		drx-RetransmissionTimer				ENUMERATED {
												psf1, psf2, psf4, psf6, psf8, psf16,
												psf24, psf33},
		longDRX-CycleStartOffset		CHOICE {
			sf10							INTEGER(0..9),
			sf20							INTEGER(0..19),
			sf32							INTEGER(0..31),
			sf40							INTEGER(0..39),
			sf64							INTEGER(0..63),
			sf80							INTEGER(0..79),
			sf128							INTEGER(0..127),
			sf160							INTEGER(0..159),
			sf256							INTEGER(0..255),
			sf320							INTEGER(0..319),
			sf512							INTEGER(0..511),
			sf640							INTEGER(0..639),
			sf1024							INTEGER(0..1023),
			sf1280							INTEGER(0..1279),
			sf2048							INTEGER(0..2047),
			sf2560							INTEGER(0..2559)
		},
		shortDRX							SEQUENCE {
			shortDRX-Cycle						ENUMERATED	{
													sf2, sf5, sf8, sf10, sf16, sf20,
													sf32, sf40, sf64, sf80, sf128, sf160,
													sf256, sf320, sf512, sf640},
			drxShortCycleTimer					INTEGER (1..16)
		}		OPTIONAL													-- Need OR
	}
}

-- ASN1STOP

MAC-MainConfig field descriptions
maxHARQ-Tx
Maximum number of transmissions for UL HARQ in TS 36.321 [6].
periodicBSR-Timer
Timer for BSR reporting in TS 36.321 [6]. Value in number of sub-frames. Value sf10 corresponds to 10 sub-frames, sf20 corresponds to 20 sub-frames and so on.
retxBSR-Timer
Timer for BSR reporting in TS 36.321 [6]. Value in number of sub-frames. Value sf640 corresponds to 640 sub-frames, sf1280 corresponds to 1280 sub-frames and so on.
ttiBundling
TRUE indicates that TTI bundling TS 36.321 [6] is enabled while FALSE indicates that TTI bundling is disabled. TTI bundling can be enabled for FDD and for TDD only for configurations 0, 1 and 6. For TDD, E-UTRAN does not simultaneously enable TTI bundling and semi-persistent scheduling in this release of specification.
longDRX-CycleStartOffset
longDRX-Cycle and drxStartOffset in TS 36.321 [6]. The value of longDRX-Cycle is in number of sub-frames. Value sf10 corresponds to 10 sub-frames, sf20 corresponds to 20 sub-frames and so on. If shortDRX-Cycle is configured, the value of longDRX-Cycle shall be a multiple of the shortDRX-Cycle value. The value of drxStartOffset value is in number of sub-frames. In TDD, this can point to a DL or UL sub-frame.
onDurationTimer
Timer for DRX in TS 36.321 [6]. Value in number of PDCCH sub-frames. Value psf1 corresponds to 1 PDCCH sub-frame, psf2 corresponds to 2 PDCCH sub-frames and so on.
drx-InactivityTimer
Timer for DRX in TS 36.321 [6]. Value in number of PDCCH sub-frames. Value psf1 corresponds to 1 PDCCH sub-frame, psf2 corresponds to 2 PDCCH sub-frames and so on.
drx-RetransmissionTimer
Timer for DRX in TS 36.321 [6]. Value in number of PDCCH sub-frames. Value psf1 corresponds to 1 PDCCH sub-frame, psf2 corresponds to 2 PDCCH sub-frames and so on.
shortDRX-Cycle
Short DRX cycle in TS 36.321 [6]. Value in number of sub-frames. Value sf2 corresponds to 2 sub-frames, sf5 corresponds to 5 subframes and so on.
drxShortCycleTimer
Timer for DRX in TS 36.321 [6]. Value in multiples of shortDRX-Cycle. A value of 1 corresponds to shortDRX-Cycle, a value of 2 corresponds to 2 * shortDRX-Cycle and so on.
periodicPHR-Timer
Timer for PHR reporting in TS 36.321 [6]. Value in number of sub-frames. Value sf10 corresponds to 10 subframes, sf20 corresponds to 20 subframes and so on.
prohibitPHR-Timer
Timer for PHR reporting in TS 36.321 [6]. Value in number of sub-frames. Value sf0 corresponds to 0 subframes, sf100 corresponds to 100 subframes and so on.
dl-PathlossChange
DL Pathloss Change for PHR reporting in TS 36.321 [6]. Value in dB. Value dB1 corresponds to 1 dB, dB3 corresponds to 3 dB and so on.

	PDCP-Config
The IE PDCP-Config is used to set the configurable PDCP parameters for data radio bearers.
PDCP-Config information element
-- ASN1START

PDCP-Config ::=						SEQUENCE {
	discardTimer						ENUMERATED {
											ms50, ms100, ms150, ms300, ms500,
											ms750, ms1500, infinity
	}															OPTIONAL,			-- Cond Setup
	rlc-AM								SEQUENCE {
		statusReportRequired				BOOLEAN
	}															OPTIONAL,			-- Cond Rlc-AM
	rlc-UM								SEQUENCE {
		pdcp-SN-Size						ENUMERATED {len7bits, len12bits}
	}															OPTIONAL,			-- Cond Rlc-UM
	headerCompression					CHOICE {
		notUsed								NULL,
		rohc								SEQUENCE {
			maxCID								INTEGER (1..16383)				DEFAULT 15,
			profiles							SEQUENCE {
				profile0x0001						BOOLEAN,
				profile0x0002						BOOLEAN,
				profile0x0003						BOOLEAN,
				profile0x0004						BOOLEAN,
				profile0x0006						BOOLEAN,
				profile0x0101						BOOLEAN,
				profile0x0102						BOOLEAN,
				profile0x0103						BOOLEAN,
				profile0x0104						BOOLEAN
			},
			...
		}
	},
	...
}

-- ASN1STOP

PDCP-Config field descriptions
discardTimer
Indicates the discard timer value specified in TS 36.323 [8]. Value in milliseconds. Value ms50 means 50 ms, ms100 means 100 ms and so on.
statusReportRequired
Indicates whether or not the UE shall send a PDCP Status Report upon re-establishment of the PDCP entity as specified in TS 36.323 [8].
pdcp-SN-Size
Indicates the PDCP Sequence Number length in bits. Value len7bits means that the 7-bit PDCP SN format is used and len12bits means that the 12-bit PDCP SN format is used, as specified in TS 36.323 [8].
maxCID
Indicates the value of the MAX_CID parameter as specified in TS 36.323 [8].
profiles
The profiles used by both compressor and decompressor in both UE and E-UTRAN. The field indicates which of the ROHC profiles specified in TS 36.323 [8] are supported, i.e. value 'true' indicates that the profile is supported. Profile 0x0000 shall always be supported when the use of ROHC is configured. If support of two ROHC profile identifiers with the same 8 LSBs is signalled, only the profile corresponding to the highest value shall be applied.

Conditional presence
Explanation
Setup
The field is mandatory present in case of radio bearer setup. Otherwise the field is not present.
Rlc-AM
The field is mandatory present upon setup of a PDCP entity for a radio bearer configured with RLC AM. The field is optional, need ON, in case of reconfiguration of a PDCP entity at handover for a radio bearer configured with RLC AM. Otherwise the field is not present.
Rlc-UM
The field is mandatory present upon setup of a PDCP entity for a radio bearer configured with RLC UM. Otherwise the field is not present.

	PDSCH-Config
The IE PDSCH-ConfigCommon and the IE PDSCH-ConfigDedicated are used to specify the common and the UE specific PDSCH configuration respectively.
PDSCH-Config information element
-- ASN1START

PDSCH-ConfigCommon::=		SEQUENCE {
	referenceSignalPower				INTEGER (-60..50),
	p-b									INTEGER (0..3)
}

PDSCH-ConfigDedicated::=		SEQUENCE {
	p-a									ENUMERATED {
											dB-6, dB-4dot77, dB-3, dB-1dot77,
											dB0, dB1, dB2, dB3 }
}

-- ASN1STOP

PDSCH-Config field descriptions
referenceSignalPower
Parameter: Reference-signal power, which provides the downlink reference-signal EPRE, see TS 36.213 [23, 5.2]. The actual value in dBm.
p-a
Parameter: , see TS 36.213 [23, 5.2]. Value dB-6 corresponds to -6 dB, dB-4dot77 corresponds to -4.77 dB etc.
p-b
Parameter: , see TS 36.213 [23, Table 5.2-1].

	PHICH-Config
The IE PHICH-Config is used to specify the PHICH configuration.
PHICH-Config information element
-- ASN1START

PHICH-Config ::=					SEQUENCE {
	phich-Duration						ENUMERATED {normal, extended},
	phich-Resource						ENUMERATED {oneSixth, half, one, two}
}

-- ASN1STOP

PHICH-Config field descriptions
phich-Duration
Parameter: PHICH-Duration, see TS 36.211 [21, Table 6.9.3-1].
phich-Resource
Parameter: Ng, see TS 36.211 [21, 6.9]. Value oneSixth corresponds to 1/6, half corresponds to 1/2 and so on.

	PhysicalConfigDedicated
The IE PhysicalConfigDedicated is used to specify the UE specific physical channel configuration.
PhysicalConfigDedicated information element
-- ASN1START

PhysicalConfigDedicated ::=			SEQUENCE {
	pdsch-ConfigDedicated				PDSCH-ConfigDedicated			OPTIONAL,		-- Need ON
	pucch-ConfigDedicated				PUCCH-ConfigDedicated			OPTIONAL,		-- Need ON
	pusch-ConfigDedicated				PUSCH-ConfigDedicated			OPTIONAL,		-- Need ON
	uplinkPowerControlDedicated			UplinkPowerControlDedicated		OPTIONAL,		-- Need ON
	tpc-PDCCH-ConfigPUCCH				TPC-PDCCH-Config 				OPTIONAL,		-- Need ON
	tpc-PDCCH-ConfigPUSCH				TPC-PDCCH-Config 				OPTIONAL,		-- Need ON
	cqi-ReportConfig					CQI-ReportConfig				OPTIONAL,		-- Need ON
	soundingRS-UL-ConfigDedicated		SoundingRS-UL-ConfigDedicated	OPTIONAL,		-- Need ON
	antennaInfo							CHOICE {
		explicitValue						AntennaInfoDedicated,
		defaultValue						NULL
	}		OPTIONAL,																	-- Need ON
	schedulingRequestConfig				SchedulingRequestConfig 		OPTIONAL, 		-- Need ON
	...
}

-- ASN1STOP

PhysicalConfigDedicated field descriptions
antennaInfo
A choice is used to indicate whether the antennaInfo is signalled explicitly or set to the default antenna configuration as specified in section 9.2.4.
tpc-PDCCH-ConfigPUCCH
PDCCH configuration for power control of PUCCH using format 3/3A, see TS 36.212 [22].
tpc-PDCCH-ConfigPUSCH
PDCCH configuration for power control of PUSCH using format 3/3A, see TS 36.212 [22].

	P-Max
The IE P-Max is used to limit the UEs uplink transmission power on a carrier frequency and is used to calculate the parameter Pcompensation defined in TS 36.304 [4]. Corresponds to parameter PEMAX in TS 36.101 [42]. The UE transmit power shall not exceed the minimum of this value (in dBm), if provided, and the maximum UE power for the UE power class, PUMAX, as specified in TS 36.101 [42, 6.2.5].
P-Max information element
-- ASN1START

P-Max ::=				INTEGER (-30..33)

-- ASN1STOP

	PRACH-Config
The IE PRACH-ConfigSIB and IE PRACH-Config are used to specify the PRACH configuration in the system information and in the mobility control information, respectively.
PRACH-Config information elements
-- ASN1START

PRACH-ConfigSIB ::=			SEQUENCE {
	rootSequenceIndex					INTEGER (0..837),
	prach-ConfigInfo					PRACH-ConfigInfo
}

PRACH-Config ::=				SEQUENCE {
	rootSequenceIndex					INTEGER (0..837),
	prach-ConfigInfo					PRACH-ConfigInfo					OPTIONAL	-- Need ON
}

PRACH-ConfigInfo ::=				SEQUENCE {
	prach-ConfigIndex					INTEGER (0..63),
	highSpeedFlag						BOOLEAN,
	zeroCorrelationZoneConfig			INTEGER (0..15),
	prach-FreqOffset					INTEGER (0..94)
}

-- ASN1STOP

PRACH-Config field descriptions
rootSequenceIndex
Parameter: RACH_ROOT_SEQUENCE, see TS 36.211 [21, 5.7.1].
prach-ConfigIndex
Parameter: prach-ConfigurationIndex, see TS 36.211 [21, 5.7.1].
highSpeedFlag
Parameter: High-speed-flag, see TS 36.211, [21, 5.7.2].TRUE corresponds to Restricted set and FALSE to Unrestricted set.
zeroCorrelationZoneConfig
Parameter: NCS configuration, see TS 36.211, [21, 5.7.2: table 5.7.2-2] for preamble format 0..3 and TS 36.211, [21, 5.7.2: table 5.7.2-3] for preamble format 4.
prach-FreqOffset
Parameter: prach-FrequencyOffset, see TS 36.211, [21, 5.7.1]. For TDD the value range is dependent on the value of prach-ConfigIndex.

	PresenceAntennaPort1
The IE PresenceAntennaPort1 is used to indicate whether all the neighbouring cells use Antenna Port 1.  When set to TRUE, the UE may assume that at least two cell-specific antenna ports are used in all neighbouring cells.
PresenceAntennaPort1 information element
-- ASN1START

PresenceAntennaPort1 ::=				BOOLEAN

-- ASN1STOP

	PUCCH-Config
The IE PUCCH-ConfigCommon and IE PUCCH-ConfigDedicated are used to specify the common and the UE specific PUCCH configuration respectively.
PUCCH-Config information elements
-- ASN1START

PUCCH-ConfigCommon ::=				SEQUENCE {
	deltaPUCCH-Shift					ENUMERATED {ds1, ds2, ds3},
	nRB-CQI								INTEGER (0..98),
	nCS-AN								INTEGER (0..7),
	n1PUCCH-AN							INTEGER (0..2047)
}

PUCCH-ConfigDedicated ::=			SEQUENCE {
	ackNackRepetition					CHOICE{
		release								NULL,
		setup								SEQUENCE {
			repetitionFactor					ENUMERATED { n2, n4, n6, spare1},
			n1PUCCH-AN-Rep						INTEGER (0..2047)
		}
	},
	tdd-AckNackFeedbackMode				ENUMERATED {bundling, multiplexing}	OPTIONAL	-- Cond TDD
}

-- ASN1STOP

PUCCH-Config field descriptions
deltaPUCCH-Shift
Parameter: , see 36.211, 5.4.1, where ds1 corresponds to value 1 ds2 to 2 etc.
nRB-CQI
Parameter: , see TS 36.211 [21, 5.4].
nCS-An
Parameter: see TS 36.211 [21, 5.4].
n1Pucch-AN
Parameter: see TS 36.213 [23, 10.1].
ackNackRepetition
Parameter indicates whether ACK/NACK repetition is configured, see TS 36.213 [23, 10.1].
repetitionFactor
Parameter  see TS 36.213 [23, 10.1] where n2 corresponds to repetition factor 2, n4 to 4.
n1Pucch-AN-Rep
Parameter: see TS 36.213 [23, 10.1].
tdd-AckNackFeedbackMode
Parameter indicates one of the two TDD ACK/NACK feedback modes used, see TS 36.213 [23, 7.3]. bundling corresponds to use of ACK/NACK bundling whereas, multiplexing corresponds to ACK/NACK multiplexing.
The same value applies to both ACK/NACK feedback modes on PUCCH as well as on PUSCH. For TDD configuration 5, E-UTRAN should always set this field to bundling.

Conditional presence
Explanation
TDD
The field is mandatory present for TDD; it is not present for FDD and the UE shall delete any existing value for this field.

	PUSCH-Config
The IE PUSCH-ConfigCommon is used to specify the common PUSCH configuration and the reference signal configuration for PUSCH and PUCCH. The IE PUSCH-ConfigDedicated is used to specify the UE specific PUSCH configuration.
PUSCH-Config information element
-- ASN1START

PUSCH-ConfigCommon ::=				SEQUENCE {
	pusch-ConfigBasic					SEQUENCE {
		n-SB								INTEGER (1..4),
		hoppingMode							ENUMERATED {interSubFrame, intraAndInterSubFrame},
		pusch-HoppingOffset					INTEGER (0..98),
		enable64QAM							BOOLEAN
	},
	ul-ReferenceSignalsPUSCH			UL-ReferenceSignalsPUSCH
}

PUSCH-ConfigDedicated ::=			SEQUENCE {
	betaOffset-ACK-Index					INTEGER (0..15),
	betaOffset-RI-Index					INTEGER (0..15),
	betaOffset-CQI-Index					INTEGER (0..15)
}

UL-ReferenceSignalsPUSCH ::=		SEQUENCE {
	groupHoppingEnabled					BOOLEAN,
	groupAssignmentPUSCH				INTEGER (0..29),
	sequenceHoppingEnabled				BOOLEAN,
	cyclicShift							INTEGER (0..7)
}

-- ASN1STOP

PUSCH-Config field descriptions
n-SB
Parameter: Nsb see TS 36.211 [21, 5.3.4].
hoppingMode
Parameter: Hopping-mode, see TS 36.211 [21, 5.3.4].
pusch-hoppingOffset
Parameter: , see TS 36.211 [21, 5.3.4].
enable64QAM
See TS 36.213 [23, 8.6.1]. TRUE indicates that 64QAM is allowed while FALSE indicates that 64QAM is not allowed.
betaOffset-ACK-Index
Parameter: , see TS 36.213 [23, Table 8.6.3-1].
betaOffset-RI-Index
Parameter: , see TS 36.213 [23, Table 8.6.3-2].
betaOffset-CQI-Index
Parameter: , see TS 36.213 [23, Table 8.6.3-3].
ul- ReferenceSignalsPUSCH
Used to specify parameters needed for the transmission on PUSCH (or PUCCH).
groupHoppingEnabled
Parameter: Group-hopping-enabled, see TS 36.211 [21, 5.5.1.3].
groupAssignmentPUSCH
Parameter: ?SS See TS 36.211 [21, 5.5.1.3].
sequenceHoppingEnabled
Parameter: Sequence-hopping-enabled, see TS 36.211 [21, 5.5.1.4].
cyclicShift
Parameters: cyclicShift, see TS 36.211 [21, Table 5.5.2.1.1-2].

	RACH-ConfigCommon
The IE RACH-ConfigCommon is used to specify the generic random access parameters.
RACH-ConfigCommon information element
-- ASN1START

RACH-ConfigCommon ::=		SEQUENCE {
	preambleInfo						SEQUENCE {
		numberOfRA-Preambles				ENUMERATED {
												n4, n8, n12, n16 ,n20, n24, n28,
												n32, n36, n40, n44, n48, n52, n56,
												n60, n64},
		preamblesGroupAConfig				SEQUENCE {
			sizeOfRA-PreamblesGroupA			ENUMERATED {
													n4, n8, n12, n16 ,n20, n24, n28,
													n32, n36, n40, n44, n48, n52, n56,
													n60},
			messageSizeGroupA					ENUMERATED {b56, b144, b208, b256},
			messagePowerOffsetGroupB			ENUMERATED {
													minusinfinity, dB0, dB5, dB8, dB10, dB12,
													dB15, dB18},
			...
		}			OPTIONAL													-- Need OP
	},
	powerRampingParameters				SEQUENCE {
		powerRampingStep					ENUMERATED {dB0, dB2,dB4, dB6},
		preambleInitialReceivedTargetPower	ENUMERATED {
												dBm-120, dBm-118, dBm-116, dBm-114, dBm-112,
												dBm-110, dBm-108, dBm-106, dBm-104, dBm-102,
												dBm-100, dBm-98, dBm-96, dBm-94,
												dBm-92, dBm-90}
	},
	ra-SupervisionInfo					SEQUENCE {
		preambleTransMax					ENUMERATED {
												n3, n4, n5, n6, n7,	n8, n10, n20, n50,
												n100, n200},
		ra-ResponseWindowSize				ENUMERATED {
												sf2, sf3, sf4, sf5, sf6, sf7,
												sf8, sf10},
		mac-ContentionResolutionTimer		ENUMERATED {
												sf8, sf16, sf24, sf32, sf40, sf48,
												sf56, sf64}
	},
	maxHARQ-Msg3Tx						INTEGER (1..8),
	...
}

-- ASN1STOP

RACH-ConfigCommon field descriptions
numberOfRA-Preambles
Number of non-dedicated random access preambles in TS 36.321 [6]. Value is an integer. Value n4 corresponds to 4, n8 corresponds to 8 and so on.
preamblesGroupAConfig
Provides the configuration for preamble grouping in TS 36.321 [6]. If the field is not signalled, the size of the random access preambles group A [6] is equal to numberOfRA-Preambles.
sizeOfRA-PreamblesGroupA
Size of the random access preambles group A in TS 36.321 [6]. Value is an integer. Value n4 corresponds to 4, n8 corresponds to 8 and so on.
messageSizeGroupA
Threshold for preamble selection in TS 36.321 [6]. Value in bits. Value b56 corresponds to 56 bits, b144 corresponds to 144 bits and so on.
messagePowerOffsetGroupB
Threshold for preamble selection in TS 36.321 [6]. Value in dB. Value minusinfinity corresponds to infinity. Value dB0 corresponds to 0 dB, dB5 corresponds to 5 dB and so on.
powerRampingStep
Power ramping factor in TS 36.321 [6]. Value in dB. Value dB0 corresponds to 0 dB, dB2 corresponds to 2 dB and so on.
preambleInitialReceivedTargetPower
Initial preamble power in TS 36.321 [6]. Value in dBm. Value dBm-120 corresponds to -120 dBm, dBm-118 corresponds to -118 dBm and so on.
preambleTransMax
Maximum number of preamble transmission in TS 36.321 [6]. Value is an integer. Value n3 corresponds to 3, n4 corresponds to 4 and so on.
ra-ResponseWindowSize
Duration of the RA response window in TS 36.321 [6]. Value in subframes. Value sf2 corresponds to 2 subframes, sf3 corresponds to 3 subframes and so on.
mac-ContentionResolutionTimer
Timer for contention resolution in TS 36.321 [6]. Value in subframes. Value sf8 corresponds to 8 subframes, sf16 corresponds to 16 subframes and so on.
maxHARQ-Msg3Tx
Maximum number of Msg3 HARQ transmissions in TS 36.321 [6], used for contention based random access. Value is an integer.

	RACH-ConfigDedicated
The IE RACH-ConfigDedicated is used to specify the dedicated random access parameters.
RACH-ConfigDedicated information element
-- ASN1START

RACH-ConfigDedicated ::=		SEQUENCE {
	ra-PreambleIndex					INTEGER (0..63),
	ra-PRACH-MaskIndex					INTEGER (0..15)
}

-- ASN1STOP

RACH-ConfigDedicated field descriptions
ra-PreambleIndex
Explicitly signalled Random Access Preamble for RA Resource selection in TS 36.321 [6].
ra-PRACH-MaskIndex
Explicitly signalled PRACH Mask Index for RA Resource selection in TS 36.321 [6].

	RadioResourceConfigCommon
The IE RadioResourceConfigCommonSIB and IE RadioResourceConfigCommon are used to specify common radio resource configurations in the system information and in the mobility control information, respectively, e.g., the random access parameters and the static physical layer parameters.
RadioResourceConfigCommon information element
-- ASN1START

RadioResourceConfigCommonSIB ::=	SEQUENCE {
	rach-ConfigCommon					RACH-ConfigCommon,
	bcch-Config 						BCCH-Config,
	pcch-Config 						PCCH-Config,
	prach-Config						PRACH-ConfigSIB,
	pdsch-ConfigCommon					PDSCH-ConfigCommon,
	pusch-ConfigCommon					PUSCH-ConfigCommon,
	pucch-ConfigCommon					PUCCH-ConfigCommon,
	soundingRS-UL-ConfigCommon			SoundingRS-UL-ConfigCommon,
	uplinkPowerControlCommon			UplinkPowerControlCommon,
	ul-CyclicPrefixLength				UL-CyclicPrefixLength,
	...
}

RadioResourceConfigCommon ::=		SEQUENCE {
	rach-ConfigCommon					RACH-ConfigCommon					OPTIONAL,	-- Need ON
	prach-Config						PRACH-Config,
	pdsch-ConfigCommon					PDSCH-ConfigCommon					OPTIONAL,	-- Need ON
	pusch-ConfigCommon					PUSCH-ConfigCommon,
	phich-Config						PHICH-Config						OPTIONAL,	-- Need ON
	pucch-ConfigCommon					PUCCH-ConfigCommon					OPTIONAL,	-- Need ON
	soundingRS-UL-ConfigCommon			SoundingRS-UL-ConfigCommon			OPTIONAL,	-- Need ON
	uplinkPowerControlCommon			UplinkPowerControlCommon			OPTIONAL,	-- Need ON
	antennaInfoCommon					AntennaInfoCommon			OPTIONAL,	-- Need ON
	p-Max								P-Max								OPTIONAL,	-- Need OP
	tdd-Config							TDD-Config							OPTIONAL,	-- Cond TDD
	ul-CyclicPrefixLength				UL-CyclicPrefixLength,
	...
}

BCCH-Config ::=						SEQUENCE {
	modificationPeriodCoeff				ENUMERATED {n2, n4, n8, n16}
}

PCCH-Config ::=						SEQUENCE {
	defaultPagingCycle					ENUMERATED {
											rf32, rf64, rf128, rf256},
	nB									ENUMERATED {
											fourT, twoT, oneT, halfT, quarterT, oneEighthT,
											oneSixteenthT, oneThirtySecondT}
}

UL-CyclicPrefixLength ::=			ENUMERATED {len1, len2}

-- ASN1STOP

RadioResourceConfigCommon field descriptions
p-Max
Pmax to be used in the target cell. If absent the UE applies the maximum power according to the UE capability.
modificationPeriodCoeff
Actual modification period, expressed in number of radio frames= modificationPeriodCoeff * defaultPagingCycle. n2 corresponds to value 2, n4 corresponds to value 4, n8 corresponds to value 8 and n16 corresponds to value 16.
defaultPagingCycle
Default paging cycle, used to derive T in TS 36.304 [4]. Value rf32 corresponds to 32 radio frames, rf64 corresponds to 64 radio frames and so on.
nB
Parameter: nB is used as one of parameters to derive the Paging Frame and Paging Occasion according to TS 36.304 [4]. Value in multiples of defaultPagingCycle ('T'). A value of fourT corresponds to 4 * defaultPagingCycle, a value of twoT corresponds to 2 * defaultPagingCycle and so on.
UL-CyclicPrefixLength
Parameter: Uplink cyclic prefix length see 36.211 [21, 5.2.1] where len1 corresponds to normal cyclic prefix and len2 corresponds to extended cyclic prefix.

Conditional presence
Explanation
TDD
The field is optional for TDD, Need ON; it is not present for FDD and the UE shall delete any existing value for this field.

	RadioResourceConfigDedicated
The IE RadioResourceConfigDedicated is used to setup/modify/release RBs, to modify the MAC main configuration, to modify the SPS configuration and to modify dedicated physical configuration.
RadioResourceConfigDedicated information element
-- ASN1START

RadioResourceConfigDedicated ::=		SEQUENCE {
	srb-ToAddModList					SRB-ToAddModList			OPTIONAL, 		-- Cond HO-Conn
	drb-ToAddModList					DRB-ToAddModList			OPTIONAL, 		-- Cond HO-toEUTRA
	drb-ToReleaseList					DRB-ToReleaseList			OPTIONAL, 		-- Need ON
	mac-MainConfig						CHOICE {
			explicitValue					MAC-MainConfig,
			defaultValue					NULL
	}		OPTIONAL,																-- Cond HO-toEUTRA2
	sps-Config							SPS-Config 					OPTIONAL,		-- Need ON
	physicalConfigDedicated				PhysicalConfigDedicated		OPTIONAL,		-- Need ON
	...
}

SRB-ToAddModList ::=				SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..2)) OF SRB-ToAddMod

SRB-ToAddMod ::=	SEQUENCE {
	srb-Identity						INTEGER (1..2),
	rlc-Config							CHOICE {
		explicitValue						RLC-Config,
		defaultValue						NULL
	}		OPTIONAL,																-- Cond Setup
	logicalChannelConfig				CHOICE {
		explicitValue						LogicalChannelConfig,
		defaultValue						NULL
	}		OPTIONAL,																-- Cond Setup
	...
}

DRB-ToAddModList ::=				SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxDRB)) OF DRB-ToAddMod

DRB-ToAddMod ::=	SEQUENCE {
	eps-BearerIdentity					INTEGER (0..15)			OPTIONAL,		-- Cond DRB-Setup
	drb-Identity						DRB-Identity,
	pdcp-Config							PDCP-Config				OPTIONAL,		-- Cond PDCP
	rlc-Config							RLC-Config				OPTIONAL,		-- Cond Setup
	logicalChannelIdentity				INTEGER (3..10)			OPTIONAL,		-- Cond DRB-Setup
	logicalChannelConfig				LogicalChannelConfig	OPTIONAL,		-- Cond Setup
	...
}

DRB-ToReleaseList ::=				SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxDRB)) OF DRB-Identity

-- ASN1STOP

RadioResourceConfigDedicated field descriptions
srb-Identity
Value 1 is applicable for SRB1 only.
Value 2 is applicable for SRB2 only.
rlc-Config
For SRBs a choice is used to indicate whether the RLC configuration is signalled explicitly or set to the values defined in the default RLC configuration for SRB1 in 9.2.1.1 or for SRB2 in 9.2.1.2. RLC AM is the only applicable RLC mode for SRB1 and SRB2. E-UTRAN does not reconfigure the RLC mode of DRBs, and may reconfigure the UM RLC SN field size only upon handover within E-UTRA or upon the first reconfiguration after RRC connection re-establishment.
mac-MainConfig
Although the ASN.1 includes a choice that is used to indicate whether the mac-MainConfig is signalled explictly or set to the default MAC main configuration as specified in 9.2.2, EUTRAN does not apply "defaultValue".
sps-Config
The default SPS configuration is specified in 9.2.3.
physicalConfigDedicated
The default dedicated physical configuration is specified in 9.2.4.
logicalChannelConfig
For SRBs a choice is used to indicate whether the logical channel configuration is signalled explicitly or set to the default logical channel configuration for SRB1 as specified in 9.2.1.1 or for SRB2 as specified in 9.2.1.2.
logicalChannelIdentity
The logical channel identity for both UL and DL.

Conditional presence
Explanation
DRB-Setup
The field is mandatory present if the corresponding DRB is being set up (including bearer setup at handover to E-UTRA); otherwise it is not present.
PDCP
The field is mandatory present if the corresponding DRB is being setup; the field is optionally present, need ON, upon handover within E-UTRA and upon the first reconfiguration after re-establishment; otherwise it is not present.
Setup
The field is mandatory present if the corresponding SRB/DRB is being setup; otherwise the field is optionally present, need ON.
HO-Conn
The field is mandatory present in case of handover to E-UTRA and to only establish SRB1 in case of RRC connection establishment; otherwise the field is optionally present, need ON.
HO-toEUTRA
The field is mandatory present in case of handover to E-UTRA; In case of RRC connection establishment and RRC connection re-establishment the field is not present; otherwise the field is optionally present, need ON.
HO-toEUTRA2
The field is mandatory present in case of handover to E-UTRA; otherwise the field is optionally present, need ON.

	RLC-Config
The IE RLC-Config is used to specify the RLC configuration of SRBs and DRBs.
RLC-Config information element
-- ASN1START

RLC-Config ::=				CHOICE {
	am									SEQUENCE {
		ul-AM-RLC							UL-AM-RLC,
		dl-AM-RLC							DL-AM-RLC
	},
	um-Bi-Directional					SEQUENCE {
		ul-UM-RLC							UL-UM-RLC,
		dl-UM-RLC							DL-UM-RLC
	},
	um-Uni-Directional-UL				SEQUENCE {
		ul-UM-RLC							UL-UM-RLC
	},
	um-Uni-Directional-DL				SEQUENCE {
		dl-UM-RLC							DL-UM-RLC
	},
	...
}

UL-AM-RLC ::=						SEQUENCE {
	t-PollRetransmit					T-PollRetransmit,
	pollPDU								PollPDU,
	pollByte							PollByte,
	maxRetxThreshold					ENUMERATED {
											t1, t2, t3, t4, t6, t8, t16, t32}
}

DL-AM-RLC ::=						SEQUENCE {
	t-Reordering						T-Reordering,
	t-StatusProhibit					T-StatusProhibit
}

UL-UM-RLC ::=						SEQUENCE {
	sn-FieldLength						SN-FieldLength
}

DL-UM-RLC ::=						SEQUENCE {
	sn-FieldLength						SN-FieldLength,
	t-Reordering						T-Reordering
}

SN-FieldLength ::=					ENUMERATED {size5, size10}

T-PollRetransmit ::=				ENUMERATED {
										ms5, ms10, ms15, ms20, ms25, ms30, ms35,
										ms40, ms45, ms50, ms55, ms60, ms65, ms70,
										ms75, ms80, ms85, ms90, ms95, ms100, ms105,
										ms110, ms115, ms120, ms125, ms130, ms135,
										ms140, ms145, ms150, ms155, ms160, ms165,
										ms170, ms175, ms180, ms185, ms190, ms195,
										ms200, ms205, ms210, ms215, ms220, ms225,
										ms230, ms235, ms240, ms245, ms250, ms300,
										ms350, ms400, ms450, ms500, spare9, spare8,
										spare7, spare6, spare5, spare4, spare3,
										spare2, spare1}

PollPDU ::=							ENUMERATED {
										p4, p8, p16, p32, p64, p128, p256, pInfinity}

PollByte ::=						ENUMERATED {
										kB25, kB50, kB75, kB100, kB125, kB250, kB375,
										kB500, kB750, kB1000, kB1250, kB1500, kB2000,
										kB3000, kBinfinity, spare1}

T-Reordering ::=					ENUMERATED {
										ms0, ms5, ms10, ms15, ms20, ms25, ms30, ms35,
										ms40, ms45, ms50, ms55, ms60, ms65, ms70,
										ms75, ms80, ms85, ms90, ms95, ms100, ms110,
										ms120, ms130, ms140, ms150, ms160, ms170,
										ms180, ms190, ms200, spare1}

T-StatusProhibit ::=				ENUMERATED {
										ms0, ms5, ms10, ms15, ms20, ms25, ms30, ms35,
										ms40, ms45, ms50, ms55, ms60, ms65, ms70,
										ms75, ms80, ms85, ms90, ms95, ms100, ms105,
										ms110, ms115, ms120, ms125, ms130, ms135,
										ms140, ms145, ms150, ms155, ms160, ms165,
										ms170, ms175, ms180, ms185, ms190, ms195,
										ms200, ms205, ms210, ms215, ms220, ms225,
										ms230, ms235, ms240, ms245, ms250, ms300,
										ms350, ms400, ms450, ms500, spare8, spare7,
										spare6, spare5, spare4, spare3, spare2,
										spare1}

-- ASN1STOP

RLC-Config field descriptions
sn-FieldLength
Indicates the UM RLC SN field size, see TS 36.322 [7], in bits. Value size5 means 5 bits, size10 means 10 bits.
t-PollRetransmit
Timer for RLC AM in TS 36.322 [7], in milliseconds. Value ms5 means 5ms, ms10 means 10ms and so on.
pollPDU
Parameter for RLC AM in TS 36.322 [7]. Value p4 corresponds to 4 PDUs, p8 to 8 PDUs and so on. pInfinity corresponds to an infinite number of PDUs.
pollByte
Parameter for RLC AM in TS 36.322 [7]. Value kB25 corresponds to 25 kBytes, kB50 to 50 kBytes and so on. kBInfinity corresponds to an infinite amount of kBytes.
maxRetxThreshold
Parameter for RLC AM in TS 36.322 [7]. Value t1 corresponds to 1 retransmission, t2 to 2 retransmissions and so on.
t-Reordering
Timer for reordering in TS 36.322 [7], in milliseconds. Value ms0 means 0ms, ms5 means 5ms and so on.
t-StatusProhibit
Timer for status reporting in TS 36.322 [7], in milliseconds. Value ms0 means 0ms, ms5 means 5ms and so on.

	SchedulingRequestConfig
The IE SchedulingRequestConfig is used to specify the Scheduling Request related parameters
SchedulingRequestConfig information element
-- ASN1START

SchedulingRequestConfig ::=		CHOICE {
	release								NULL,
	setup								SEQUENCE {
		sr-PUCCH-ResourceIndex				INTEGER (0..2047),
		sr-ConfigIndex						INTEGER (0..155),
		dsr-TransMax						ENUMERATED {
												n4, n8, n16, n32, n64, spare3, spare2, spare1}
	}
}

-- ASN1STOP

SchedulingRequestConfig field descriptions
sr-PUCCH-ResourceIndex
Parameter: . see TS 36.213 [23, 10.1].
sr-ConfigIndex
Parameter. See TS 36.213 [23,10.1].
dsr-TransMax
Parameter for SR transmission in TS 36.321 [6, 5.4.4]. The value n4 corresponds to 4 transmissions, n8 corresponds to 8 transmissions and so on.

	SoundingRS-UL-Config
The IE SoundingRS-UL-Config is used to specify the uplink Sounding RS configuration.
SoundingRS-UL-Config information element
-- ASN1START

SoundingRS-UL-ConfigCommon ::=		CHOICE {
	release								NULL,
	setup								SEQUENCE {
		srs-BandwidthConfig					ENUMERATED {bw0, bw1, bw2, bw3, bw4, bw5, bw6, bw7},
		srs-SubframeConfig					ENUMERATED {
												sc0, sc1, sc2, sc3, sc4, sc5, sc6, sc7,
												sc8, sc9, sc10, sc11, sc12, sc13, sc14, sc15},
		ackNackSRS-SimultaneousTransmission	BOOLEAN,
		srs-MaxUpPts						ENUMERATED {true}			OPTIONAL	-- Cond TDD
	}
}

SoundingRS-UL-ConfigDedicated ::=	CHOICE{
	release								NULL,
	setup								SEQUENCE {
		srs-Bandwidth						ENUMERATED {bw0, bw1, bw2, bw3},
		srs-HoppingBandwidth				ENUMERATED {hbw0, hbw1, hbw2, hbw3},
		freqDomainPosition					INTEGER (0..23),
		duration							BOOLEAN,
		srs-ConfigIndex						INTEGER (0..1023),
		transmissionComb					INTEGER (0..1),
		cyclicShift							ENUMERATED {cs0, cs1, cs2, cs3, cs4, cs5, cs6, cs7}
	}
}


-- ASN1STOP

SoundingRS-UL-Config field descriptions
srs-BandwidthConfig
Parameter: SRS Bandwidth Configuration. See TS 36.211, [21, table 5.5.3.2-1, 5.5.3.2-2, 5.5.3.2-3 and 5.5.3.2 4]. Actual configuration depends on UL bandwidth. bw0 corresponds to value 0, bw1 to value 1 and so on.
srs-SubframeConfig
Parameter: SRS SubframeConfiguration. See TS 36.211, [21, table 5.5.3.3-1] applies for FDD whereas TS 36.211, [21, table 5.5.3.3-2] applies for TDD. sc0 corresponds to value 0, sc1 to value 1 and so on.
ackNackSRS-SimultaneousTransmission
Parameter: Simultaneous-AN-and-SRS, see TS 36.213 [23, 8.2].
srs-Bandwidth
Parameter: b, see TS 36.211 [21, table 5.5.3.2-1].
freqDomainPosition
Parameter: , see TS 36.211 [21, 5.5.3.2].
srs-HoppingBandwidth
Parameter: SRS hopping bandwidth , see TS 36.211 [21, 5.5.3.2] where hbw0 corresponds to value 0, hbw1 to value 1 and so on.
duration
Parameter: Duration. See TS 36.213 [21, 8.2]. FALSE corresponds to single and value TRUE to indefinite.
srs-ConfigIndex
Parameter: ISRS. See TS 36.213 [23, table8.2-1].
transmissionComb
Parameter: , see TS 36.211 [21, 5.5.3.2].
cyclicShift
Parameter: n_SRS. See TS 36.211 [21, 5.5.3.1], where cs0 corresponds to 0 etc.
srs-MaxUpPts
Parameter: srsMaxUpPts, see TS 36.211 [21, 5.5.3.2]. If this field is present, reconfiguration of  applies for UpPts, otherwise reconfiguration does not apply.

Conditional presence
Explanation
TDD
This field is optional present for TDD, need OR; it is not present for FDD and the UE shall delete any existing value for this field.

	SPS-Config
The IE SPS-Config is used to specify the semi-persistent scheduling configuration.
SPS-Config information element
-- ASN1START

SPS-Config ::=	SEQUENCE {
	semiPersistSchedC-RNTI			C-RNTI					OPTIONAL,			-- Need OR
	sps-ConfigDL					SPS-ConfigDL			OPTIONAL,			-- Need ON
	sps-ConfigUL					SPS-ConfigUL			OPTIONAL			-- Need ON
}

SPS-ConfigDL ::=	CHOICE{
	release							NULL,
	setup							SEQUENCE {
		semiPersistSchedIntervalDL			ENUMERATED {
												sf10, sf20, sf32, sf40, sf64, sf80,
												sf128, sf160, sf320, sf640, spare6,
												spare5, spare4, spare3, spare2,
												spare1},
		numberOfConfSPS-Processes			INTEGER (1..8),
		n1-PUCCH-AN-PersistentList			N1-PUCCH-AN-PersistentList,
		...
	}
}

SPS-ConfigUL ::=	CHOICE {
	release							NULL,
	setup							SEQUENCE {
		semiPersistSchedIntervalUL			ENUMERATED {
												sf10, sf20, sf32, sf40, sf64, sf80,
												sf128, sf160, sf320, sf640, spare6,
												spare5, spare4, spare3, spare2,
												spare1},
		implicitReleaseAfter				ENUMERATED {e2, e3, e4, e8},
		p0-Persistent						SEQUENCE {
			p0-NominalPUSCH-Persistent			INTEGER (-126..24),
			p0-UE-PUSCH-Persistent				INTEGER (-8..7)
		}		OPTIONAL,												-- Need OP
		twoIntervalsConfig					ENUMERATED {true}			OPTIONAL,	-- Cond TDD
		...
	}
}

N1-PUCCH-AN-PersistentList ::=		SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..4)) OF INTEGER (0..2047)

-- ASN1STOP

SPS-Config field descriptions
semiPersistSchedC-RNTI
Semi-persistent Scheduling C-RNTI, see TS 36.321 [6].
semiPersistSchedIntervalDL
Semi-persistent scheduling interval in downlink, see TS 36.321 [6]. Value in number of sub-frames. Value sf10 corresponds to 10 sub-frames, sf20 corresponds to 20 sub-frames and so on. For TDD, the UE shall round this parameter down to the nearest integer (of 10 sub-frames), e.g. sf10 corresponds to 10 sub-frames, sf32 corresponds to 30 sub-frames, sf128 corresponds to 120 sub-frames.
numberOfConfSPS-Processes
Parameter: Number of Configured SPS Processes, see TS 36.321 [6].
n1-PUCCH-AN-PersistentList
List of parameter: see TS 36.213, [23, 10.1].
semiPersistSchedIntervalUL
Semi-persistent scheduling interval in uplink, see TS 36.321 [6]. Value in number of sub-frames. Value sf10 corresponds to 10 sub-frames, sf20 corresponds to 20 sub-frames and so on. For TDD, the UE shall round this parameter down to the nearest integer (of 10 sub-frames), e.g. sf10 corresponds to 10 sub-frames, sf32 corresponds to 30 sub-frames, sf128 corresponds to 120 sub-frames.
implicitReleaseAfter
Number of empty transmissions before implicit release, see TS 36.321 [6, 5.10.2]. Value e2 corresponds to 2 transmissions, e3 corresponds to 3 transmissions and so on.
p0-NominalPUSCH-Persistent
Parameter: . See TS 36.213 [23, 5.1.1.1], unit dBm step 1. This field is applicable for persistent scheduling, only. If choice setup is used and p0-Persistent is absent, apply the value of p0-NominalPUSCH for p0-NominalPUSCH-Persistent.
p0-UE-PUSCH-Persistent
Parameter: . See TS 36.213 [23, 5.1.1.1], unit dB. This field is applicable for persistent scheduling, only. If choice setup is used and p0-Persistent is absent, apply the value of p0-UE-PUSCH for p0-UE-PUSCH-Persistent.
twoIntervalsConfig
Trigger of two-intervals-Semi-Persistent Scheduling in uplink. See TS 36.321 [6, 5.10]. If this field is present, two-intervals-SPS is enabled for uplink. Otherwise, two-intervals-SPS is disabled.

Conditional presence
Explanation
TDD
This field is optional present for TDD, need OR; it is not present for FDD and the UE shall delete any existing value for this field.

	TDD-Config
The IE TDD-Config is used to specify the TDD specific physical channel configuration.
TDD-Config information element
-- ASN1START

TDD-Config ::=						SEQUENCE {
	subframeAssignment					ENUMERATED {
											sa0, sa1, sa2, sa3, sa4, sa5, sa6},
	specialSubframePatterns				ENUMERATED {
											ssp0, ssp1, ssp2, ssp3, ssp4,ssp5, ssp6, ssp7,
											ssp8}
}

-- ASN1STOP

TDD-Config field descriptions
subframeAssignment
Indicates DL/UL subframe configuration where sa0 point to Configuration 0, sa1 to Configuration 1 etc. as specified in TS 36.211 [21, table 4.2.2].
specialSubframePatterns
Indicates Configuration as in TS 36.211 [21, table 4.2.1] where ssp0 point to Configuration 0, ssp1 to Configuration 1 etc.

	TimeAlignmentTimer
The IE TimeAlignmentTimer is used to control how long the UE is considered uplink time aligned. Corresponds to the Timer for time alignment in TS 36.321 [6]. Value in number of sub-frames. Value sf500 corresponds to 500 sub-frames, sf750 corresponds to 750 sub-frames and so on.
TimeAlignmentTimer information element
-- ASN1START

TimeAlignmentTimer ::=					ENUMERATED {
												sf500, sf750, sf1280, sf1920, sf2560, sf5120,
												sf10240, infinity}
-- ASN1STOP

	TPC-PDCCH-Config
The IE TPC-PDCCH-Config is used to specify the RNTIs and indexes for PUCCH and PUSCH power control according to TS 36.212 [22]. The power control function can either be setup or released with the IE.
TPC-PDCCH-Config information element
-- ASN1START

TPC-PDCCH-Config::=					CHOICE {
	release								NULL,
	setup								SEQUENCE {
		tpc-RNTI							BIT STRING (SIZE (16)),
		tpc-Index							TPC-Index
	}
}

TPC-Index ::=							CHOICE {
	indexOfFormat3							INTEGER (1..15),
	indexOfFormat3A							INTEGER (1..31)
}

-- ASN1STOP

TPC-PDCCH-Config field descriptions
tpc-RNTI
RNTI for power control using DCI format 3/3A, see TS 36.212 [22].
tpc-Index
Index of N or M, see TS 36.212 [22, 5.3.3.1.6 and 5.3.3.1.7], where N or M is dependent on the used DCI format (i.e. format 3 or 3a).
indexOfFormat3
Index of N when DCI format 3 is used. See TS 36.212 [22, 5.3.3.1.6].
IndexOfFormat3A
Index of M when DCI format 3A is used. See TS 36.212 [22, 5.3.3.1.7].

	UplinkPowerControl
The IE UplinkPowerControlCommon and IE UplinkPowerControlDedicated are used to specify parameters for uplink power control in the system information and in the dedicated signalling, respectively.
UplinkPowerControl information elements
-- ASN1START

UplinkPowerControlCommon ::=		SEQUENCE {
	p0-NominalPUSCH						INTEGER (-126..24),
	alpha								ENUMERATED {al0, al04, al05, al06, al07, al08, al09, al1},
	p0-NominalPUCCH						INTEGER (-127..-96),
	deltaFList-PUCCH					DeltaFList-PUCCH,
	deltaPreambleMsg3					INTEGER (-1..6)
}

UplinkPowerControlDedicated ::=		SEQUENCE {
	p0-UE-PUSCH							INTEGER (-8..7),
	deltaMCS-Enabled					ENUMERATED {en0, en1},
	accumulationEnabled					BOOLEAN,
	p0-UE-PUCCH							INTEGER (-8..7),
	pSRS-Offset							INTEGER (0..15),
	filterCoefficient					FilterCoefficient					DEFAULT fc4
}

DeltaFList-PUCCH ::=				SEQUENCE {
	deltaF-PUCCH-Format1				ENUMERATED {deltaF-2, deltaF0, deltaF2},
	deltaF-PUCCH-Format1b				ENUMERATED {deltaF1, deltaF3, deltaF5},
	deltaF-PUCCH-Format2				ENUMERATED {deltaF-2, deltaF0, deltaF1, deltaF2},
	deltaF-PUCCH-Format2a				ENUMERATED {deltaF-2, deltaF0, deltaF2},
	deltaF-PUCCH-Format2b				ENUMERATED {deltaF-2, deltaF0, deltaF2}
}

-- ASN1STOP

UplinkPowerControl field descriptions
p0-NominalPUSCH
Parameter:  See TS 36.213, 5.1.1.1, unit dBm. This field is applicable for non-persistent scheduling, only.
alpha
Parameter: ? See TS 36.213, 5.1.1.1 where al0 corresponds to 0, al04 corresponds to value 0.4, al05 to 0.5, al06 to 0.6, al07 to 0.7, al08 to 0.8, al09 to 0.9 and al1 corresponds to 1.
p0-NominalPUCCH
Parameter:  See TS 36.213, 5.1.2.1, unit dBm.
deltaF-PUCCH-FormatX
Parameter:  for the PUCCH formats 1, 1b, 2, 2a and 2b. See TS 36.213 [23, 5.1.2] where
deltaF-2 corresponds to -2 dB, deltaF0 corresponds to 0 dB and so on.
p0-UE-PUSCH
Parameter:  See TS 36.213 [23, 5.1.1.1], unit dB. This field is applicable for non-persistent scheduling, only.
deltaPreambleMsg3
Parameter:  see TS 36.213 [23, 5.1.1.1]. Actual value = IE value * 2 [dB].
deltaMCS-Enabled
Parameter: Ks See TS 36.213 [23, 5.1.1.1]. en0 corresponds to value 0 corresponding to state disabled. en1 corresponds to value 1.25 corresponding to enabled.
accumulationEnabled
Parameter: Accumulation-enabled, see TS 36.213 [23, 5.1.1.1]. TRUE corresponds to enabled whereas FALSE corresponds to disabled.
p0-UE-PUCCH
Parameter:  See TS 36.213 [23, 5.1.2.1]. Unit dB
pSRS-Offset
Parameter: PSRS_OFFSET See TS 36.213 [23, 5.1.3.1]. For Ks=1.25, the actual parameter value is pSRS-Offset value  3. For Ks=0, the actual parameter value is -10.5 + 1.5*pSRS-Offset value.
filterCoefficient
Specifies the filtering coefficient for RSRP measurements used to calculate path loss, as specified in TS 36.213 [23, 5.1.1.1]. The same filtering mechanism applies as for quantityConfig described in 5.5.3.2.

6.3.3	Security control information elements
	NextHopChainingCount
The IE NextHopChainingCount is used to update the KeNB key and corresponds to parameter NCC: See TS 33.401 [32, 7.2.8.4].
NextHopChainingCount information element
-- ASN1START

NextHopChainingCount ::=					INTEGER (0..7)

-- ASN1STOP

	SecurityAlgorithmConfig
The IE SecurityAlgorithmConfig is used to configure AS integrity protection algorithm (SRBs) and AS ciphering algorithm (SRBs and DRBs).
SecurityAlgorithmConfig information element
-- ASN1START

SecurityAlgorithmConfig ::=			SEQUENCE {
	cipheringAlgorithm					ENUMERATED {
											eea0, eea1, eea2, spare5, spare4, spare3,
											spare2, spare1, ...},
	integrityProtAlgorithm				ENUMERATED {
											reserved, eia1, eia2, spare5, spare4, spare3,
											spare2, spare1, ...}
}

-- ASN1STOP

SecurityAlgorithmConfig field descriptions
integrityProtAlgorithm
Indicates the integrity protection algorithm to be used for SRBs, as specified in TS 33.401 [32, 5.1.4.2]. The value reserved is handled as a spare value in Rel-8.
cipheringAlgorithm
Indicates the ciphering algorithm to be used for SRBs and DRBs, as specified in TS 33.401 [32, 5.1.3.2].

	ShortMAC-I
The IE ShortMAC-I is used to identify and verify the UE at RRC connection re-establishment. The 16 least significant bits of the MAC-I calculated using the security configuration of the source cell, as specified in 5.3.7.4.
ShortMAC-I information element
-- ASN1START

ShortMAC-I ::=						BIT STRING (SIZE (16))

-- ASN1STOP

6.3.4	Mobility control information elements
	AdditionalSpectrumEmission
The UE requirements related to IE AdditionalSpectrumEmission are defined in TS 36.101 [42, table 6.2.4-1].
AdditionalSpectrumEmission information element
-- ASN1START

AdditionalSpectrumEmission ::=		INTEGER (1..32)

-- ASN1STOP

	ARFCN-ValueCDMA2000
The IE ARFCN-ValueCDMA2000 used to indicate the CDMA2000 carrier frequency within a CDMA2000 band, see C.S0002-A [12].
ARFCN-ValueCDMA2000 information element
-- ASN1START

ARFCN-ValueCDMA2000 ::=			INTEGER (0..2047)

-- ASN1STOP

	ARFCN-ValueEUTRA
The IE ARFCN-ValueEUTRA is used to indicate the ARFCN applicable for a downlink, uplink or bi-directional (TDD) E-UTRA carrier frequency, as defined in TS 36.101 [42].
ARFCN-ValueEUTRA information element
-- ASN1START

ARFCN-ValueEUTRA ::=				INTEGER (0..maxEARFCN)

-- ASN1STOP

	ARFCN-ValueGERAN
The IE ARFCN-ValueGERAN is used to specify the ARFCN value applicable for a GERAN BCCH carrier frequency, see TS 45.005 [20].
ARFCN-ValueGERAN information element
-- ASN1START

ARFCN-ValueGERAN ::=			INTEGER (0..1023)

-- ASN1STOP

	ARFCN-ValueUTRA
The IE ARFCN-ValueUTRA is used to indicate the ARFCN applicable for a downlink (Nd, FDD) or bi-directional (Nt, TDD) UTRA carrier frequency, as defined in TS 25.331 [19].
ARFCN-ValueUTRA information element
-- ASN1START

ARFCN-ValueUTRA ::=					INTEGER (0..16383)

-- ASN1STOP

	BandclassCDMA2000
The IE BandclassCDMA2000 is used to define the CDMA2000 band in which the CDMA2000 carrier frequency can be found, as defined in C.S0057-B [24, table 1.5-1].
BandclassCDMA2000 information element
-- ASN1START

BandclassCDMA2000 ::=					ENUMERATED {
											bc0, bc1, bc2, bc3, bc4, bc5, bc6, bc7, bc8,
											bc9, bc10, bc11, bc12, bc13, bc14, bc15, bc16,
											bc17, spare14, spare13, spare12, spare11, spare10,
											spare9, spare8, spare7, spare6, spare5, spare4,
											spare3, spare2, spare1, ...}

-- ASN1STOP

	BandIndicatorGERAN
The IE BandIndicatorGERAN indicates how to interpret an associated GERAN carrier ARFCN, see TS 45.005 [20]. More specifically, the IE indicates the GERAN frequency band in case the ARFCN value can concern either a DCS 1800 or a PCS 1900 carrier frequency. For ARFCN values not associated with one of these bands, the indicator has no meaning.
BandIndicatorGERAN information element
-- ASN1START

BandIndicatorGERAN ::=			ENUMERATED {dcs1800, pcs1900}

-- ASN1STOP

	CarrierFreqCDMA2000
The IE CarrierFreqCDMA2000 used to provide the CDMA2000 carrier information.
CarrierFreqCDMA2000 information element
-- ASN1START

CarrierFreqCDMA2000 ::=			SEQUENCE {
	bandClass							BandclassCDMA2000,
	arfcn							ARFCN-ValueCDMA2000
}

-- ASN1STOP

	CarrierFreqGERAN
The IE CarrierFreqGERAN is used to provide an unambiguous carrier frequency description of a GERAN cell.
CarrierFreqGERAN information element
-- ASN1START

CarrierFreqGERAN ::=			SEQUENCE {
	arfcn							ARFCN-ValueGERAN,
	bandIndicator					BandIndicatorGERAN
}

-- ASN1STOP

CarrierFreqGERAN field descriptions
arfcn
GERAN ARFCN of BCCH carrier.
bandIndicator
Indicates how to interpret the ARFCN of the BCCH carrier.

	CarrierFreqsGERAN
The IE CarrierFreqListGERAN is used to provide one or more GERAN ARFCN values, as defined in TS 44.005 [43], which represents a list of GERAN BCCH carrier frequencies.
CarrierFreqsGERAN information element
-- ASN1START

CarrierFreqsGERAN ::=			SEQUENCE {
	startingARFCN						ARFCN-ValueGERAN,
	bandIndicator						BandIndicatorGERAN,
	followingARFCNs						CHOICE {
		explicitListOfARFCNs				ExplicitListOfARFCNs,
		equallySpacedARFCNs					SEQUENCE {
			arfcn-Spacing						INTEGER (1..8),
			numberOfFollowingARFCNs				INTEGER (0..31)
		},
		variableBitMapOfARFCNs				OCTET STRING (SIZE (1..16))
	}
}

ExplicitListOfARFCNs ::=			SEQUENCE (SIZE (0..31)) OF ARFCN-ValueGERAN

-- ASN1STOP

CarrierFreqsGERAN field descriptions
startingARFCN
The first ARFCN value, s, in the set.
bandIndicator
Indicates how to interpret the ARFCN of the BCCH carrier.
followingARFCNs
Field containing a representation of the remaining ARFCN values in the set.
explicitListOfARFCNs
The remaining ARFCN values in the set are explicitly listed one by one.
arfcn-Spacing
Space, d, between a set of equally spaced ARFCN values.
numberOfFollowingARFCNs
The number, n, of the remaining equally spaced ARFCN values in the set. The complete set of (n+1) ARFCN values is defined as: {s, ((s + d) mod 1024), ((s + 2*d) mod 1024) ... ((s + n*d) mod 1024)}.
variableBitMapOfARFCNs
Bitmap field representing the remaining ARFCN values in the set. The leading bit of the first octet in the bitmap corresponds to the ARFCN = ((s + 1) mod 1024), the next bit to the ARFCN = ((s + 2) mod 1024), and so on. If the bitmap consist of N octets, the trailing bit of octet N corresponds to ARFCN = ((s + 8*N) mod 1024). The complete set of ARFCN values consists of ARFCN = s and the ARFCN values, where the corresponding bit in the bitmap is set to "1".

	CDMA2000-Type
The IE CDMA2000-Type is used to describe the type of CDMA2000 network.
CDMA2000-Type information element
-- ASN1START

CDMA2000-Type ::=					ENUMERATED {type1XRTT, typeHRPD}

-- ASN1STOP

	CellIdentity
The IE CellIdentity is used to unambiguously identify a cell within a PLMN.
CellIdentity information element
-- ASN1START

CellIdentity ::=					BIT STRING (SIZE (28))

-- ASN1STOP

	CellIndexList
The IE CellIndexList concerns a list of cell indices, which may be used for different purposes.
CellIndexList information element
-- ASN1START

CellIndexList ::=						SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxCellMeas)) OF CellIndex

CellIndex ::=							INTEGER (1..maxCellMeas)

-- ASN1STOP

	CellReselectionPriority
The IE CellReselectionPriority concerns the absolute priority of the concerned carrier frequency/ set of frequencies (GERAN), as used by the cell reselection procedure. Corresponds with parameter priority in TS 36.304 [4]. Value 0 means: lowest priority. The UE behaviour for the case the field is absent, if applicable, is specified in TS 36.304 [4].
CellReselectionPriority information element
-- ASN1START

CellReselectionPriority ::=				INTEGER (0..7)

-- ASN1STOP

	CSFB-RegistrationParam1XRTT
The IE CSFB-RegistrationParam1XRTT is used to indicate whether or not the UE shall perform an CDMA2000 1xRTT pre-registration if the UE does not have a valid / current pre-registration.
-- ASN1START

CSFB-RegistrationParam1XRTT ::=		SEQUENCE {
	sid									BIT STRING (SIZE (15)),
	nid									BIT STRING (SIZE (16)),
	multipleSID							BOOLEAN,
	multipleNID							BOOLEAN,
	homeReg								BOOLEAN,
	foreignSIDReg						BOOLEAN,
	foreignNIDReg						BOOLEAN,
	parameterReg						BOOLEAN,
	powerUpReg							BOOLEAN,
	registrationPeriod					BIT STRING (SIZE (7)),
	registrationZone					BIT STRING (SIZE (12)),
	totalZone							BIT STRING (SIZE (3)),
	zoneTimer							BIT STRING (SIZE (3))
}

-- ASN1STOP


CSFB-RegistrationParam1XRTT field descriptions
sid
Used along with the oneXRTT-NetworkID as a pair to control when the UE should Re-Register with the CDMA2000 1xRTT network.
nid
Used along with the oneXRTT-SystemID as a pair to control when the UE should Re-Register with the CDMA2000 1xRTT network.
multipleSID
The CDMA2000 1xRTT Multiple SID storage indicator.
multipleNID
The CDMA2000 1xRTT Multiple NID storage indicator.
homeReg
The CDMA2000 1xRTT Home registration indicator.
foreignSIDReg
The CDMA2000 1xRTT SID roamer registration indicator.
foreignNIDReg
The CDMA2000 1xRTT NID roamer registration indicator.
parameterReg
The CDMA2000 1xRTT Parameter-change registration indicator.
powerUpReg
The CDMA2000 1xRTT Power-up registration indicator.
registrationPeriod
The CDMA2000 1xRTT Registration period.
registrationZone
The CDMA2000 1xRTT Registration zone.
totalZone
The CDMA2000 1xRTT Number of registration zones to be retained.
zoneTimer
The CDMA2000 1xRTT Zone timer length.

	CellGlobalIdEUTRA
The IE CellGlobalIdEUTRA specifies the Evolved Cell Global Identifier (ECGI), the globally unique identity of a cell in E-UTRA.
CellGlobalIdEUTRA information element
-- ASN1START

CellGlobalIdEUTRA ::=					SEQUENCE {
	plmn-Identity							PLMN-Identity,
	cellIdentity							CellIdentity
}

-- ASN1STOP

CellGlobalIdEUTRA field descriptions
plmn-Identity
Identifies the PLMN of the cell as given by the first PLMN entry in the plmn-IdentityList in SystemInformationBlockType1.
cellIdentity
Identity of the cell within the context of the PLMN.

	CellGlobalIdUTRA
The IE CellGlobalIdUTRA specifies the global UTRAN Cell Identifier, the globally unique identity of a cell in UTRA.
CellGlobalIdUTRA information element
-- ASN1START

CellGlobalIdUTRA ::=					SEQUENCE {
	plmn-Identity							PLMN-Identity,
	cellIdentity							BIT STRING (SIZE (28))
}

-- ASN1STOP

CellGlobalIdUTRA field descriptions
plmn-Identity
Identifies the PLMN of the cell as given by the common PLMN broadcast in the MIB.
cellIdentity
UTRA Cell Identifier which is unique within the context of the identified PLMN as defined in TS 25.331 [19].

	CellGlobalIdGERAN
The IE CellGlobalIdGERAN specifies the Cell Global Identification (CGI), the globally unique identity of a cell in GERAN.
CellGlobalIdGERAN information element
-- ASN1START

CellGlobalIdGERAN ::=					SEQUENCE {
	plmn-Identity							PLMN-Identity,
	locationAreaCode						BIT STRING (SIZE (16)),
	cellIdentity						BIT STRING (SIZE (16))
}

-- ASN1STOP

CellGlobalIdGERAN field descriptions
plmn-Identity
Identifies the PLMN of the cell.
locationAreaCode
A fixed length code identifying the location area within a PLMN as defined in TS 23.003 [27].
cellIdentity
Cell Identifier which is unique within the context of the GERAN location area as defined in TS 23.003 [27].

	CellGlobalIdCDMA2000
The IE CellGlobalIdCDMA2000 specifies the Cell Global Identification (CGI), the globally unique identity of a cell in CDMA2000.
CellGlobalIdCDMA2000 information element
-- ASN1START

CellGlobalIdCDMA2000 ::=				CHOICE {
	cellGlobalId1XRTT						BIT STRING (SIZE (47)),
	cellGlobalIdHRPD						BIT STRING (SIZE (128))
}

-- ASN1STOP

CellGlobalIdCDMA2000 field descriptions
cellGlobalId1XRTT
Unique identifier for a CDMA2000 1xRTT cell, corresponds to BASEID, SID and NID parameters (in that order) defined in C.S0005-A [25].
cellGlobalIdHRPD
Unique identifier for a CDMA2000 HRPD cell, corresponds to SECTOR ID parameter defined in C.S0024-A [26, 14.9].

	MobilityControlInfo
The IE MobilityControlInfo includes parameters relevant for network controlled mobility to/within EUTRA.
MobilityControlInfo information element
-- ASN1START

MobilityControlInfo ::=		SEQUENCE {
	targetPhysCellId					PhysCellId,
	carrierFreq							CarrierFreqEUTRA					OPTIONAL,	-- Cond HO-toEUTRA
	carrierBandwidth					CarrierBandwidthEUTRA				OPTIONAL,	-- Cond HO-toEUTRA
	additionalSpectrumEmission			AdditionalSpectrumEmission			OPTIONAL,	-- Cond HO-toEUTRA
	t304								ENUMERATED {
											ms50, ms100, ms150, ms200, ms500, ms1000,
											ms2000, spare1},
	newUE-Identity						C-RNTI,
	radioResourceConfigCommon			RadioResourceConfigCommon,
	rach-ConfigDedicated				RACH-ConfigDedicated				OPTIONAL,	-- Need OP
	...
}

CarrierBandwidthEUTRA ::=			SEQUENCE {
	dl-Bandwidth						ENUMERATED {
												n6, n15, n25, n50, n75, n100, spare10,
												spare9, spare8, spare7, spare6, spare5,
												spare4, spare3, spare2, spare1},
	ul-Bandwidth						ENUMERATED {
												n6, n15, n25, n50, n75, n100, spare10,
												spare9, spare8, spare7, spare6, spare5,
												spare4, spare3, spare2, spare1}	OPTIONAL -- Need OP
}

CarrierFreqEUTRA ::=				SEQUENCE {
	dl-CarrierFreq						ARFCN-ValueEUTRA,
	ul-CarrierFreq						ARFCN-ValueEUTRA				OPTIONAL	-- Cond FDD
}

-- ASN1STOP

MobilityControlInfo field descriptions
t304
Timer T304 as described in section 7.3. ms50 corresponds with 50 ms, ms100 corresponds with 100 ms and so on.
dl-Bandwidth
Parameter: Downlink bandwidth, see TS 36.101 [42].
ul-Bandwidth
Parameter: Uplink bandwidth, see TS 36.101 [42, table 5.6-1]. For TDD, the parameter is absent and it is equal to downlink bandwidth. If absent for FDD, apply the same value as applies for the downlink bandwidth.
rach-ConfigDedicated
The dedicated random access parameters. If absent the UE applies contention based random access as specified in TS 36.321 [6].
carrierBandwidth
Provides the parameters Downlink bandwidth, and Uplink bandwidth, see TS 36.101 [42].

Conditional presence
Explanation
FDD
The field is mandatory with default value (the default duplex distance defined for the concerned band, as specified in TS 36.101 [42]) in case of FDD; otherwise the field is not present.
HO-toEUTRA
The field is mandatory present in case of inter-RAT handover to E-UTRA; otherwise the field is optionally present, need ON.

	MobilityParametersCDMA2000 (1xRTT)
The MobilityParametersCDMA2000 contains the parameters provided to the UE for handover and CSFB support,as. defined in C.S0087 [44].
MobilityParametersCDMA2000 information element
-- ASN1START

MobilityParametersCDMA2000 ::=			OCTET STRING

-- ASN1STOP

	MobilityStateParameters
The IE MobilityStateParameters contains parameters to determine UE mobility state.
MobilityStateParameters information element
-- ASN1START

MobilityStateParameters ::=			SEQUENCE {
	t-Evaluation						ENUMERATED {
											s30, s60, s120, s180, s240, spare3, spare2, spare1},
	t-HystNormal						ENUMERATED {
											s30, s60, s120, s180, s240, spare3, spare2, spare1},
	n-CellChangeMedium					INTEGER (1..16),
	n-CellChangeHigh					INTEGER (1..16)
}

-- ASN1STOP

MobilityStateParameters field descriptions
t-Evaluation
The duration for evaluating criteria to enter mobility states. Corresponds to TCRmax in TS 36.304 [4]. Value in seconds, s30 corresponds to 30 s and so on.
t-HystNormal
The additional duration for evaluating criteria to enter normal mobility state. Corresponds to TCRmaxHyst in TS 36.304 [4]. Value in seconds, s30 corresponds to 30 s and so on.
n-CellChangeMedium
The number of cell changes to enter medium mobility state. Corresponds to NCR_M in TS 36.304 [4].
n-CellChangeHigh
The number of cell changes to enter high mobility state. Corresponds to NCR_H in TS 36.304 [4].

	PhysCellId
The IE PhyslCellId is used to indicate the physical layer identity of the cell, as defined in TS 36.211 [21].
PhysCellId information element
-- ASN1START

PhysCellId ::=						INTEGER (0..503)

-- ASN1STOP

	PhysCellIdRange
The IE PhysCellIdRange is used to encode either a single or a range of physical cell identities. The range is encoded by using a start value and by indicating the number of consecutive physical cell identities (including start) in the range.
PhysCellIdRange information element
-- ASN1START

PhysCellIdRange ::=				SEQUENCE {
	start							PhysCellId,
	range							ENUMERATED {
										n4, n8, n12, n16, n24, n32, n48, n64, n84,
										n96, n128, n168, n252, n504, spare2,
										spare1} 					OPTIONAL	-- Need OP
}

-- ASN1STOP

PhysCellIdRange field descriptions
start
Indicates the lowest physical cell identity in the range.
range
Indicates the number of physical cell identities in the range (including start). Value n4 corresponds with 4, n8 corresponds with 8 and so on. The UE shall apply value 1 in case the field is absent, in which case only the physical cell identity value indicated by start applies.

	PhysCellIdCDMA2000
The IE PhysCellIdCDMA2000 identifies the PNOffset that represents the "Physical cell identity" in CDMA2000.
PhysCellIdCDMA2000 information element
-- ASN1START

PhysCellIdCDMA2000 ::=			INTEGER (0..maxPNOffset)

-- ASN1STOP

	PhysCellIdGERAN
The IE PhysCellIdGERAN contains the Base Station Identity Code (BSIC).
PhysCellIdGERAN information element
-- ASN1START

PhysCellIdGERAN ::=				SEQUENCE {
	networkColourCode					BIT STRING (SIZE (3)),
	baseStationColourCode				BIT STRING (SIZE (3))
}

-- ASN1STOP

PhysCellIdGERAN field descriptions
networkColourCode
Network Colour Code as defined in TS 23.003 [27].
baseStationColourCode
Base station Colour Code as defined in TS 23.003 [27].

	PhysCellIdentityUTRA-FDD
The IE PhysCellIdUTRA-FDD is used to indicate the physical layer identity of the cell, i.e. the primary scrambling code, as defined in TS 25.331 [19].
PhysCellIdUTRA-FDD information element
-- ASN1START

PhysCellIdUTRA-FDD ::=				INTEGER (0..511)

-- ASN1STOP

	PhysCellIdUTRA-TDD
The IE PhysCellIdUTRA-TDD is used to indicate the physical layer identity of the cell, i.e. the cell parameters ID (TDD), as specified in TS 25.331 [19]. Also corresponds to the Initial Cell Parameter Assignment in TS 25.223 [46].
PhysCellIdUTRA-TDD information element
-- ASN1START

PhysCellIdUTRA-TDD ::=				INTEGER (0..127)

-- ASN1STOP

	PLMN-Identity
The IE PLMN-Identity identifies a Public Land Mobile Network. Further information regarding how to set the IE are specified in TS 23.003 [27].
PLMN-Identity information element
-- ASN1START

PLMN-Identity ::=					SEQUENCE {
	mcc									MCC					OPTIONAL,					-- Cond MCC
	mnc									MNC
}

MCC ::=								SEQUENCE (SIZE (3)) OF
											MCC-MNC-Digit

MNC ::=								SEQUENCE (SIZE (2..3)) OF
											MCC-MNC-Digit

MCC-MNC-Digit ::=					INTEGER (0..9)


-- ASN1STOP

PLMN-Identity field descriptions
mcc
The first element contains the first MCC digit, the second element the second MCC digit and so on. If the field is absent, it takes the same value as the mcc of the immediately preceding IE PLMN-Identity. See TS 23.003 [27].
mnc
The first element contains the first MNC digit, the second element the second MNC digit and so on. See TS 23.003 [27].

Conditional presence
Explanation
MCC
This IE is mandatory when PLMN-Identity is included in CellGlobalIdEUTRA, in CellGlobalIdUTRA, in CellGlobalIdGERAN or in RegisteredMME. This IE is also mandatory in the first occurrence of the IE PLMN-Identity within the IE PLMN-IdentityList. Otherwise it is optional, need OP.

	PreRegistrationInfoHRPD
-- ASN1START

PreRegistrationInfoHRPD ::=			SEQUENCE {
	preRegistrationAllowed				BOOLEAN,
	preRegistrationZoneId				PreRegistrationZoneIdHRPD	OPTIONAL, -- cond PreRegAllowed
	secondaryPreRegistrationZoneIdList	SecondaryPreRegistrationZoneIdListHRPD	OPTIONAL -- Need OR
}

SecondaryPreRegistrationZoneIdListHRPD ::=	SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..2)) OF PreRegistrationZoneIdHRPD

PreRegistrationZoneIdHRPD ::=			INTEGER (0..255)

-- ASN1STOP

PreRegistrationInfoHRPD field descriptions
preRegistrationAllowed
TRUE indicates that a UE shall perform a CDMA2000 HRPD pre-registration if the UE does not have a valid / current pre-registration. FALSE indicates that the UE is not allowed to perform CDMA2000 HRPD pre-registration in the current cell.
preRegistrationZoneID
Used to control when the UE should re-register.
secondaryPreRegistrationZoneIdList
Used to control when the UE should re-register.

Conditional presence
Explanation
PreRegAllowed
The field is mandatory in case the preRegistrationAllowed is set to true. Otherwise the field is not present and the UE shall delete any existing value for this field.

	Q-RxLevMin
The IE Q-RxLevMin is used to indicate for cell re-selection the required minimum received RSRP level in the (E-UTRA) cell. Corresponds to parameter Qrxlevmin in 36.304 [4]. Actual value Qrxlevmin = IE value * 2 [dBm].
Q-RxLevMin information element
-- ASN1START

Q-RxLevMin ::=						INTEGER (-70..-22)

-- ASN1STOP

	Q-OffsetRange
The IE Q-OffsetRange is used to indicate a cell or frequency specific offset to be applied when evaluating candidates for cell re-selection or when evaluating triggering conditions for measurement reporting. The value in dB. Value dB-24 corresponds to -24 dB, dB-22 corresponds to -22 dB and so on.
Q- OffsetRange information element
-- ASN1START

Q-OffsetRange ::=						ENUMERATED {
												dB-24, dB-22, dB-20, dB-18, dB-16, dB-14,
												dB-12, dB-10, dB-8, dB-6, dB-5, dB-4, dB-3,
												dB-2, dB-1, dB0, dB1, dB2, dB3, dB4, dB5,
												dB6, dB8, dB10, dB12, dB14, dB16, dB18,
												dB20, dB22, dB24}

-- ASN1STOP

	Q-OffsetRangeInterRAT
The IE Q-OffsetRangeInterRAT is used to indicate a frequency specific offset to be applied when evaluating triggering conditions for measurement reporting. The value in dB.
Q- OffsetRangeInterRAT information element
-- ASN1START

Q-OffsetRangeInterRAT ::=					INTEGER (-15..15)

-- ASN1STOP

	ReselectionThreshold
The IE ReselectionThreshold is used to indicate a threshold for cell reselection. Actual value of threshold in dB = IE value * 2.
ReselectionThreshold information element
-- ASN1START

ReselectionThreshold ::=				INTEGER (0..31)

-- ASN1STOP

	SpeedStateScaleFactors
The IE SpeedStateScaleFactors concerns factors, to be applied when the UE is in medium or high speed state, used for scaling a mobility control related parameter.
SpeedStateScaleFactors information element
-- ASN1START

SpeedStateScaleFactors ::=			SEQUENCE {
	sf-Medium							ENUMERATED {oDot25, oDot5, oDot75, lDot0},
	sf-High								ENUMERATED {oDot25, oDot5, oDot75, lDot0}
}
-- ASN1STOP

SpeedStateScaleFactors field descriptions
sf-Medium
The concerned mobility control related parameter is multiplied with this factor if the UE is in Medium Mobility state as defined in TS 36.304 [4]. Value oDot25 corresponds to 0.25, oDot5 corresponds to 0.5 , oDot75 corresponds to 0.75 and so on.
sf-High
The concerned mobility control related parameter is multiplied with this factor if the UE is in High Mobility state as defined in TS 36.304 [4]. Value oDot25 corresponds to 0.25, oDot5 corresponds to 0.5 , oDot75 corresponds to 0.75 and so on.

	SystemTimeInfoCDMA2000
The IE SystemTimeInfoCDMA2000 informs the UE about the absolute time in the current cell. The UE uses this absolute time knowledge to derive the CDMA2000 Physical cell identity, expressed as PNOffset, of neighbour CDMA2000 cells.
NOTE:	The UE needs the CDMA2000 system time with a certain level of accuracy for performing measurements as well as for communicating with the CDMA2000 network (HRPD or 1xRTT).
SystemTimeInfoCDMA2000 information element
-- ASN1START

SystemTimeInfoCDMA2000 ::=			SEQUENCE {
	cdma-EUTRA-Synchronisation			BOOLEAN,
	cdma-SystemTime						CHOICE {
		synchronousSystemTime				BIT STRING (SIZE (39)),
		asynchronousSystemTime				BIT STRING (SIZE (49))
	}
}

-- ASN1STOP

SystemTimeInfoCDMA2000 field descriptions
cdma-EUTRA-Synchronisation
TRUE indicates that the networks are synchronised i.e. there is no drift in the timing between EUTRA and CDMA2000. FALSE indicates that the networks are not synchronised, i.e. the timing between E-UTRA and CDMA2000 can drift.
synchronousSystemTime
CDMA2000 system time corresponding to the SFN boundary at or after the ending boundary of the SI-window in which SystemInformationBlockType8 is transmitted. If synchronized to CDMA2000 system time then the size is 39 bits and the unit is 10 ms based on a 1.2288 Mcps chip rate.
asynchronousSystemTime
The CDMA2000 system time corresponding to the SFN boundary at or after the ending boundary of the SI-Window in which SystemInformationBlockType8 is transmitted. If not synchronized then the size is 49 bits and the unit is [8 CDMA2000 chips based on 1.2288 Mcps].

	TrackingAreaCode
The IE TrackingAreaCode is used to identify a tracking area within the scope of a PLMN, see TS 24.301 [35].
TrackingAreaCode information element
-- ASN1START

TrackingAreaCode ::=				BIT STRING (SIZE (16))

-- ASN1STOP

	T-Reselection
The IE T-Reselection concerns the cell reselection timer TreselectionRAT for E-UTRA, UTRA, GERAN or CDMA2000. Value in seconds.
T-Reselection information element
-- ASN1START

T-Reselection ::=					INTEGER (0..7)

-- ASN1STOP


6.3.5	Measurement information elements
	AllowedMeasBandwidth
The IE AllowedMeasBandwidth is used to indicate the maximum allowed measurement bandwidth on a carrier frequency as defined by the parameter Transmission Bandwidth Configuration "NRB" TS 36.104 [47]. The values mbw6, mbw15, mbw25, mbw50, mbw75, mbw100 indicate 6, 15, 25, 50, 75 and 100 resource blocks respectively.
AllowedMeasBandwidth information element
-- ASN1START

AllowedMeasBandwidth ::=				ENUMERATED {mbw6, mbw15, mbw25, mbw50, mbw75, mbw100}

-- ASN1STOP

	Hysteresis
The IE Hysteresis is a parameter used within the entry and leave condition of an event triggered reporting condition. The actual value is IE value * 0.5 dB.
Hysteresis information element
-- ASN1START

Hysteresis ::=							INTEGER (0..30)

-- ASN1STOP

	MeasConfig
The IE MeasConfig specifies measurements to be performed by the UE, and covers intra-frequency, inter-frequency and inter-RAT mobility as well as configuration of measurement gaps.
MeasConfig information element
-- ASN1START

MeasConfig ::=						SEQUENCE {
	-- Measurement objects
	measObjectToRemoveList				MeasObjectToRemoveList				OPTIONAL,	-- Need ON
	measObjectToAddModList				MeasObjectToAddModList				OPTIONAL,	-- Need ON
	-- Reporting configurations
	reportConfigToRemoveList			ReportConfigToRemoveList			OPTIONAL,	-- Need ON
	reportConfigToAddModList			ReportConfigToAddModList			OPTIONAL,	-- Need ON
	-- Measurement identities
	measIdToRemoveList					MeasIdToRemoveList					OPTIONAL,	-- Need ON
	measIdToAddModList					MeasIdToAddModList					OPTIONAL,	-- Need ON
	-- Other parameters
	quantityConfig						QuantityConfig						OPTIONAL,	-- Need ON
	measGapConfig						MeasGapConfig						OPTIONAL,	-- Need ON
	s-Measure							RSRP-Range							OPTIONAL,	-- Need ON
	preRegistrationInfoHRPD				PreRegistrationInfoHRPD				OPTIONAL, 	-- Need OP
	speedStatePars			CHOICE {
		release								NULL,
		setup								SEQUENCE {
			mobilityStateParameters				MobilityStateParameters,
			timeToTrigger-SF					SpeedStateScaleFactors
		}
	}																		OPTIONAL,	-- Need ON
	...
}

MeasIdToRemoveList ::=				SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxMeasId)) OF MeasId

MeasObjectToRemoveList ::=			SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxObjectId)) OF MeasObjectId

ReportConfigToRemoveList ::=		SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxReportConfigId)) OF ReportConfigId

-- ASN1STOP

MeasConfig field descriptions
measObjectToRemoveList
List of measurement objects to remove.
measObjectId
Used to identify a measurement object configuration.
measObject
Specifies measurement object configurations for EUTRA, UTRA, GERAN, or CDMA2000 measurements.
reportConfigToRemoveList
List of measurement reporting configurations to remove.
reportConfigId
Used to identify a measurement reporting configuration.
reportConfig
Specifies measurement reporting configurations for EUTRA, UTRA, GERAN, or CDMA2000 measurements.
measIdToRemoveList
List of measurement identities to remove.
measGapConfig
Used to setup and release measurement gaps.
s-Measure
Serving cell quality threshold controlling whether or not the UE is required to perform measurements of intra-frequency, inter-frequency and inter-RAT neighbouring cells. Value 0 indicates to disable s-Measure.
PreRegistrationInfoHRPD
The CDMA2000 HRPD Pre-Registration Information tells the UE if it should pre-register with the CDMA2000 HRPD network and identifies the Pre-registration zone to the UE.
timeToTrigger-SF
The timeToTrigger in ReportConfigEUTRA and in ReportConfigInterRAT are multiplied with the scaling factor applicable for the UEs speed state.

	MeasGapConfig
The IE MeasGapConfig specifies the measurement gap configuration and controls setup/ release of measurement gaps.
MeasGapConfig information element
-- ASN1START

MeasGapConfig ::=					CHOICE {
	release								NULL,
	setup								SEQUENCE {
		gapOffset							CHOICE {
				gp0									INTEGER (0..39),
				gp1									INTEGER (0..79),
				...
		}
	}
}

-- ASN1STOP

MeasGapConfig field descriptions
gapOffset
Value gapOffset of gp0 corresponds to gap offset of Gap Pattern Id 0 with MGRP = 40ms, gapOffset of gp1 corresponds to gap offset of Gap Pattern Id 1 with MGRP = 80ms. Also used to specify the measurement gap pattern to be applied, as defined in TS 36.133 [16].

	MeasId
The IE MeasId is used to identify a measurement configuration, i.e., linking of a measurement object and a reporting configuration.
MeasId information element
-- ASN1START

MeasId ::=							INTEGER (1..maxMeasId)

-- ASN1STOP

	MeasIdToAddModList
The IE MeasIdToAddModList concerns a list of measurement identities to add or modify, with for each entry the measId, the associated measObjectId and the associated reportConfigId.
MeasIdToAddModList information element
-- ASN1START

MeasIdToAddModList ::=				SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxMeasId)) OF MeasIdToAddMod

MeasIdToAddMod ::=	SEQUENCE {
	measId								MeasId,
	measObjectId						MeasObjectId,
	reportConfigId						ReportConfigId
}

-- ASN1STOP

	MeasObjectCDMA2000
The IE MeasObjectCDMA2000 specifies information applicable for inter-RAT CDMA2000 neighbouring cells.
MeasObjectCDMA2000 information element
-- ASN1START

MeasObjectCDMA2000 ::=				SEQUENCE {
	cdma2000-Type						CDMA2000-Type,
	carrierFreq							CarrierFreqCDMA2000,
	searchWindowSize					INTEGER (0..15)						OPTIONAL,	-- Need ON
	offsetFreq							Q-OffsetRangeInterRAT				DEFAULT 0,
	cellsToRemoveList					CellIndexList						OPTIONAL,	-- Need ON
	cellsToAddModList					CellsToAddModListCDMA2000			OPTIONAL,	-- Need ON
	cellForWhichToReportCGI				PhysCellIdCDMA2000					OPTIONAL,	-- Need ON
	...
}

CellsToAddModListCDMA2000 ::=		SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxCellMeas)) OF CellsToAddModCDMA2000

CellsToAddModCDMA2000 ::=	SEQUENCE {
	cellIndex							INTEGER (1..maxCellMeas),
	physCellId							PhysCellIdCDMA2000
}

-- ASN1STOP

MeasObjectCDMA2000 field descriptions
cdma2000-Type
The type of CDMA2000 network: CDMA2000 1xRTT or CDMA2000 HRPD.
carrierInfo
Identifies CDMA2000 carrier frequency for which this configuration is valid.
searchWindowSize
Provides the search window size to be used by the UE for the neighbouring pilot, see C.S0005-A [25].
cellsToRemoveList
List of cells to remove from the neighbouring cell list.
cellsToAddModList
List of cells to add/ modify in the neighbouring cell list.
cellIndex
Entry index in the neighbouring cell list.
physCellId
CDMA2000 Physical cell identity of a cell in neighbouring cell list expressed as PNOffset.

	MeasObjectEUTRA
The IE MeasObjectEUTRA specifies information applicable for intra-frequency or inter-frequency EUTRA neighbouring cells.
MeasObjectEUTRA information element
-- ASN1START

MeasObjectEUTRA ::=					SEQUENCE {
	carrierFreq							ARFCN-ValueEUTRA,
	allowedMeasBandwidth				AllowedMeasBandwidth,
	presenceAntennaPort1				PresenceAntennaPort1,
	neighCellConfig						NeighCellConfig,
	offsetFreq							Q-OffsetRange				DEFAULT dB0,
	-- Neighbour cell list
	cellsToRemoveList					CellIndexList				OPTIONAL,		-- Need ON
	cellsToAddModList					CellsToAddModList			OPTIONAL,		-- Need ON
	-- Black list
	blackCellsToRemoveList				CellIndexList				OPTIONAL,		-- Need ON
	blackCellsToAddModList				BlackCellsToAddModList		OPTIONAL,		-- Need ON
	cellForWhichToReportCGI				PhysCellId					OPTIONAL, 		-- Need ON
	...
}

CellsToAddModList ::=				SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxCellMeas)) OF CellsToAddMod

CellsToAddMod ::=	SEQUENCE {
	cellIndex							INTEGER (1..maxCellMeas),
	physCellId							PhysCellId,
	cellIndividualOffset				Q-OffsetRange
}

BlackCellsToAddModList ::=			SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxCellMeas)) OF BlackCellsToAddMod

BlackCellsToAddMod ::=	SEQUENCE {
	cellIndex							INTEGER (1..maxCellMeas),
	physCellIdRange						PhysCellIdRange
}

-- ASN1STOP

MeasObjectEUTRA field descriptions
carrierFreq
Identifies EUTRA carrier frequency for which this configuration is valid.
offsetFreq
Offset value applicable to the carrier frequency. Value dB-24 corresponds to -24 dB, dB-22 corresponds to -22 dB and so on.
cellsToRemoveList
List of cells to remove from the neighbouring cell list.
cellsToAddModList
List of cells to add/ modify in the neighbouring cell list.
cellIndex
Entry index in the neighbouring cell list. An entry may concern a range of cells, in which case this value applies to the entire range.
physCellId
Physical cell identity of a cell in neighbouring cell list.
cellIndividualOffset
Cell individual offset applicable to a specific neighbouring cell. Value dB-24 corresponds to -24 dB, dB-22 corresponds to -22 dB and so on.
blackCellsToRemoveList
List of cells to remove from the black list of cells.
blackCellsToAddMoList
List of cells to add/ modify in the black list of cells.
physCellIdRange
Physical cell identity or a range of physical cell identities of cells in the black list.

	MeasObjectGERAN
The IE MeasObjectGERAN specifies information applicable for inter-RAT GERAN neighbouring frequencies.
MeasObjectGERAN information element
-- ASN1START

MeasObjectGERAN ::=					SEQUENCE {
	carrierFreqs						CarrierFreqsGERAN,
	offsetFreq							Q-OffsetRangeInterRAT		DEFAULT 0,
	ncc-Permitted						BIT STRING(SIZE (8))		DEFAULT '11111111'B,
	cellForWhichToReportCGI				PhysCellIdGERAN				OPTIONAL, 	-- Need ON
	...
}

-- ASN1STOP

MeasObjectGERAN field descriptions
ncc-Permitted
Field encoded as a bit map, where bit N is set to "0" if a BCCH carrier with NCC = N-1 is not permitted for monitoring and set to "1" if a BCCH carrier with NCC = N-1 is permitted for monitoring; N = 1 to 8; bit 1 of the bitmap is the leading bit of the bit string.

	MeasObjectId
The IE MeasObjectId used to identify a measurement object configuration.
MeasObjectId information element
-- ASN1START

MeasObjectId ::=					INTEGER (1..maxObjectId)

-- ASN1STOP

	MeasObjectToAddModList
The IE MeasObjectToAddModList concerns a list of measurement objects to add or modify
MeasObjectToAddModList information element
-- ASN1START

MeasObjectToAddModList ::=			SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxObjectId)) OF MeasObjectToAddMod

MeasObjectToAddMod ::=	SEQUENCE {
	measObjectId						MeasObjectId,
	measObject							CHOICE {
		measObjectEUTRA						MeasObjectEUTRA,
		measObjectUTRA						MeasObjectUTRA,
		measObjectGERAN						MeasObjectGERAN,
		measObjectCDMA2000					MeasObjectCDMA2000,
		...
	}
}

-- ASN1STOP

	MeasObjectUTRA
The IE MeasObjectUTRA specifies information applicable for inter-RAT UTRA neighbouring cells.
MeasObjectUTRA information element
-- ASN1START

MeasObjectUTRA ::=					SEQUENCE {
	carrierFreq							ARFCN-ValueUTRA,
	offsetFreq							Q-OffsetRangeInterRAT		DEFAULT 0,
	cellsToRemoveList					CellIndexList				OPTIONAL,			-- Need ON
	cellsToAddModList					CHOICE {
		cellsToAddModListUTRA-FDD			CellsToAddModListUTRA-FDD,
		cellsToAddModListUTRA-TDD			CellsToAddModListUTRA-TDD
	}																OPTIONAL,			-- Need ON
	cellForWhichToReportCGI				CHOICE {
		utra-FDD							PhysCellIdUTRA-FDD,
		utra-TDD							PhysCellIdUTRA-TDD
	}																OPTIONAL, 	-- Need ON
	...
}

CellsToAddModListUTRA-FDD ::=		SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxCellMeas)) OF CellsToAddModUTRA-FDD 

CellsToAddModUTRA-FDD ::=	SEQUENCE {
	cellIndex							INTEGER (1..maxCellMeas),
	physCellId							PhysCellIdUTRA-FDD
}

CellsToAddModListUTRA-TDD ::=		SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxCellMeas)) OF CellsToAddModUTRA-TDD 

CellsToAddModUTRA-TDD ::=	SEQUENCE {
	cellIndex							INTEGER (1..maxCellMeas),
	physCellId							PhysCellIdUTRA-TDD
}

-- ASN1STOP

MeasObjectUTRA field descriptions
carrierFreq
Identifies UTRA carrier frequency for which this configuration is valid.
cellsToRemoveList
List of cells to remove from the neighbouring cell list.
cellsToAddModListUTRA-FDD
List of UTRA FDD cells to add/ modify in the neighbouring cell list.
cellsToAddModListUTRA-TDD
List of UTRA TDD cells to add/modify in the neighbouring cell list.
cellIndex
Entry index in the neighbouring cell list.

	MeasResults
The IE MeasResults covers measured results for intra-frequency, inter-frequency and inter- RAT mobility.
MeasResults information element
-- ASN1START

MeasResults ::=						SEQUENCE {
	measId								MeasId,
	measResultServCell					SEQUENCE {
		rsrpResult							RSRP-Range,
		rsrqResult							RSRQ-Range
	},
	measResultNeighCells				CHOICE {
		measResultListEUTRA					MeasResultListEUTRA,
		measResultListUTRA					MeasResultListUTRA,
		measResultListGERAN					MeasResultListGERAN,
		measResultsCDMA2000					MeasResultsCDMA2000,
		...
	}																		OPTIONAL,
	...
}

MeasResultListEUTRA ::=				SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxCellReport)) OF MeasResultEUTRA 

MeasResultEUTRA ::=	SEQUENCE {
	physCellId							PhysCellId,
	cgi-Info							SEQUENCE {
		cellGlobalId						CellGlobalIdEUTRA,
		trackingAreaCode					TrackingAreaCode,
		plmn-IdentityList					PLMN-IdentityList2 				OPTIONAL
	}			 												OPTIONAL,
	measResult							SEQUENCE {
		rsrpResult							RSRP-Range						OPTIONAL,
		rsrqResult							RSRQ-Range						OPTIONAL,
		...
	}
}

MeasResultListUTRA ::=				SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxCellReport)) OF MeasResultUTRA 

MeasResultUTRA ::=	SEQUENCE {
	physCellId							CHOICE {
		fdd									PhysCellIdUTRA-FDD,
		tdd									PhysCellIdUTRA-TDD
	},
	cgi-Info							SEQUENCE {
		cellGlobalId						CellGlobalIdUTRA,
		locationAreaCode					BIT STRING (SIZE (16))			OPTIONAL,
		routingAreaCode						BIT STRING (SIZE (8))			OPTIONAL,
		plmn-IdentityList					PLMN-IdentityList2 				OPTIONAL
	}			 												OPTIONAL,
	measResult							SEQUENCE {
		utra-RSCP							INTEGER (-5..91)				OPTIONAL,
		utra-EcN0							INTEGER (0..49)					OPTIONAL,
		...
	}
}

MeasResultListGERAN ::=				SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxCellReport)) OF MeasResultGERAN 

MeasResultGERAN ::=	SEQUENCE {
	carrierFreq							CarrierFreqGERAN,
	physCellId							PhysCellIdGERAN,
	cgi-Info							SEQUENCE {
		cellGlobalId						CellGlobalIdGERAN,
		routingAreaCode						BIT STRING (SIZE (8))			OPTIONAL
	}			 															OPTIONAL,
	measResult							SEQUENCE {
		rssi								INTEGER (0..63),
		...
	}
}

MeasResultsCDMA2000 ::=				SEQUENCE {
	preRegistrationStatusHRPD			BOOLEAN,
	measResultListCDMA2000				MeasResultListCDMA2000
}

MeasResultListCDMA2000 ::=			SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxCellReport)) OF MeasResultCDMA2000

MeasResultCDMA2000 ::=	SEQUENCE {
	physCellId							PhysCellIdCDMA2000,
	cgi-Info							CellGlobalIdCDMA2000		 		OPTIONAL,
	measResult							SEQUENCE {
		pilotPnPhase						INTEGER	(0..32767)				OPTIONAL,
		pilotStrength						INTEGER (0..63),
		...
	}
}

PLMN-IdentityList2 ::=				SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..5)) OF PLMN-Identity

-- ASN1STOP

MeasResults field descriptions
measId
Identifies the measurement identity for which the reporting is being performed.
measResultServCell
Measured result of the serving cell.
measResultListEUTRA
List of measured results for the maximum number of reported best cells for an EUTRA measurement identity.
rsrpResult
Measured RSRP result of an EUTRA cell.
The rsrpResult is only reported if configured by the eNB.
rsrqResult
Measured RSRQ result of an EUTRA cell.
The rsrqResult is only reported if configured by the eNB.
measResultListUTRA
List of measured results for the maximum number of reported best cells for a UTRA measurement identity.
measResultListGERAN
List of measured results for the maximum number of reported best cells or frequencies for a GERAN measurement identity.
measResultsCDMA2000
Contains the CDMA2000 HRPD pre-registration status and the list of CDMA2000 measurements.
preRegistrationStatusHRPD
Set to TRUE if the UE is currently pre-registered with CDMA2000 HRPD. Otherwise set to FALSE. This can be ignored by the eNB for CDMA2000 1xRTT.
measResultListCDMA2000
List of measured results for the maximum number of reported best cells for a CDMA2000 measurement identity.
measResult
Measured result of an EUTRA cell;
Measured result of a UTRA cell;
Measured result of a GERAN cell or frequency; or
Measured result of a CDMA2000 cell.
utra-RSCP
According to CPICH_RSCP in TS 25.133 [29] for FDD and P-CCPCH_RSCP in TS 25.123 [30] for TDD. Thirty-one spare values.
utra-EcN0
According to CPICH_Ec/No in TS 25.133 [29] for FDD. Fourteen spare values. The field is not present for TDD.
rssi
GERAN Carrier RSSI. RXLEV is mapped to a value between 0 and 63, TS 45.008 [28]. When mapping the RXLEV value to the RSSI bit string, the first/leftmost bit of the bit string contains the most significant bit.
locationAreaCode
A fixed length code identifying the location area within a PLMN, as defined in TS 23.003 [27].
routingAreaCode
The RAC identity read from broadcast information, as defined in TS 23.003 [27].
plmn-IdentityList
The list of PLMN Identity read from broadcast information when the multiple PLMN Identities are broadcast. This field contains the list of identities starting from the second entry of PLMN Identities in the broadcast information.
pilotPnPhase
Indicates the arrival time of a CDMA2000 pilot, measured relative to the UEs time reference in units of PN chips, see C.S0005-A [25]. This information is used in SRVCC handover procedure to CDMA2000 1xRTT.
pilotStrength
CDMA2000 Pilot Strength, the ratio of pilot power to total power in the signal bandwidth of a CDMA2000 Forward Channel. See C.S0005-A [25] for CDMA2000 1xRTT and C.S0024-A [26] for CDMA2000 HRPD.

	QuantityConfig
The IE QuantityConfig specifies the measurement quantities and layer 3 filtering coefficients for E-UTRA and inter-RAT measurements.
QuantityConfig information element
-- ASN1START

QuantityConfig ::=					SEQUENCE {
	quantityConfigEUTRA					QuantityConfigEUTRA					OPTIONAL,	-- Need ON
	quantityConfigUTRA					QuantityConfigUTRA					OPTIONAL,	-- Need ON
	quantityConfigGERAN					QuantityConfigGERAN					OPTIONAL,	-- Need ON
	quantityConfigCDMA2000				QuantityConfigCDMA2000				OPTIONAL,	-- Need ON
	...
}

QuantityConfigEUTRA ::=				SEQUENCE {
	filterCoefficientRSRP				FilterCoefficient					DEFAULT fc4,
	filterCoefficientRSRQ				FilterCoefficient					DEFAULT fc4
}

QuantityConfigUTRA ::=				SEQUENCE {
	measQuantityUTRA-FDD				ENUMERATED {cpich-RSCP, cpich-EcN0},
	measQuantityUTRA-TDD				ENUMERATED {pccpch-RSCP},
	filterCoefficient					FilterCoefficient					DEFAULT fc4
}

QuantityConfigGERAN ::=				SEQUENCE {
	measQuantityGERAN					ENUMERATED {rssi},
	filterCoefficient					FilterCoefficient					DEFAULT fc2
}

QuantityConfigCDMA2000 ::=			SEQUENCE {
	measQuantityCDMA2000				ENUMERATED {pilotStrength, pilotPnPhaseAndPilotStrength}
}

-- ASN1STOP

QuantityConfig field descriptions
quantityConfigEUTRA
Specifies filter configurations for EUTRA measurements.
quantityConfigUTRA
Specifies quantity and filter configurations for UTRA measurements.
measQuantityUTRA
Measurement quantity used for UTRA measurements.
quantityConfigGERAN
Specifies quantity and filter configurations for GERAN measurements.
measQuantityGERAN
Measurement quantity used for GERAN measurements.
quantityConfigCDMA2000
Specifies quantity configurations for CDMA2000 measurements.
measQuantityCDMA2000
Measurement quantity used for CDMA2000 measurements. pilotPnPhaseAndPilotStrength is only applicable for MeasObjectCDMA2000 of cdma2000-Type = type1XRTT.
filterCoefficientRSRP
Specifies the filtering coefficient used for RSRP.
filterCoefficientRSRQ
Specifies the filtering coefficient used for RSRQ.

	ReportConfigEUTRA
The IE ReportConfigEUTRA specifies criteria for triggering of an EUTRA measurement reporting event. The EUTRA measurement reporting events are labelled AN with N equal to 1, 2 and so on.
Event A1:	Serving becomes better than absolute threshold;
Event A2:	Serving becomes worse than absolute threshold;
Event A3:	Neighbour becomes amount of offset better than serving;
Event A4:	Neighbour becomes better than absolute threshold;
Event A5:	Serving becomes worse than absolute threshold1 AND Neighbour becomes better than another absolute threshold2.
ReportConfigEUTRA information element
-- ASN1START

ReportConfigEUTRA ::=				SEQUENCE {
	triggerType							CHOICE {
		event								SEQUENCE {
			eventId								CHOICE {
				eventA1								SEQUENCE {
					a1-Threshold						ThresholdEUTRA
				},
				eventA2								SEQUENCE {
					a2-Threshold						ThresholdEUTRA
				},
				eventA3								SEQUENCE {
					a3-Offset							INTEGER (-30..30),
					reportOnLeave						BOOLEAN
				},
				eventA4								SEQUENCE {
					a4-Threshold						ThresholdEUTRA
				},
				eventA5								SEQUENCE {
					a5-Threshold1						ThresholdEUTRA,
					a5-Threshold2						ThresholdEUTRA
				},
				...
			},
			hysteresis							Hysteresis,
			timeToTrigger						TimeToTrigger
		},
		periodical								SEQUENCE {
			purpose									ENUMERATED {
														reportStrongestCells, reportCGI}
		}
	},
	triggerQuantity						ENUMERATED {rsrp, rsrq},
	reportQuantity						ENUMERATED {sameAsTriggerQuantity, both},
	maxReportCells						INTEGER (1..maxCellReport),
	reportInterval						ReportInterval,
	reportAmount						ENUMERATED {r1, r2, r4, r8, r16, r32, r64, infinity},
	...
}

ThresholdEUTRA ::=					CHOICE{
	threshold-RSRP						RSRP-Range,
	threshold-RSRQ						RSRQ-Range
}

-- ASN1STOP

ReportConfigEUTRA field descriptions
eventId
Choice of EUTRA event triggered reporting criteria.
aN-ThresholdM
Threshold to be used in EUTRA measurement report triggering condition for event number aN. If multiple thresholds are defined for event number aN, the thresholds are differentiated by M.
a3-Offset
Offset value to be used in EUTRA measurement report triggering condition for event a3. The actual value is IE value * 0.5 dB.
reportOnLeave
Indicates whether or not the UE shall initiate the measurement reporting procedure when the leaving condition is met for a cell in cellsTriggeredList, as specified in 5.5.4.1.
triggerQuantity 
The quantities used to evaluate the triggering condition for the event. The values rsrp and rsrq correspond to Reference Signal Received Power (RSRP) and Reference Signal Received Quality (RSRQ), see TS 36.214 [48].
timeToTrigger
Time during which specific criteria for the event needs to be met in order to trigger a measurement report.
reportQuantity 
The quantities to be included in the measurement report. The value both means that both the rsrp and rsrq quantities are to be included in the measurement report.
maxReportCells
Max number of cells, excluding the serving cell, to include in the measurement report.
reportAmount
Number of measurement reports applicable for triggerType event as well as for triggerType periodical. In case purpose is set to reportCGI only value 1 applies.
ThresholdEUTRA
For RSRP: RSRP based threshold for event evaluation.
For RSRQ: RSRQ based threshold for event evaluation.

	ReportConfigId
The IE ReportConfigId is used to identify a measurement reporting configuration.
ReportConfigId information element
-- ASN1START

ReportConfigId ::=					INTEGER (1..maxReportConfigId)

-- ASN1STOP

	ReportConfigInterRAT
The IE ReportConfigInterRAT specifies criteria for triggering of an inter-RAT measurement reporting event. The inter-RAT measurement reporting events are labelled BN with N equal to 1, 2 and so on.
Event B1:	Neighbour becomes better than absolute threshold;
Event B2:	Serving becomes worse than absolute threshold1 AND Neighbour becomes better than another absolute threshold2.
The b1 and b2 event thresholds for CDMA2000 are the CDMA2000 pilot detection thresholds are expressed as an unsigned binary number equal to [-2 x 10 log 10 Ec/Io] in units of 0.5dB, see C.S0005-A [25] for details.
ReportConfigInterRAT information element
-- ASN1START

ReportConfigInterRAT ::=			SEQUENCE {
	triggerType							CHOICE {
		event								SEQUENCE {
			eventId								CHOICE {
				eventB1								SEQUENCE {
					b1-Threshold						CHOICE {
						b1-ThresholdUTRA					ThresholdUTRA,
						b1-ThresholdGERAN					ThresholdGERAN,
						b1-ThresholdCDMA2000				ThresholdCDMA2000
					}
				},
				eventB2								SEQUENCE {
					b2-Threshold1						ThresholdEUTRA,
					b2-Threshold2						CHOICE { 				
						b2-Threshold2UTRA					ThresholdUTRA,
						b2-Threshold2GERAN					ThresholdGERAN,
						b2-Threshold2CDMA2000				ThresholdCDMA2000
					}
				},
				...
			},
			hysteresis						Hysteresis,
			timeToTrigger					TimeToTrigger
		},
		periodical								SEQUENCE {
			purpose									ENUMERATED {
														reportStrongestCells,
														reportStrongestCellsForSON,
														reportCGI}
		}
	},
	maxReportCells						INTEGER (1..maxCellReport),
	reportInterval						ReportInterval,	
	reportAmount						ENUMERATED {r1, r2, r4, r8, r16, r32, r64, infinity},
	...
}

ThresholdUTRA ::=					CHOICE{
	utra-RSCP							INTEGER (-5..91),
	utra-EcN0							INTEGER (0..49)
}

ThresholdGERAN ::= 				INTEGER (0..63)

ThresholdCDMA2000 ::= 			INTEGER (0..63)

-- ASN1STOP

ReportConfigInterRAT field descriptions
eventId
Choice of inter-RAT event triggered reporting criteria.
bN-ThresholdM
Threshold to be used in inter RAT measurement report triggering condition for event number bN. If multiple thresholds are defined for event number bN, the thresholds are differentiated by M.
timeToTrigger
Time during which specific criteria for the event needs to be met in order to trigger a measurement report.
Purpose
reportStrongestCellsForSON applies only in case reportConfig is linked to a measObject set to measObjectUTRA or measObjectCDMA2000.
maxReportCells
Max number of cells, excluding the serving cell, to include in the measurement report. In case purpose is set to reportStrongestCellsForSON only value 1 applies.
reportAmount
Number of measurement reports applicable for triggerType event as well as for triggerType periodical. In case purpose is set to reportCGI or reportStrongestCellsForSON only value 1 applies.
ThresholdUTRA
utra-RSCP corresponds to CPICH_RSCP in TS 25.133 [29] for FDD and P-CCPCH_RSCP in TS 25.123 [30] for TDD. utra-EcN0 corresponds to CPICH_Ec/No in TS 25.133 [29] for FDD, and is not applicable for TDD.
For utra-RSCP: The actual value is IE value  115 dBm. Integer value according to mapping table in TS 25.133 [29] and TS 25.123 [30], for FDD and TDD, respectively.
For utra-EcN0: The actual value is (IE value  49)/2 dB. Integer value according to mapping table in TS 25.133 [29].
ThresholdGERAN
The actual value is IE value  110 dBm. . Integer value according to mapping table in TS 45.008 [28].

	ReportConfigToAddModList
The IE ReportConfigToAddModList concerns a list of reporting configurations to add or modify
ReportConfigToAddModList information element
-- ASN1START

ReportConfigToAddModList ::=		SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxReportConfigId)) OF ReportConfigToAddMod

ReportConfigToAddMod ::=	SEQUENCE {
	reportConfigId						ReportConfigId,
	reportConfig						CHOICE {
		reportConfigEUTRA					ReportConfigEUTRA,
		reportConfigInterRAT				ReportConfigInterRAT
	}
}


-- ASN1STOP

	ReportInterval
The ReportInterval indicates the interval between periodical reports. The ReportInterval is applicable if the UE performs periodical reporting (i.e. when reportAmount exceeds 1), for triggerType event as well as for triggerType periodical. Value ms120 corresponds with 120 ms, ms240 corresponds with 240 ms and so on, while value min1 corresponds with 1 min, min6 corresponds with 6 min and so on.
ReportInterval information element
-- ASN1START

ReportInterval ::=					ENUMERATED {
										ms120, ms240, ms480, ms640, ms1024, ms2048, ms5120, ms10240,
										min1, min6, min12, min30, min60, spare3, spare2, spare1}

-- ASN1STOP

	RSRP-Range
The IE RSRP-Range specifies the value range used in RSRP measurements and thresholds. Integer value for RSRP according to mapping table in TS 36.133 [16].
RSRP-Range information element
-- ASN1START

RSRP-Range ::=						INTEGER(0..97)

-- ASN1STOP

	RSRQ-Range
The IE RSRQ-Range specifies the value range used in RSRQ measurements and thresholds. Integer value for RSRQ according to mapping table in TS 36.133 [16].
RSRQ-Range information element
-- ASN1START

RSRQ-Range ::=						INTEGER(0..34)

-- ASN1STOP

	TimeToTrigger
The IE TimeToTrigger specifies the value range used for time to trigger parameter, which concerns the time during which specific criteria for the event needs to be met in order to trigger a measurement report. Value ms0 corresponds to 0 ms, ms40 corresponds to 40 ms, and so on.
TimeToTrigger information element
-- ASN1START

TimeToTrigger ::=					ENUMERATED {
										ms0, ms40, ms64, ms80, ms100, ms128, ms160, ms256,
										ms320, ms480, ms512, ms640, ms1024, ms1280, ms2560,
										ms5120}

-- ASN1STOP

6.3.6	Other information elements
	C-RNTI
The IE C-RNTI identifies a UE having a RRC connection within a cell.
C-RNTI information element
-- ASN1START

C-RNTI ::=							BIT STRING (SIZE (16))

-- ASN1STOP

	DedicatedInfoCDMA2000
The DedicatedInfoCDMA2000 is used to transfer UE specific CDMA2000 information between the network and the UE. The RRC layer is transparent for this information.
DedicatedInfoCDMA2000 information element
-- ASN1START

DedicatedInfoCDMA2000 ::=				OCTET STRING

-- ASN1STOP

	DedicatedInfoNAS
The IE DedicatedInfoNAS is used to transfer UE specific NAS layer information between the network and the UE. The RRC layer is transparent for this information.
DedicatedInfoNAS information element
-- ASN1START

DedicatedInfoNAS ::=		OCTET STRING

-- ASN1STOP

	FilterCoefficient
The IE FilterCoefficient specifies the measurement filtering coefficient. Value fc0 corresponds to k = 0, fc1 corresponds to k = 1, and so on.
FilterCoefficient information element
-- ASN1START

FilterCoefficient ::=					ENUMERATED {
											fc0, fc1, fc2, fc3, fc4, fc5,
											fc6, fc7, fc8, fc9, fc11, fc13, 
											fc15, fc17, fc19, spare1, ...}

-- ASN1STOP

	MMEC
The IE MMEC identifies an MME within the scope of an MME Group within a PLMN, see TS 23.003 [27]. 
MMEC information element
-- ASN1START

MMEC ::=							BIT STRING (SIZE (8))

-- ASN1STOP


	NeighCellConfig
The IE NeighCellConfig is used to provide the information related to MBSFN and TDD UL/DL configuration of neighbour cells.
NeighCellConfig information element
-- ASN1START

NeighCellConfig ::=			BIT STRING (SIZE (2))

-- ASN1STOP

NeighCellConfig field descriptions
neighCellConfig
Provides information related to MBSFN and TDD UL/DL configuration of neighbour cells of this frequency
00: Not all neighbour cells have the same MBSFN subframe allocation as serving cell
10: The MBSFN subframe allocations of all neighbour cells are identical to or subsets of that in the serving cell
01: No MBSFN subframes are present in all neighbour cells
11: Different UL/DL allocation in neighbouring cells for TDD compared to the serving cell
For TDD, 00, 10 and 01 are only used for same UL/DL allocation in neighbouring cells compared to the serving cell.

	RAND-CDMA2000 (1xRTT)
The RAND-CDMA2000 concerns a random value, generated by the eNB, to be passed to the CDMA2000 upper layers.
RAND-CDMA2000 information element
-- ASN1START

RAND-CDMA2000 ::=						BIT STRING (SIZE (32))

-- ASN1STOP

	RAT-Type
The IE RAT-Type is used to indicate the radio access technology (RAT), including EUTRA, of the requested/ transferred UE capabilities.
RAT-Type information element
-- ASN1START

RAT-Type ::=						ENUMERATED {
										eutra, utra, geran-cs, geran-ps, cdma2000-1XRTT,
										spare3, spare2, spare1, ...}

-- ASN1STOP

	RRC-TransactionIdentifier
The IE RRC-TransactionIdentifier is used, together with the message type, for the identification of an RRC procedure (transaction).
RRC-TransactionIdentifier information element
-- ASN1START

RRC-TransactionIdentifier ::=		INTEGER (0..3)

-- ASN1STOP

	S-TMSI
The IE S-TMSI contains an S-Temporary Mobile Subscriber Identity, a temporary UE identity provided by the EPC which uniquely identifies the UE within the tracking area, see TS 23.003 [27].
S-TMSI information element
-- ASN1START

S-TMSI ::=							SEQUENCE {
	mmec								MMEC,
	m-TMSI								BIT STRING (SIZE (32))
}

-- ASN1STOP

S-TMSI field descriptions
m-TMSI
The first/leftmost bit of the bit string contains the most significant bit of the M-TMSI.

	UE-CapabilityRAT-ContainerList
The IE UE-CapabilityRAT-ContainerList contains list of containers, one for each RAT for which UE capabilities are transferred, if any.
UE-CapabilityRAT-ContainerList information element
-- ASN1START

UE-CapabilityRAT-ContainerList ::=SEQUENCE (SIZE (0..maxRAT-Capabilities)) OF UE-CapabilityRAT-Container

UE-CapabilityRAT-Container ::= SEQUENCE {
	rat-Type							RAT-Type,
	ueCapabilityRAT-Container			OCTET STRING
}

-- ASN1STOP

UECapabilityRAT-ContainerList field descriptions
ueCapabilityRAT-Container
Container for the UE capabilities of the indicated RAT. The encoding is defined in the specification of each RAT:
For EUTRA: the encoding of UE capabilities is defined in IE UE-EUTRA-Capability.
For UTRA: the octet string contains the INTER RAT HANDOVER INFO message defined in TS 25.331 [19].
For GERAN CS: the octet string contains the concatenated string of the Mobile Station Classmark 2 and Mobile Station Classmark 3. The first 5 octets correspond to Mobile Station Classmark 2 and the following octets correspond to Mobile Station Classmark 3. The Mobile Station Classmark 2 is formatted as 'TLV' and is coded in the same way as the Mobile Station Classmark 2 information element in TS 24.008 [49]. The first octet is the Mobile station classmark 2 IEI and its value shall be set to 33H. The second octet is the Length of mobile station classmark 2 and its value shall be set to 3. The octet 3 contains the first octet of the value part of the Mobile Station Classmark 2 information element, the octet 4 contains the second octet of the value part of the Mobile Station Classmark 2 information element and so on. For each of these octets, the first/ leftmost/ most significant bit of the octet contains b8 of the corresponding octet of the Mobile Station Classmark 2. The Mobile Station Classmark 3 is formatted as 'V' and is coded in the same way as the value part in the Mobile station classmark 3 information element in TS 24.008 [49]. The sixth octet of this octet string contains octet 1 of the value part of Mobile station classmark 3, the seventh of octet of this octet string contains octet 2 of the value part of Mobile station classmark 3 and so on. Note.
For GERAN PS: the encoding of UE capabilities is formatted as 'V' and is coded in the same way as the value part in the MS Radio Access Capability information element in TS 36.306 [5].
For CDMA2000-1XRTT: the octet string contains the A21 Mobile Subscription Information and the encoding of this is defined in A.S0008 [33]. The A21 Mobile Subscription Information contains the supported CDMA2000 1xRTT band class and band sub-class information.
NOTE:	The value part is specified by means of CSN.1, which encoding results in a bit string, to which final padding may be appended up to the next octet boundary TS 24.008 [49]. The first/ leftmost bit of the CSN.1 bit string is placed in the first/ leftmost/ most significant bit of the first octet. This continues until the last bit of the CSN.1 bit string, which is placed in the last/ rightmost/ least significant bit of the last octet.
	UE-EUTRA-Capability
The IE UE-EUTRA-Capability is used to convey the E-UTRA UE Radio Access Capability Parameters, see TS 36.306 [5], to the network. The IE UE-EUTRA-Capability is transferred in E-UTRA or in another RAT.
UE-EUTRA-Capability information element
-- ASN1START

UE-EUTRA-Capability ::=				SEQUENCE {
	accessStratumRelease				AccessStratumRelease,
	ue-Category							INTEGER (1..5),
	pdcp-Parameters						PDCP-Parameters,
	phyLayerParameters					PhyLayerParameters,
	rf-Parameters						RF-Parameters,
	measParameters						MeasParameters,
	featureGroupIndicators				BIT STRING (SIZE (32))				OPTIONAL,
	interRAT-Parameters					SEQUENCE {
		utraFDD								IRAT-ParametersUTRA-FDD				OPTIONAL,
		utraTDD128							IRAT-ParametersUTRA-TDD128				OPTIONAL,
		utraTDD384							IRAT-ParametersUTRA-TDD384				OPTIONAL,
		utraTDD768							IRAT-ParametersUTRA-TDD768				OPTIONAL,
		geran								IRAT-ParametersGERAN					OPTIONAL,
		cdma2000-HRPD						IRAT-ParametersCDMA2000-HRPD			OPTIONAL,
		cdma2000-1xRTT						IRAT-ParametersCDMA2000-1XRTT			OPTIONAL
	},
	nonCriticalExtension				SEQUENCE {}							OPTIONAL
}

AccessStratumRelease ::=			ENUMERATED {
										rel8, spare7, spare6, spare5, spare4, spare3,
										spare2, spare1, ...}

PDCP-Parameters ::=					SEQUENCE {
	supportedROHC-Profiles				SEQUENCE {
		profile0x0001						BOOLEAN,
		profile0x0002						BOOLEAN,
		profile0x0003						BOOLEAN,
		profile0x0004						BOOLEAN,
		profile0x0006						BOOLEAN,
		profile0x0101						BOOLEAN,
		profile0x0102						BOOLEAN,
		profile0x0103						BOOLEAN,
		profile0x0104						BOOLEAN
	},
	maxNumberROHC-ContextSessions		ENUMERATED {
											cs2, cs4, cs8, cs12, cs16, cs24, cs32,
											cs48, cs64, cs128, cs256, cs512, cs1024,
											cs16384, spare2, spare1}				DEFAULT cs16,
	...
}

PhyLayerParameters ::=				SEQUENCE {
	ue-TxAntennaSelectionSupported		BOOLEAN,
	ue-SpecificRefSigsSupported			BOOLEAN
}

RF-Parameters ::=					SEQUENCE {
	supportedBandListEUTRA				SupportedBandListEUTRA
}

SupportedBandListEUTRA ::=			SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxBands)) OF SupportedBandEUTRA 

SupportedBandEUTRA ::=				SEQUENCE {
	bandEUTRA							INTEGER (1..64),
	halfDuplex							BOOLEAN
}

MeasParameters ::=					SEQUENCE {
	bandListEUTRA						BandListEUTRA
}

BandListEUTRA ::=					SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxBands)) OF BandInfoEUTRA 

BandInfoEUTRA ::=					SEQUENCE {
	interFreqBandList					InterFreqBandList,
	interRAT-BandList					InterRAT-BandList		OPTIONAL
}

InterFreqBandList ::=				SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxBands)) OF InterFreqBandInfo

InterFreqBandInfo ::=				SEQUENCE {
	interFreqNeedForGaps				BOOLEAN
}

InterRAT-BandList ::=				SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxBands)) OF InterRAT-BandInfo

InterRAT-BandInfo ::=				SEQUENCE {
	interRAT-NeedForGaps				BOOLEAN
}

IRAT-ParametersUTRA-FDD ::=			SEQUENCE {
	supportedBandListUTRA-FDD			SupportedBandListUTRA-FDD
}

SupportedBandListUTRA-FDD ::=		SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxBands)) OF SupportedBandUTRA-FDD 

SupportedBandUTRA-FDD ::=			ENUMERATED {
										bandI, bandII, bandIII, bandIV, bandV, bandVI,
										bandVII, bandVIII, bandIX, bandX, bandXI,
										bandXII, bandXIII, bandXIV, bandXV, bandXVI, ...}

IRAT-ParametersUTRA-TDD128 ::=		SEQUENCE {
	supportedBandListUTRA-TDD128		SupportedBandListUTRA-TDD128
}

SupportedBandListUTRA-TDD128 ::=	SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxBands)) OF SupportedBandUTRA-TDD128 

SupportedBandUTRA-TDD128 ::=		ENUMERATED {
										a, b, c, d, e, f, g, h, i, j, k, l, m, n,
										o, p, ...}

IRAT-ParametersUTRA-TDD384 ::=		SEQUENCE {
	supportedBandListUTRA-TDD384		SupportedBandListUTRA-TDD384
}

SupportedBandListUTRA-TDD384 ::=	SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxBands)) OF SupportedBandUTRA-TDD384 

SupportedBandUTRA-TDD384 ::=		ENUMERATED {
											a, b, c, d, e, f, g, h, i, j, k, l, m, n,
											o, p, ...}

IRAT-ParametersUTRA-TDD768 ::=		SEQUENCE {
	supportedBandListUTRA-TDD768		SupportedBandListUTRA-TDD768
}

SupportedBandListUTRA-TDD768 ::=	SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxBands)) OF SupportedBandUTRA-TDD768 

SupportedBandUTRA-TDD768 ::=		ENUMERATED {
										a, b, c, d, e, f, g, h, i, j, k, l, m, n,
										o, p, ...}

IRAT-ParametersGERAN ::=			SEQUENCE {
	supportedBandListGERAN				SupportedBandListGERAN,
	interRAT-PS-HO-ToGERAN				BOOLEAN
}

SupportedBandListGERAN ::=			SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxBands)) OF SupportedBandGERAN 

SupportedBandGERAN ::=				ENUMERATED {
										gsm450, gsm480, gsm710, gsm750, gsm810, gsm850,
										gsm900P, gsm900E, gsm900R, gsm1800, gsm1900,
										spare5, spare4, spare3, spare2, spare1, ...}

IRAT-ParametersCDMA2000-HRPD ::=	SEQUENCE {
	supportedBandListHRPD				SupportedBandListHRPD,
	tx-ConfigHRPD						ENUMERATED {single, dual},
	rx-ConfigHRPD						ENUMERATED {single, dual}
}

SupportedBandListHRPD ::=			SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxCDMA-BandClass)) OF BandclassCDMA2000

IRAT-ParametersCDMA2000-1XRTT ::=	SEQUENCE {
	supportedBandList1XRTT				SupportedBandList1XRTT,
	tx-Config1XRTT						ENUMERATED {single, dual},
	rx-Config1XRTT						ENUMERATED {single, dual}
}

SupportedBandList1XRTT ::=			SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxCDMA-BandClass)) OF BandclassCDMA2000

-- ASN1STOP

UE-EUTRA-Capability field descriptions
accessStratumRelease
Set to rel8 in this version of the specification.
maxNumberROHC-ContextSessions
Set to the maximum number of concurrently active ROHC contexts supported by the UE. cs2 corresponds with 2 (context sessions), cs4 corresponds with 4 and so on.
ue-Category
UE category as defined in TS 36.306 [5]. Set to values 1 to 5 in this version of the specification.
bandEUTRA
EUTRA band as defined in TS 36.101 [42].
ue-TxAntennaSelectionSupported
TRUE indicates that the UE is capable of supporting UE transmit antenna selection as described in TS 36.213 [23, 8.7].
halfDuplex
If halfDuplex is set to true, only half duplex operation is supported for the band, otherwise full duplex operation is supported.
bandListEUTRA
One entry corresponding to each supported EUTRA band listed in the same order as in supportedBandListEUTRA.
interFreqBandList
One entry corresponding to each supported EUTRA band listed in the same order as in supportedBandListEUTRA.
interFreqNeedForGaps
Indicates need for measurement gaps when operating on the EUTRA band given by the entry in bandListEUTRA and measuring on the EUTRA band given by the entry in interFreqBandList.
interRAT-BandList
One entry corresponding to each supported band of another RAT listed in the same order as in the interRAT-Parameters.
interRATNeedForGaps
Indicates need for DL measurement gaps when operating on the EUTRA band given by the entry in bandListEUTRA and measuring on the inter-RAT band given by the entry in the interRAT-BandList.
bandUTRA-FDD
UTRA band as defined in TS 25.101 [17].
bandUTRA-TDD128
UTRA band as defined in TS 25.102 [18].
bandUTRA-TDD384
UTRA band as defined in TS 25.102 [18].
bandUTRA-TDD768
UTRA band as defined in TS 25.102 [18].
bandGERAN
GERAN band as defined in TS 45.005 [20].
bandHRPD
CDMA2000 HRPD band class.
band1XRTT
CDMA2000 1xRTT band class.
featureGroupIndicators
The definitions of the bits in the bit string are described in Annex B.

NOTE:	The IE UE-EUTRA-Capability does not include AS security capability information, since these are the same as the security capabilities that are signalled by NAS. Consequently AS need not provide "man-in-the-middle" protection for the security capabilities.
	UE-TimersAndConstants
The IE UE-TimersAndConstants contains timers and constants used by the UE in either RRC_CONNECTED or RRC_IDLE.
UE-TimersAndConstants information element
-- ASN1START

UE-TimersAndConstants ::=			SEQUENCE {
	t300								ENUMERATED {
											ms100, ms200, ms300, ms400, ms600, ms1000, ms1500,
											ms2000},
	t301								ENUMERATED {
											ms100, ms200, ms300, ms400, ms600, ms1000, ms1500,
											ms2000},
	t310								ENUMERATED {
											ms0, ms50, ms100, ms200, ms500, ms1000, ms2000},
	n310								ENUMERATED {
											n1, n2, n3, n4, n6, n8, n10, n20},
	t311								ENUMERATED {
											ms1000, ms3000, ms5000, ms10000, ms15000,
											ms20000, ms30000},
	n311								ENUMERATED {
											n1, n2, n3, n4, n5, n6, n8, n10},
	...
}

-- ASN1STOP

UE-TimersAndConstants field descriptions
t3xy
Timers are described in section 7.3. Value ms0 corresponds with 0 ms, ms50 corresponds with 50 ms and so on.
n3xy
Constants are described in section 7.4. n1 corresponds with 1, n2 corresponds with 2 and so on.

6.4	RRC multiplicity and type constraint values
	Multiplicity and type constraint definitions
-- ASN1START

maxBands					INTEGER ::= 64	-- Maximum number of bands listed in EUTRA UE caps
maxCDMA-BandClass			INTEGER ::= 32	-- Maximum value of the CDMA band classes
maxCellBlack				INTEGER ::= 16	-- Maximum number of blacklisted cells
											--	listed in SIB type 4 and 5
maxCellInter				INTEGER ::= 16	-- Maximum number of neighbouring inter-frequency
											-- cells listed in SIB type 5
maxCellIntra				INTEGER ::= 16	-- Maximum number of neighbouring intra-frequency
											-- cells listed in SIB type 4
maxCellMeas					INTEGER ::= 32	-- Maximum number of neighbouring cells within a
											-- measurement object (incl blacklisted cells)
maxCellReport				INTEGER ::= 8	-- Maximum number of reported cells
maxDRB						INTEGER ::= 11	-- Maximum number of Data Radio Bearers
maxEARFCN					INTEGER ::= 65535	-- Maximum value of EUTRA carrier fequency
maxFreq						INTEGER ::= 8	-- Maximum number of EUTRA carrier frequencies
maxGERAN-SI					INTEGER ::= 10	-- Maximum number of GERAN SI blocks that can be
											-- provided as part of NACC information
maxGNFG						INTEGER ::= 16	-- Maximum number of GERAN neighbour freq groups
maxMBSFN-Allocations		INTEGER ::= 8	-- Maximum number of MBSFN frame allocations with
											-- different offset
maxMCS-1					INTEGER ::= 16	-- Maximum number of PUCCH formats (MCS)
maxMeasId					INTEGER ::= 32
maxObjectId					INTEGER ::= 32
maxPageRec					INTEGER ::= 16	-- 
maxPNOffset					INTEGER ::=	511	-- Maximum number of CDMA2000 PNOffsets
maxRAT-Capabilities			INTEGER ::= 8	-- Maximum number of interworking RATs (incl EUTRA)
maxReportConfigId			INTEGER ::= 32
maxSIB						INTEGER ::= 32	-- Maximum number of SIBs
maxSIB-1					INTEGER ::= 31
maxSI-Message				INTEGER ::= 32	-- Maximum number of SI messages
maxUTRA-FDD-Carrier			INTEGER ::= 16	-- Maximum number of UTRA FDD carrier frequencies
maxUTRA-TDD-Carrier			INTEGER ::= 16	-- Maximum number of UTRA TDD carrier frequencies

-- ASN1STOP
NOTE: The value of maxDRB align with SA2.
	End of EUTRA-RRC-Definitions
-- ASN1START

END

-- ASN1STOP

7	Variables and constants
7.1	UE variables
NOTE: 	To facilitate the specification of the UE behavioural requirements, UE variables are represented using ASN.1. Unless explicitly specified otherwise, it is however up to UE implementation how to store the variables. The optionality of the IEs in ASN.1 is used only to indicate that the values may not always be available.
	EUTRA-UE-Variables
This ASN.1 segment is the start of the EUTRA UE variable definitions.
-- ASN1START

EUTRA-UE-Variables DEFINITIONS AUTOMATIC TAGS ::=

BEGIN

IMPORTS
	CellIdentity,
	SpeedStateScaleFactors,
	C-RNTI,
	MeasId,
	MeasIdToAddModList,
	MeasObjectToAddModList,
	MobilityStateParameters,
	NeighCellConfig,
	PhysCellId,
	QuantityConfig,
	ReportConfigToAddModList,
	RSRP-Range,
	maxCellMeas,
	maxMeasId
FROM EUTRA-RRC-Definitions;

-- ASN1STOP

	VarMeasConfig
The UE variable VarMeasConfig includes the accumulated configuration of the measurements to be performed by the UE, covering intra-frequency, inter-frequency and inter-RAT mobility related measurements.
VarMeasConfig UE variable
-- ASN1START

VarMeasConfig ::=					SEQUENCE {
	-- Measurement identities
	measIdList							MeasIdToAddModList					OPTIONAL,
	-- Measurement objects
	measObjectList						MeasObjectToAddModList				OPTIONAL,
	-- Reporting configurations
	reportConfigList					ReportConfigToAddModList			OPTIONAL,
	-- Other parameters
	quantityConfig						QuantityConfig						OPTIONAL,
	s-Measure							RSRP-Range							OPTIONAL,
	speedStatePars						CHOICE {
		release								NULL,
		setup								SEQUENCE {
			mobilityStateParameters				MobilityStateParameters,
			timeToTrigger-SF					SpeedStateScaleFactors
		}
	}																		OPTIONAL
}

-- ASN1STOP

	VarMeasReportList
The UE variable VarMeasReportList includes information about the measurements for which the triggering conditions have been met.
VarMeasReportList UE variable
-- ASN1START

VarMeasReportList ::=				SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxMeasId)) OF VarMeasReport

VarMeasReport ::=					SEQUENCE {
	-- List of measurement that have been triggered
	measId								MeasId,
	cellsTriggeredList					CellsTriggeredList				OPTIONAL,
	numberOfReportsSent					INTEGER
}

CellsTriggeredList ::=				SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..maxCellMeas)) OF PhysCellId

-- ASN1STOP

	VarShortMAC-Input
The UE variable VarShortMAC-Input specifies the input used to generate the shortMAC-I.
VarShortMAC-Input UE variable
-- ASN1START

VarShortMAC-Input ::=					SEQUENCE {
	cellIdentity							CellIdentity,
	physCellId								PhysCellId,
	c-RNTI									C-RNTI
}
-- ASN1STOP

VarShortMAC-Input field descriptions
cellIdentity
Set to CellIdentity of the current cell.
physCellId
Set to the physical cell identity of the cell the UE was connected to prior to the failure.
c-RNTI
Set to C-RNTI that the UE had in the cell it was connected to prior to the failure.

	Multiplicity and type constraint definitions
This section includes multiplicity and type constraints applicable (only) for UE variables.
-- ASN1START


-- ASN1STOP

	End of EUTRA-UE-Variables
-- ASN1START

END

-- ASN1STOP

7.2	Counters
Counter
Reset
Incremented
When reaching max value





7.3	Timers (Informative)
Timer
Start
Stop
At expiry
T300

Transmission of RRCConnectionRequest 
Reception of RRCConnectionSetup or RRCConnectionReject message, cell re-selection and upon abortion of connection establishment by upper layers
Perform the actions as specified in 5.3.3.6
T301
Transmission of RRCConnectionReestabilshmentRequest
Reception of RRCConnectionReestablishment or RRCConnectionReestablishmentReject message as well as when the selected cell becomes unsuitable
Go to RRC_IDLE
T302
Reception of RRCConnectionReject while performing RRC connection establishment
Upon entering RRC_CONNECTED and upon cell re-selection
Inform upper layers about barring alleviation as specified in 5.3.3.7
T303
Access barred while performing RRC connection establishment for mobile originating calls
Upon entering RRC_CONNECTED and upon cell re-selection
Inform upper layers about barring alleviation as specified in 5.3.3.7
T304
Reception of RRCConnectionReconfiguration message including the MobilityControl Info or
reception of MobilityFromEUTRACommand message including CellChangeOrder
Criterion for successful completion of handover to EUTRA or cell change order is met (the criterion is specified in the target RAT in case of inter-RAT)
In case of cell change order from E-UTRA or intra E-UTRA handover, initiate the RRC connection re-establishment procedure; In case of handover to E-UTRA, perform the actions defined in the specifications applicable for the source RAT.
T305
Access barred while performing RRC connection establishment for mobile originating signalling
Upon entering RRC_CONNECTED and upon cell re-selection 
Inform upper layers about barring alleviation as specified in 5.3.3.7
T310
Upon detecting physical layer problems i.e. upon receiving N310 consecutive out-of-sync indications from lower layers
Upon receiving N311 consecutive in-sync indications from lower layers, upon triggering the handover procedure and upon initiating the connection re-establishment procedure
If security is not activated: go to RRC_IDLE else: initiate the connection re-establishment procedure 
T311
Upon initiating the RRC connection re-establishment procedure
Selection of a suitable E-UTRA cell or a cell using another RAT.
Enter RRC_IDLE
T320
Upon receiving t320 or upon cell (re)selection to E-UTRA from another RAT with validity time configured for dedicated priorities (in which case the remaining validity time is applied).
Upon entering RRC_CONNECTED, when PLMN selection is performed on request by NAS, or upon cell (re)selection to another RAT (in which case the timer is carried on to the other RAT).
Discard the cell reselection priority information provided by dedicated signalling.
T321
Upon receiving measConfig including a reportConfig with the purpose set to reportCGI
Upon acquiring the information needed to set all fields of cellGlobalId for the requested cell, upon receiving measConfig that includes removal of the reportConfig with the purpose set to reportCGI
Initiate the measurement reporting procedure, stop performing the related measurements and remove the corresponding measId

7.4	Constants
Constant
Usage
N310
Maximum number of consecutive "out-of-sync" indications received from lower layers
N311
Maximum number of consecutive "in-sync" indications received from lower layers

8	Protocol data unit abstract syntax
8.1	General
The RRC PDU contents in clause 6 and clause 10 are described using abstract syntax notation one (ASN.1) as specified in ITU-T Rec. X.680 [13] and X.681 [14]. Transfer syntax for RRC PDUs is derived from their ASN.1 definitions by use of Packed Encoding Rules, unaligned as specified in ITU-T Rec. X.691 [15].
The following encoding rules apply in addition to what has been specified in X.691:
-	When a bit string value is placed in a bit-field as specified in 15.6 to 15.11 in X.691, the leading bit of the bit string value shall be placed in the leading bit of the bit-field, and the trailing bit of the bit string value shall be placed in the trailing bit of the bit-field.
NOTE:	The terms 'leading bit' and 'trailing bit' are defined in ITU-T Rec. X.680. When using the 'bstring' notation, the leading bit of the bit string value is on the left, and the trailing bit of the bit string value is on the right.
8.2	Structure of encoded RRC messages
An RRC PDU, which is the bit string that is exchanged between peer entities/ across the radio interface contains the basic production as defined in X.691.
RRC PDUs shall be mapped to and from PDCP SDUs (in case of DCCH) or RLC SDUs (in case of PCCH, BCCH or CCCH) upon transmission and reception as follows:
-	when delivering an RRC PDU as an PDCP SDU to the PDCP layer for transmission, the first bit of the RRC PDU shall be represented as the first bit in the PDCP SDU and onwards; and
-	when delivering an RRC PDU as an RLC SDU to the RLC layer for transmission, the first bit of the RRC PDU shall be represented as the first bit in the RLC SDU and onwards; and
-	upon reception of an PDCP SDU from the PDCP layer, the first bit of the PDCP SDU shall represent the first bit of the RRC PDU and onwards; and
-	upon reception of an RLC SDU from the RLC layer, the first bit of the RLC SDU shall represent the first bit of the RRC PDU and onwards.
8.3	Basic production
The 'basic production' is obtained by applying UNALIGNED PER to the abstract syntax value (the ASN.1 description) as specified in X.691. It always contains a multiple of 8 bits.
8.4	Extension
The following rules apply with respect to the use of protocol extensions:
-	A transmitter compliant with this version of the specification shall, unless explicitly indicated otherwise on a PDU type basis, set the extension part empty. Transmitters compliant with a later version may send non-empty extensions;
-	A transmitter compliant with this version of the specification shall set spare bits to zero;
8.5	Padding
If the encoded RRC message does not fill a transport block, the RRC layer shall add padding bits. This applies to PCCH and BCCH.
Padding bits shall be set to 0 and the number of padding bits is a multiple of 8.

Figure 8.5-1: RRC level padding
9	Specified and default radio configurations
Specified and default configurations are configurations of which the details are specified in the standard. Specified configurations are fixed while default configurations can be modified using dedicated signalling.
9.1	Specified configurations
9.1.1	Logical channel configurations
9.1.1.1	BCCH configuration
Parameters
Name
Value
Semantics description
Ver
PDCP configuration
N/A


RLC configuration
TM


MAC configuration
TM



NOTE:	RRC will perform padding, if required due to the granularity of the TF signalling, as defined in 8.5.
9.1.1.2	CCCH configuration
Parameters
Name
Value
Semantics description
Ver
PDCP configuration
N/A


RLC configuration
TM


MAC configuration

Normal MAC headers are used

Logical channel configuration



priority
1
Highest priority

prioritisedBitRate
Infinity


bucketSizeDuration
N/A


logicalChannelGroup
0



9.1.1.3	PCCH configuration
Parameters
Name
Value
Semantics description
Ver
PDCP configuration
N/A


RLC configuration
TM


MAC configuration
TM



NOTE:	RRC will perform padding, if required due to the granularity of the TF signalling, as defined in 8.5.
9.1.2	SRB configurations
9.1.2.1	SRB1
Parameters
Name
Value
Semantics description
Ver
RLC configuration



logicalChannelIdentity
1



9.1.2.2	SRB2
Parameters
Name
Value
Semantics description
Ver
RLC configuration



logicalChannelIdentity
2



9.2	Default radio configurations
9.2.1	SRB configurations
9.2.1.1	SRB1
Parameters
Name
Value
Semantics description
Ver
RLC configuration CHOICE
am


ul-RLC-Config
>t-PollRetransmit
>pollPDU
>pollByte
>maxRetxThreshold

45
Infinity
Infinity
4


dl-RLC-Config
>t-Reordering
>t-StatusProhibit

35
0


Logical channel configuration



priority
1
Highest priority

prioritisedBitRate
Infinity


bucketSizeDuration
N/A


logicalChannelGroup
0



9.2.1.2	SRB2
Parameters
Name
Value
Semantics description
Ver
RLC configuration CHOICE
am


ul-RLC-Config
>t-PollRetransmit
>pollPDU
>pollByte
>maxRetxThreshold

45
Infinity
Infinity
4


dl-RLC-Config
>t-Reordering
>t-StatusProhibit

35
0


Logical channel configuration



priority
3


prioritisedBitRate
Infinity


bucketSizeDuration
N/A


logicalChannelGroup
0



9.2.2	Default MAC main configuration
Parameters
Name
Value
Semantics description
Ver
MAC main configuration



maxHARQ-tx
5


periodicBSR-Timer
Infinity


retxBSR-Timer
sf2560


ttiBundling
FALSE


drx-Config
release


phr-Config
release



9.2.3	Default semi-persistent scheduling configuration
SPS-Config
>sps-ConfigDL
>sps-ConfigUL

release
release



9.2.4	Default physical channel configuration
Parameters
Name
Value
Semantics description
Ver
PDSCH-ConfigDedicated
>p-a

dB0


PUCCH-ConfigDedicated
> tdd-AckNackFeedbackMode
>ackNackRepetition

bundling
release

Only valid for TDD mode

PUSCH-ConfigDedicated
>betaOffset-ACK-Index
>betaOffset-RI-Index
>betaOffset-CQI-Index

10
12
15


UplinkPowerControlDedicated
>p0-UE-PUSCH
>deltaMCS-Enabled
>accumulationEnabled
>p0-UE-PUCCH
>pSRS-Offset
> filterCoefficient

0
en0 (disabled)
TRUE
0
7
fc4


tpc-pdcch-ConfigPUCCH
release


tpc-pdcch-ConfigPUSCH
release


CQI-ReportConfig
> CQI-ReportPeriodic

release


SoundingRS-UL-ConfigDedicated
release


AntennaInfoDedicated
>transmissionMode



>codebookSubsetRestriction
>ue-TransmitAntennaSelection

tm1, tm2



N/A
release

If the number of PBCH antenna ports is one, tm1 is used as default; otherwise tm2 is used as default

SchedulingRequestConfig
release



9.2.5	Default values timers and constants
Parameters
Name
Value
Semantics description
Ver
t310
ms1000


n310
1


t311
ms1000


n311
1



10	Radio information related interactions between network nodes
10.1	General
This section specifies RRC messages that are transferred between network nodes. These RRC messages may be transferred to or from the UE via another Radio Access Technology. Consequently, these messages have similar characteristics as the RRC messages that are transferred across the E-UTRA radio interface, i.e. the same transfer syntax and protocol extension mechanisms apply.
10.2	Inter-node RRC messages 
10.2.1	General
This section specifies RRC messages that are sent either across the X2- or the S1-interface, either to or from the eNB, i.e. a single logical channel is used for all RRC messages transferred across network nodes. The information could originate from or be destined for another RAT.
	EUTRA-InterNodeDefinitions
This ASN.1 segment is the start of the EUTRA inter-node PDU definitions.
-- ASN1START

EUTRA-InterNodeDefinitions DEFINITIONS AUTOMATIC TAGS ::=

BEGIN

IMPORTS
	AntennaInfoCommon,
	CellIdentity,
	C-RNTI,
	DL-DCCH-Message,
	ARFCN-ValueEUTRA,
	MasterInformationBlock,
	MeasConfig,
	PhysCellId,
	RadioResourceConfigDedicated,
	SecurityAlgorithmConfig,
	ShortMAC-I,
	SystemInformationBlockType1,
	SystemInformationBlockType2,
	UECapabilityInformation,
	UE-CapabilityRAT-ContainerList
FROM EUTRA-RRC-Definitions;

-- ASN1STOP

10.2.2	Message definitions
	HandoverCommand
This message is used to transfer the handover command generated by the target eNB, which is transparently transferred by the source RAN to the UE.
Direction: target eNB to source eNB/ source RAN
HandoverCommand message
-- ASN1START

HandoverCommand ::=					SEQUENCE {
	criticalExtensions					CHOICE {
		c1									CHOICE{
			handoverCommand-r8					HandoverCommand-r8-IEs,
			spare7 NULL,
			spare6 NULL, spare5 NULL, spare4 NULL,
			spare3 NULL, spare2 NULL, spare1 NULL
		},
		criticalExtensionsFuture			SEQUENCE {}
	}
}

HandoverCommand-r8-IEs ::=			SEQUENCE {
	handoverCommandMessage				OCTET STRING (CONTAINING DL-DCCH-Message),
	nonCriticalExtension				SEQUENCE {}							OPTIONAL
}

-- ASN1STOP

HandoverCommand field descriptions
handoverCommandMessage
Contains the entire DL-DCCH-Message including the RRCConnectionReconfiguration message used to perform handover to E-UTRAN, generated (entirely) by the target eNB.

	HandoverPreparationInformation
This message is used to transfer the E-UTRA RRC information used by the target eNB during handover preparation, including UE capability information.
Direction: source eNB/ source RAN to target eNB
HandoverPreparationInformation message
-- ASN1START

HandoverPreparationInformation ::=	SEQUENCE {
	criticalExtensions					CHOICE {
		c1									CHOICE{
			handoverPreparationInformation-r8	HandoverPreparationInformation-r8-IEs,
			spare7 NULL,
			spare6 NULL, spare5 NULL, spare4 NULL,
			spare3 NULL, spare2 NULL, spare1 NULL
		},
		criticalExtensionsFuture			SEQUENCE {}
	}
}

HandoverPreparationInformation-r8-IEs ::= SEQUENCE {
	ue-RadioAccessCapabilityInfo		UE-CapabilityRAT-ContainerList,
	as-Config							AS-Config					OPTIONAL, 		-- Cond HO
	rrm-Config							RRM-Config					OPTIONAL,
	as-Context							AS-Context				OPTIONAL, 		-- Cond HO
	nonCriticalExtension				SEQUENCE {}					OPTIONAL
}

-- ASN1STOP

HandoverPreparationInformation field descriptions
ue-RadioAccessCapabilityInfo
E-UTRA radio access capabilities are always included and in case of inter-RAT handover to E-UTRA, UTRA radio access capabilities may be included. (If UTRA radio access capabilities are received from the source RAN, they are ignored by target eNB.) In case of inter-RAT handover to E-UTRA and the source is GERAN, GERAN capabilities are always included.
as-Config
The complete radio resource configuration. Applicable in case of intra-E-UTRA handover.
rrm-Config
Local E-UTRAN context used depending on the target nodes implementation, which is mainly used for the RRM purpose.
as-Context
Local E-UTRAN context required by the target eNB.

Conditional presence
Explanation
HO
The field is mandatory present in case of handover within E-UTRA; otherwise the field is not present.

	UERadioAccessCapabilityInformation
This message is used to transfer UE radio access capability information, covering both upload to and download from the EPC.
Direction: eNB to/ from EPC
UERadioAccessCapabilityInformation message
-- ASN1START

UERadioAccessCapabilityInformation ::= SEQUENCE {
	criticalExtensions					CHOICE {
		c1									CHOICE{
			ueRadioAccessCapabilityInformation-r8
												UERadioAccessCapabilityInformation-r8-IEs,
			spare7 NULL,
			spare6 NULL, spare5 NULL, spare4 NULL,
			spare3 NULL, spare2 NULL, spare1 NULL
		},
		criticalExtensionsFuture			SEQUENCE {}
	}
}

UERadioAccessCapabilityInformation-r8-IEs ::= SEQUENCE {
	ue-RadioAccessCapabilityInfo		OCTET STRING (CONTAINING UECapabilityInformation),
	nonCriticalExtension				SEQUENCE {}							OPTIONAL
}

-- ASN1STOP

UERadioAccessCapabilityInformation field descriptions
ue-RadioAccessCapabilityInfo
Including E-UTRA, GERAN, and CDMA2000-1xRTT Bandclass radio access capabilities (separated). UTRA radio access capabilities are not included.

10.3	Inter-node RRC information element definitions
	AS-Config
The AS-Config IE contains information about RRC configuration information in the source cell which can be utilized by target cell to determine the need to change the RRC configuration during the handover preparation phase. The information can also be used after the handover is successfully performed or during the RRC connection re-establishment.
AS-Config information element
-- ASN1START

AS-Config ::=				SEQUENCE {
	sourceMeasConfig					MeasConfig,
	sourceRadioResourceConfig			RadioResourceConfigDedicated,
	sourceSecurityAlgorithmConfig		SecurityAlgorithmConfig,
	sourceUE-Identity					C-RNTI,
	sourceMasterInformationBlock		MasterInformationBlock,
	sourceSystemInformationBlockType1	SystemInformationBlockType1,
	sourceSystemInformationBlockType2	SystemInformationBlockType2,
	antennaInfoCommon					AntennaInfoCommon,
	sourceDl-CarrierFreq                ARFCN-ValueEUTRA,
	...
}

-- ASN1STOP
NOTE:		The AS-Config re-uses information elements primarily created to cover the radio interface signalling requirements. Consequently, the information elements may include some parameters that are not relevant for the target eNB e.g. the SFN as included in the MasterInformationBlock.

AS-Config field descriptions
sourceMeasConfig
Measurement configuration in the source cell. The measurement configuration for all measurements existing in the source cell when handover is triggered shall be included. See 10.5.
sourceRadioResourceConfig
Radio configuration in the source cell. The radio resource configuration for all radio bearers existing in the source cell when handover is triggered shall be included. See 10.5.
sourceSecurityAlgorithmConfig
This field provides the AS integrity protection (SRBs) and AS ciphering (SRBs and DRBs) algorithm configuration used in the source cell.
sourceMasterInformationBlock
MasterInformationBlock transmitted in the source cell.
sourceSystemInformationBlockType1
SystemInformationBlockType1 transmitted in the source cell.
sourceSystemInformationBlockType2
SystemInformationBlockType2 transmitted in the source cell.
antennaInfoCommon
This field provides information about the number of antenna ports in the source cell.
sourceDL-CarrierFreq
Provides the parameter Downlink EARFCN in the source cell, see TS 36.101 [42].

	AS-Context
The IE AS-Context is used to transfer local E-UTRAN context required by the target eNB.

AS-Context information element
-- ASN1START

AS-Context ::=							SEQUENCE {
	reestablishmentInfo						ReestablishmentInfo			OPTIONAL	-- Cond HO
}

-- ASN1STOP

AS-Context field descriptions
reestablishmentInfo
Including information needed for the RRC connection re-establishment.

Conditional presence
Explanation
HO
The field is mandatory present in case of handover within E-UTRA; otherwise the field is not present.

	ReestablishmentInfo
The ReestablishmentInfo IE contains information needed for the RRC connection re-establishment.
ReestablishmentInfo information element
-- ASN1START

ReestablishmentInfo ::=				SEQUENCE {
	sourcePhysCellId					PhysCellId,
	targetCellShortMAC-I				ShortMAC-I,
	additionalReestabInfoList			AdditionalReestabInfoList				OPTIONAL,
	...
}

AdditionalReestabInfoList ::=		SEQUENCE ( SIZE (1..maxReestabInfo) ) OF AdditionalReestabInfo

AdditionalReestabInfo ::=	SEQUENCE{
	cellIdentity						CellIdentity,
	key-eNodeB-Star					Key-eNodeB-Star,
	shortMAC-I							ShortMAC-I
}

Key-eNodeB-Star ::=					BIT STRING (SIZE (256))

-- ASN1STOP

ReestablishmentInfo field descriptions
sourcePhyCellId
The physical cell identity of the source cell, used to determine the UE context in the target eNB at re-establishment.
targetCellShortMAC-I
The ShortMAC-I for the handover target cell, in order for potential re-establishment to succeed.
additionalReestabInfoList
Contains a list of shortMAC-I and KeNB* for cells under control of the target eNB, required for potential re-establishment by the UE in these cells to succeed.
Key-eNodeB-Star
Parameter KeNB*: See TS 33.401 [32, 7.2.8.4]. This parameter is only used for X2 handover, and for S1 handover, it shall be ignored by target eNB.

	RRM-Config
The RRM-Config IE contains information about UE specific RRM information before the handover which can be utilized by target eNB after the handover is successfully performed.
RRM-Config information element
-- ASN1START

RRM-Config ::=				SEQUENCE {
	ue-InactiveTime				ENUMERATED {
									s1, s2, s3, s5, s7, s10, s15, s20,
									s25, s30, s40, s50, min1, min1s20c, min1s40,
									min2, min2s30, min3, min3s30, min4, min5, min6,
									min7, min8, min9, min10, min12, min14, min17, min20,
									min24, min28, min33, min38, min44, min50, hr1,
									hr1min30, hr2, hr2min30, hr3, hr3min30, hr4, hr5, hr6,
									hr8, hr10, hr13, hr16, hr20, day1, day1hr12, day2,
									day2hr12, day3, day4, day5, day7, day10, day14, day19,
									day24, day30, dayMoreThan30}		OPTIONAL,
	...
}

-- ASN1STOP

RRM-Config field descriptions
ue-InactiveTime
Duration while UE has not received or transmitted any user data. Thus the timer is still running in case e.g., UE measures the neighbour cells for the HO purpose. Value s1 corresponds to 1 second, s2 corresponds to 2 seconds and so on. Value min1 corresponds to 1 minute, value min1s20 corresponds to 1 minute and 20 seconds, value min1s40 corresponds to 1 minute and 40 seconds and so on. Value hr1 corresponds to 1 hour, hr1min30 corresponds to 1 hour and 30 minutes and so on.

10.4	Inter-node RRC multiplicity and type constraint values
	Multiplicity and type constraints definitions
-- ASN1START

maxReestabInfo				INTEGER ::= 32	-- Maximum number of KeNB* and shortMAC-I forwarded
											-- at handover for re-establishment preparation

-- ASN1STOP

	End of EUTRA-InterNodeDefinitions
-- ASN1START

END

-- ASN1STOP

10.5	Mandatory information in AS-Config
The AS-Config transferred between source eNB and target-eNB shall include all IEs necessary to describe the AS context. The conditional presence in section 6 is only applicable for eNB to UE communication.
The "need" or "cond" statements are not applied in case of sending the IEs from source eNB to target eNB. Some information elements shall be included regardless of the "need" or "cond" e.g. discardTimer. The AS-Config re-uses information elements primarily created to cover the radio interface signalling requirements. The information elements may include some parameters that are not relevant for the target eNB e.g. the SFN as included in the MasterInformationBlock.
Within the sourceRadioResourceConfig the source eNB shall include fields that are optional for eNB to UE communication, if the functionality is configured unless explictly specified otherwise in the following:
-	in accordance with a condition that is explictly stated to be applicable; or
-	a default value is defined for the concerned field; and the configured value is the same as the default value that is defined; or
-	the need of the field is OP and the current UE configuration corresponds with the behaviour defined for absence of the field;

Name
Presence in clause 6
Comment
RadioResourceConfigDedicated


> srb-ToAddModList
>> rlc-Config
>> logicalChannelConfig
>>> ul-SpecificParameters
>>>> logicalChannelGroup
OPTIONAL, -Cond HO-Conn
OPTIONAL, -Cond Setup
OPTIONAL, -Cond Setup
OPTIONAL, -Cond UL
OPTIONAL, -Need OR
- 
- 
- 
- The conditional presence applies
-
>drb-ToAddModList
>> eps-BearerIdentity
>> pdcp-Config
>>> discardTimer
>>> rlc-AM
>>> rlc-UM
>> rlc-Config
>> logicalChannelIdentity
>> logicalChannelConfig
>>> ul-SpecificParameters
>>>> logicalChannelGroup
OPTIONAL, -Cond HO-toEUTRA
OPTIONAL, -Cond DRB-Setup
OPTIONAL, -Cond PDCP
OPTIONAL, -Cond Setup
OPTIONAL, -Cond Rlc-AM
OPTIONAL, -Cond Rlc-UM
OPTIONAL, -Cond Setup
OPTIONAL, -Cond DRB-Setup
OPTIONAL, -Cond Setup
OPTIONAL, -Cond UL
OPTIONAL, -Need OR
- 
- 
- 
- 
- The conditional presence applies
- The conditional presence applies
- 
- 
- 
- The conditional presence applies
- 
> mac-MainConfig
>> ul-SCH-Config
>>> maxHARQ-Tx
>> periodicBSR-Timer
>> drx-Config
>>> shortDRX
>> phr-Config
OPTIONAL, -Need ON
OPTIONAL, -Need ON
OPTIONAL, -Need ON
OPTIONAL, -Need ON
OPTIONAL, -Need ON
OPTIONAL, -Need ON
OPTIONAL, -Need ON
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
> sps-Config
>> sps-ConfigDL
>> sps-ConfigUL
>>> p0-Persistent
>>> twoIntervalsConfig
OPTIONAL, -Need ON
OPTIONAL, -Need ON
OPTIONAL, -Need ON
OPTIONAL, -Need OP
OPTIONAL, -Cond TDD
-
-
-
-
- The conditional presence applies
> physicalConfigDedicated
>> pdsch-ConfigDedicated
>> pucch-ConfigDedicated
>>> tdd-AckNackFeedbackMode
>> pusch-ConfigDedicated
>> uplinkPowerControlDedicated
>> tpc-PDCCH-ConfigPUCCH
>> tpc-PDCCH-ConfigPUSCH
>> cqi-ReportConfig
>>> cqi-ReportingModeAperiodic
>>> cqi-ReportPeriodic
>> soundingRS-UL-ConfigDedicated
>> antennaInfo
>>> codebookSubsetRestriction
>> schedulingRequestConfig
OPTIONAL, -Need ON
OPTIONAL, -Need ON
OPTIONAL, -Need ON
OPTIONAL, -Cond TDD
OPTIONAL, -Need ON
OPTIONAL, -Need ON
OPTIONAL, -Need ON
OPTIONAL, -Need ON
OPTIONAL, -Need ON
OPTIONAL, -Need OR
OPTIONAL, -Need ON
OPTIONAL, -Need ON
OPTIONAL, -Need ON
OPTIONAL, -Cond TM
OPTIONAL, -Need ON
-
-
-
- The conditional presence applies
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
- The conditional presence applies
-

For the measurement configuration, a corresponding operation as 5.5.6.1 is executed by target eNB.
Within the sourceMeasConfig the source eNB shall include fields that are optional for eNB to UE communication, if the functionality is configured unless explictly specified otherwise in the following:
-	in accordance with a condition that is explictly stated to be applicable; or
-	a default value is defined for the concerned field; and the configured value is the same as the default value that is defined; or
-	the need of the field is OP and the current UE configuration corresponds with the behaviour defined for absence of the field;
Name
Presence in clause 6
Comment
MeasConfig


> measObjectToAddModList
>> measObject
>>> measObjectEUTRA   
>>>> cellsToAddModList
>>>> blackCellsToAddModList
>>>> cellForWhichToReportCGI
>>> MeasObjectUTRA
>>>> cellsToAddModList
>>>> cellForWhichToReportCGI
>>> MeasObjectGERAN
>>>> cellForWhichToReportCGI
>>> MeasObjectCDMA2000
>>>> searchWindowSize
>>>> cellsToAddModList		
>>>> cellForWhichToReportCGI
OPTIONAL, -Need ON
-
-
OPTIONAL, -Need ON
OPTIONAL, -Need ON
OPTIONAL, -Need ON
-
OPTIONAL, -Need ON
OPTIONAL, -Need ON
-
OPTIONAL, -Need ON
-
OPTIONAL, -Need ON
OPTIONAL, -Need ON
OPTIONAL, -Need ON
- 
-
-
-
- 
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
> reportConfigToAddModList
OPTIONAL, -Need ON
- 
> measIdToAddModList
OPTIONAL, -Need ON
- 
> quantityConfig
>> quantityConfigEUTRA
>> quantityConfigUTRA
>> quantityConfigGERAN
>> quantityConfigCDMA2000
OPTIONAL, -Need ON
OPTIONAL, -Need ON
OPTIONAL, -Need ON
OPTIONAL, -Need ON
OPTIONAL, -Need ON
- 
-
-
-
-
> s-Measure
OPTIONAL, -Need ON
-
> preRegistrationInfoHRPD
>> preRegistrationZoneId
>> secondaryPreRegistrationZoneIdList
OPTIONAL, -Need OP
OPTIONAL, -Cond PreRegAllowed
OPTIONAL, -Need OR

- The conditional presence applies
-
> speedStatePars
OPTIONAL, -Need ON
-

11	UE capability related constraints and performance requirements
11.1	UE capability related constraints
The following table lists constraints regarding the UE capabilities that E-UTRAN is assumed to take into account.
Parameter
Description
Value
#DRBs
The number of DRBs that a UE of categories 1- 5 shall support
8
#RLC-AM
The number of RLC AM entities that a UE of categories 1- 5 shall support
10

11.2	Processing delay requirements for RRC procedures
The UE performance requirements for RRC procedures are specified in the following table, by means of a value N:
N = the number of 1ms subframes from the end of reception of the E-UTRAN -> UE message on the UE physical layer up to when the UE shall be ready for the reception of uplink grant for the UE -> E-UTRAN response message with no access delay other than the TTI-alignment (e.g. excluding delays caused by scheduling, the random access procedure or physical layer synchronisation).

Figure 11.2-1: Illustration of RRC procedure delay



Procedure title:
E-UTRAN -> UE
UE -> E-UTRAN
N
Notes
RRC Connection Control Procedures
RRC connection establishment

RRCConnectionSetup
RRCConnectionSetupComplete
15

RRC connection release
RRCConnectionSetupRelease

NA


RRC connection re-configuration (radio resource configuration)

RRCConnectionReconfiguration
RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete
15

RRC connection re-configuration (measurement configuration)

RRCConnectionReconfiguration
RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete
15

RRC connection re-configuration (intra-LTE mobility)

RRCConnectionReconfiguration
RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete
15

RRC connection re-establishment

RRCConnectionReestablishment
RRCConnectionReestablishmentComplete
15

Initial security activation
SecurityModeCommand
SecurityModeCommandComplete/SecurityModeCommandFailure
10

Initial security activation + RRC connection re-configuration (RB establishment)
SecurityModeCommand, RRCConnectionReconfiguration
RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete
20
The two DL messages are transmitted in the same TTI
Paging
Paging

NA

Inter RAT mobilty
Handover to E-UTRA
RRCConnectionReconfiguration (sent by other RAT)
RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete
NA

Handover from E-UTRA
MobilityFromEUTRACommand

NA

Handover from E-UTRA to CDMA2000
HandoverFromEUTRAPreparationRequest (CDMA2000)

NA
Used to trigger the handover preparation procedure with a CDMA2000 RAT.
Measurement procedures
Measurement Reporting

MeasurementReport
NA

Other procedures
UE capability transfer
UECapabilityEnquiry
UECapabilityInformation
10


Annex A (informative):
Guidelines, mainly on use of ASN.1
Editors note	No agreements have been reached concerning the extension of RRC PDUs so far. Any statements in this section about the protocol extension mechanism should be considered as FFS.
A.1	Introduction
The following clauses contain guidelines for the specification of RRC protocol data units (PDUs) with ASN.1.
A.2	Procedural specification
A.2.1	General principles
The procedural specification provides an overall high level description regarding the UE behaviour in a particular scenario.
It should be noted that most of the UE behaviour associated with the reception of a particular field is covered by the applicable parts of the PDU specification. The procedural specification may also include specific details of the UE behaviour upon reception of a field, but typically this should be done only for cases that are not easy to capture in the PDU section e.g. general actions, more complicated actions depending on the value of multiple fields.
Likewise, the procedural specification need not specify the UE requirements regarding the setting of fields within the messages that are send to E-UTRAN i.e. this may also be covered by the PDU specification.
A.2.2	More detailed aspects
The following more detailed conventions should be used:
-	Bullets:
-	Capitals should be used in the same manner as in other parts of the procedural text i.e. in most cases no capital applies since the bullets are part of the sentence starting with 'The UE shall:'
-	All bullets, including the last one in a sub-clause, should end with a semi-colon i.e. an ';'
-	Conditions
-	Whenever multiple conditions apply, a semi-colon should be used at the end of each conditions with the exception of the last one, i.e. as in 'if cond1; or cond2: 
A.3	PDU specification
A.3.1	General principles
A.3.1.1	ASN.1 sections
The RRC PDU contents are formally and completely described using abstract syntax notation (ASN.1), see X.680 [13], X.681 (02/2002) [14].
The complete ASN.1 code is divided into a number of ASN.1 sections in the specifications. In order to facilitate the extraction of the complete ASN.1 code from the specification, each ASN.1 section begins with a text paragraph consisting entirely of an ASN.1 start tag, which consists of a double hyphen followed by a single space and the text string "ASN1START" (in all upper case letters). Each ASN.1 section ends with a text paragraph consisting entirely of an ASN.1 stop tag, which consists of a double hyphen followed by a single space and the text "ASN1STOP" (in all upper case letters):
-- ASN1START

-- ASN1STOP

The text paragraphs containing the ASN.1 start and stop tags should not contain any ASN.1 code significant for the complete description of the RRC PDU contents. The complete ASN.1 code may be extracted by copying all the text paragraphs between an ASN.1 start tag and the following ASN.1 stop tag in the order they appear, throughout the specification.
NOTE:	A typical procedure for extraction of the complete ASN.1 code consists of a first step where the entire RRC PDU contents description (ultimately the entire specification) is saved into a plain text (ASCII) file format, followed by a second step where the actual extraction takes place, based on the occurrence of the ASN.1 start and stop tags.
A.3.1.2	ASN.1 identifier naming conventions
The naming of identifiers (i.e., the ASN.1 field and type identifiers) should be based on the following guidelines:
-	Message (PDU) identifiers should be ordinary mixed case without hyphenation. These identifiers, e.g., the RRCConnectionModificationCommand, should be used for reference in the procedure text. Abbreviated forms of these identifiers should not be used.
-	Type identifiers other than PDU identifiers should be ordinary mixed case, with hyphenation used to set off acronyms only where an adjacent letter is a capital, e.g., EstablishmentCause, SelectedPLMN (not Selected-PLMN, since the d in Selected is lowercase), InitialUE-Identity and MeasSFN-SFN-TimeDifference.
-	Field identifiers shall start with a lowercase letter and use mixed case thereafter, e.g., establishmentCause. If a field identifier begins with an acronym (which would normally be in upper case), the entire acronym is lowercase (plmn-Identity, not pLMN-Identity). The acronym is set off with a hyphen (ue-Identity, not ueIdentity), in order to facilitate a consistent search pattern with corresponding type identifiers.
-	Identifiers that are likely to be keywords of some language, especially widely used languages, such as C++ or Java, should be avoided to the extent possible.
-	Identifiers, other than PDU identifiers, longer than 25 characters should be avoided where possible. It is recommended to use abbreviations, which should be done in a consistent manner i.e. use 'Meas' instead of 'Measurement' for all occurrences. Examples of typical abbreviations are given in table A.3.1.2.1-1 below.
-	For future extension: where versions of an ASN.1 field or type need to be distinguished by release, a suffix of the form "rX" is used, e.g., Foo-r9 for the Rel-9 version of the ASN.1 type Foo. If an ASN.1 field or type provides only the extension of a corresponding earlier field or type  (see sub-clause A.4), a suffix of the form "vXYZext" is used, e.g., AnElement-v10b0ext for the extension of the ASN.1 type AnElement introduced in the version 10.11.0 of the specification. Digits 0...9, 10, 11, etc. are used to represent the first digit of the version number. Lower case letters a, b, c, etc. are used to represent the second (and third) digit of the version number if they are greater than 9.
-	More generally, in case there is a need to distinguish different variants of an ASN.1 field or IE, a suffix should be added at the end of the identifiers e.g. MeasObjectUTRAN, ConfigCommon. When there is no particular need to distinguish the fields (e.g. because the field is included in different IEs), a common field identifier name may be used. This may be attractive e.g. in case the procedural specification is the same for the different variants.
Table A.3.1.2-1: Examples of typical abbreviations used in ASN.1 identifiers
Abbreviation
Abbreviated word
Conf
Confirmation
Config
Configuration
DL
Downlink
Freq
Frequency
Id
Identity
Ind
Indication
Info
Information
Meas
Measurement
Neigh
Neighbour(ing)
Param(s)
Parameter(s)
Persist
Persistent
Phys
Physical
Reestab
Reestablishment
Req
Request
Sched
Scheduling
Thresh
Threshold
Transm
Transmission
UL
Uplink

NOTE:		The table A.3.1.2.1-1 is not exhaustive. Additional abbreviations may be used in ASN.1 identifiers when needed.
A.3.1.3	Text references using ASN.1 identifiers
A text reference into the RRC PDU contents description from other parts of the specification is made using the ASN.1 field or type identifier of the referenced element. The ASN.1 field and type identifiers used in text references should be in the italic font style. The "do not check spelling and grammar" attribute in Word should be set. Quotation marks (i.e., " ") should not be used around the ASN.1 field or type identifier.
A reference to an RRC PDU type should be made using the corresponding ASN.1 type identifier followed by the word "message", e.g., a reference to the RRCConnectionRelease message.
A reference to a specific part of an RRC PDU, or to a specific part of any other ASN.1 type, should be made using the corresponding ASN.1 field identifier followed by the word "field", e.g., a reference to the prioritisedBitRate field in the example below.
-- /example/ ASN1START

LogicalChannelConfig ::=			SEQUENCE {
	ul-SpecificParameters				SEQUENCE {
		priority							Priority,
		prioritisedBitRate					PrioritisedBitRate,
		bucketSizeDuration					BucketSizeDuration,
		logicalChannelGroup					INTEGER (0..3)
	}		OPTIONAL
}

-- ASN1STOP

NOTE:	All the ASN.1 start tags in the ASN.1 sections, used as examples in this annex to the specification, are deliberately distorted, in order not to include them when the ASN.1 description of the RRC PDU contents is extracted from the specification.
A reference to a specific type of information element should be made using the corresponding ASN.1 type identifier preceded by the acronym "IE", e.g., a reference to the IE LogicalChannelConfig in the example above.
References to a specific type of information element should only be used when those are generic, i.e., without regard to the particular context wherein the specific type of information element is used. If the reference is related to a particular context, e.g., an RRC PDU type (message) wherein the information element is used, the corresponding field identifier in that context should be used in the text reference.
A reference to a specific value of an ASN.1 field should be made using the corresponding ASN.1 value while using quotation marks (i.e., " ") around the ASN.1 value, e.g., 'if the status field is set to value "true"'.
A.3.2	High-level message structure
Within each logical channel type, the associated RRC PDU (message) types are alternatives within a CHOICE, as shown in the example below.
-- /example/ ASN1START

DL-DCCH-Message ::= SEQUENCE {
	message					DL-DCCH-MessageType
}

DL-DCCH-MessageType ::= CHOICE {
	c1						CHOICE {
		dlInformationTransfer					DLInformationTransfer,
		handoverFromEUTRAPreparationRequest		HandoverFromEUTRAPreparationRequest,
		mobilityFromEUTRACommand				MobilityFromEUTRACommand,
		rrcConnectionReconfiguration			RRCConnectionReconfiguration,
		rrcConnectionRelease					RRCConnectionRelease,
		securityModeCommand						SecurityModeCommand,
		ueCapabilityEnquiry						UECapabilityEnquiry,
		spare1 NULL
	},
	messageClassExtension	SEQUENCE {}
}

-- ASN1STOP

A nested two-level CHOICE structure is used, where the alternative PDU types are alternatives within the inner level c1 CHOICE.
Spare alternatives (i.e., spare1 in this case) may be included within the c1 CHOICE to facilitate future extension. The number of such spare alternatives should not extend the total number of alternatives beyond an integer-power-of-two number of alternatives (i.e., eight in this case).
Further extension of the number of alternative PDU types is facilitated using the messageClassExtension alternative in the outer level CHOICE.
A.3.3	Message definition
Each PDU (message) type is specified in an ASN.1 section similar to the one shown in the example below.
-- /example/ ASN1START

RRCConnectionReconfiguration ::=	SEQUENCE {
	rrc-TransactionIdentifier			RRC-TransactionIdentifier,
	criticalExtensions					CHOICE {
		c1									CHOICE{
			rrcConnectionReconfiguration-r8		RRCConnectionReconfiguration-r8-IEs,
			spare3 NULL, spare2 NULL, spare1 NULL
		},
		criticalExtensionsFuture			SEQUENCE {}
	}
}

RRCConnectionReconfiguration-r8-IEs ::= SEQUENCE {
	-- Enter the IEs here.
	...
}

-- ASN1STOP

Hooks for critical and non-critical extension should normally be included in the PDU type specification. How these hooks are used is further described in sub-clause A.4.
Critical extensions are characterised by a redefinition of the PDU contents and need to be governed by a mechanism for protocol version agreement between the encoder and the decoder of the PDU, such that the encoder is prevented from sending a critically extended version of the PDU type, which is not comprehended by the decoder.
Critical extension of a PDU type is facilitated by a two-level CHOICE structure, where the alternative PDU contents are alternatives within the inner level c1 CHOICE. Spare alternatives (i.e., spare3 down to spare1 in this case) may be included within the c1 CHOICE. The number of spare alternatives to be included in the original PDU specification should be decided case by case, based on the expected rate of critical extension in the future releases of the protocol.
Further critical extension, when the spare alternatives from the original specifications are used up, is facilitated using the criticalExtensionsFuture in the outer level CHOICE.
In PDU types where critical extension is not expected in the future releases of the protocol, the inner level c1 CHOICE and the spare alternatives may be excluded, as shown in the example below.
-- /example/ ASN1START

RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete ::= SEQUENCE {
	rrc-TransactionIdentifier			RRC-TransactionIdentifier,
	criticalExtensions					CHOICE {
		rrcConnectionReconfigurationComplete-r8
											RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete-r8-IEs,
		criticalExtensionsFuture			SEQUENCE {}
	}
}

RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete-r8-IEs ::= SEQUENCE {
	-- Enter the IEs here. --														-- Cond condTag
	...
}

-- ASN1STOP

Non-critical extensions are characterised by the addition of new information to the original specification of the PDU type. If not comprehended, a non-critical extension may be skipped by the decoder, whilst the decoder is still able to complete the decoding of the comprehended parts of the PDU contents.
Non-critical extensions at locations other than the end of the message or other than at the end of a field contained in a BIT or OCTET STRING are facilitated by use of the ASN.1 extension marker "...". The original specification of a PDU type should normally include the extension marker at the end of the sequence of information elements contained.
Non-critical extensions at the end of the message or at the end of a field that is contained in a BIT or OCTET STRING are facilitated by use of an empty sequence e.g. as shown in the following example:
-- /example/ ASN1START

RRCMessage-r8-IEs ::= 					SEQUENCE {
	field1									InformationElement1,
	field2									InformationElement2,
	nonCriticalExtension					SEQUENCE {}						OPTIONAL	-- Need OP
}

-- ASN1STOP

The ASN.1 section specifying the contents of a PDU type may be followed by a field description table where a further description of, e.g., the semantic properties of the fields may be included. The general format of this table is shown in the example below. The field description table is absent in case there are no fields for which further description needs to be provided e.g. because the PDU does not include any fields, or because an IE is defined for each field while there is nothing specific regarding the use of this IE that needs to be specified.
%PDU-TypeIdentifier% field descriptions
%field identifier%
Field description.
%field identifier%
Field description.

The field description table has one column. The header row shall contain the ASN.1 type identifier of the PDU type.
The following rows are used to provide field descriptions. Each row shall include a first paragraph with a field identifier (in bold and italic font style) referring to the part of the PDU to which it applies. The following paragraphs at the same row may include (in regular font style), e.g., semantic description, references to other specifications and/ or specification of value units, which are relevant for the particular part of the PDU.
The parts of the PDU contents that do not require a field description shall be omitted from the field description table.
A.3.4	Information elements
Each IE (information element) type is specified in an ASN.1 section similar to the one shown in the example below.
-- /example/ ASN1START

PRACH-ConfigSIB ::=					SEQUENCE {
	rootSequenceIndex					INTEGER (0..1023),
	prach-ConfigInfo					PRACH-ConfigInfo
}

PRACH-Config ::=					SEQUENCE {
	rootSequenceIndex					INTEGER (0..1023),
	prach-ConfigInfo					PRACH-ConfigInfo					OPTIONAL	-- Need ON
}

PRACH-ConfigInfo ::=				SEQUENCE {
	prach-ConfigIndex					ENUMERATED {ffs},
	highSpeedFlag						ENUMERATED {ffs},
	zeroCorrelationZoneConfig			ENUMERATED {ffs}
}

-- ASN1STOP

IEs should be introduced whenever there are multiple fields for which the same set of values apply. IEs may also be defined for other reasons e.g. to break down a ASN.1 definition in to smaller pieces.
A group of closely related IE type definitions, like the IEs PRACH-ConfigSIB and PRACH-Config in this example, are preferably placed together in a common ASN.1 section. The IE type identifiers should in this case have a common base, defined as the generic type identifier. It may be complemented by a suffix to distinguish the different variants. The "PRACH-Config" is the generic type identifier in this example, and the "SIB" suffix is added to distinguish the variant. The sub-clause heading and generic references to a group of closely related IEs defined in this way should use the generic type identifier.
The same principle should apply if a new version, or an extension version, of an existing IE is created for critical or non-critical extension of the protocol (see sub-clause A.4). The new version, or the extension version, of the IE is included in the same ASN.1 section defining the original. A suffix is added to the type identifier, using the naming conventions defined in sub-clause A.3.1.2, indicating the release or version of the where the new version, or extension version, was introduced.
Local IE type definitions, like the IE PRACH-ConfigInfo in the example above, may be included in the ASN.1 section and be referenced in the other IE types defined in the same ASN.1 section. The use of locally defined IE types should be encouraged, as a tool to break up large and complex IE type definitions. It can improve the readability of the code. There may also be a benefit for the software implementation of the protocol end-points, as these IE types are typically provided by the ASN.1 compiler as independent data elements, to be used in the software implementation.
An IE type defined in a local context, like the IE PRACH-ConfigInfo, should not be referenced directly from other ASN.1 sections in the RRC specification. An IE type which is referenced in more than one ASN.1 section should be defined in a separate sub-clause, with a separate heading and a separate ASN.1 section (possibly as one in a set of closely related IE types, like the IEs PRACH-ConfigSIB and PRACH-Config in the example above). Such IE types are also referred to as 'global IEs'.
NOTE:	Referring to an IE type, that is defined as a local IE type in the context of another ASN.1 section, does not generate an ASN.1 compilation error. Nevertheless, using a locally defined IE type in that way makes the IE type definition difficult to find, as it would not be visible at an outline level of the specification. It should be avoided.
The ASN.1 section specifying the contents of one or more IE types, like in the example above, may be followed by a field description table, where a further description of, e.g., the semantic properties of the fields of the information elements may be included. This table may be absent, similar as indicated in sub-clause A.3.3 for the specification of the PDU type. The general format of the field description table is the same as shown in sub-clause A.3.3 for the specification of the PDU type.
A.3.5	Fields with optional presence
A field with optional presence may be declared with the keyword DEFAULT. It identifies a default value to be assumed, if the sender does not include a value for that field in the encoding:
-- /example/ ASN1START

PreambleInfo ::=					SEQUENCE {
	numberOfRA-Preambles				INTEGER (1..64)						DEFAULT 1,
	...
}

-- ASN1STOP

Alternatively, a field with optional presence may be declared with the keyword OPTIONAL. It identifies a field for which a value can be omitted. The omission carries semantics, which is different from any normal value of the field:
-- /example/ ASN1START

PRACH-Config ::=				SEQUENCE {
	rootSequenceIndex					INTEGER (0..1023),
	prach-ConfigInfo					PRACH-ConfigInfo					OPTIONAL	-- Need ON
}

-- ASN1STOP

The semantics of an optionally present field, in the case it is omitted, should be indicated at the end of the paragraph including the keyword OPTIONAL, using a short comment text with a need statement. The need statement includes the keyword "Need", followed by one of the predefined semantics tags (OP, ON or OR) defined in sub-clause 6.1. If the semantics tag OP is used, the semantics of the absent field are further specified either in the field description table following the ASN.1 section, or in procedure text.
A.3.6	Fields with conditional presence
A field with conditional presence is declared with the keyword OPTIONAL. In addition, a short comment text shall be included at the end of the paragraph including the keyword OPTIONAL. The comment text includes the keyword "Cond", followed by a condition tag associated with the field ("UL" in this example):
-- /example/ ASN1START

LogicalChannelConfig ::=			SEQUENCE {
	ul-SpecificParameters				SEQUENCE {
		priority							INTEGER (0),
		...
	}		OPTIONAL																	-- Cond UL
}

-- ASN1STOP

When conditionally present fields are included in an ASN.1 section, the field description table after the ASN.1 section shall be followed by a conditional presence table. The conditional presence table specifies the conditions for including the fields with conditional presence in the particular ASN.1 section.
Conditional presence
Explanation
UL
Specification of the conditions for including the field associated with the condition tag = "UL". Semantics in case of optional presence under certain conditions may also be specified.

The conditional presence table has two columns. The first column (heading: "Conditional presence") contains the condition tag (in italic font style), which links the fields with a condition tag in the ASN.1 section to an entry in the table. The second column (heading: "Explanation") contains a text specification of the conditions and requirements for the presence of the field. The second column may also include semantics, in case of an optional presence of the field, under certain conditions i.e. using the same predefined tags as defined for optional fields in A.3.5.
If the ASN.1 section does not include any fields with conditional presence, the conditional presence table shall not be included.
Whenever a field is only applicable in specific cases e.g. TDD, use of conditional presence should be considered.
A.3.7	Guidelines on use of lists with elements of SEQUENCE type
Where an information element has the form of a list (the SEQUENCE OF construct in ASN.1) with the type of the list elements being a SEQUENCE data type, an information element shall be defined for the list elements even if it would not otherwise be needed.
For example, a list of PLMN identities with reservation flags is defined as in the following example:
-- /example/ ASN1START

PLMN-IdentityList ::=				SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..6)) OF PLMN-IdentityList

PLMN-IdentityList ::=				SEQUENCE {
	plmn-Identity						PLMN-Identity,
	cellReservedForOperatorUse			ENUMERATED {reserved, notReserved}
}

-- ASN1STOP
rather than as in the following (bad) example, which may cause generated code to contain types with unpredictable names:
-- /bad example/ ASN1START

PLMN-IdentityList ::=					SEQUENCE (SIZE (1..6)) OF SEQUENCE {
	plmn-Identity							PLMN-Identity,
	cellReservedForOperatorUse				ENUMERATED {reserved, notReserved}
}

-- ASN1STOP
A.4	Extension of the PDU specifications
A.4.1	General principles to ensure compatibility
It is essential that extension of the protocol does not affect interoperability i.e. it is essential that implementations based on different versions of the RRC protocol are able to interoperate. In particular, this requirement applies for the following kind of protocol extensions:
-	Introduction of new PDU types (i.e. these should not cause unexpected behaviour or damage).
-	Introduction of additional fields in a PDUs (i.e. it should be possible to ignore uncomprehended extensions without affecting the handling of the other parts of the message).
-	Introduction of additional values of a field of PDUs. If used, the behaviour upon reception of an uncomprehended value should be defined.
It should be noted that the PDU extension mechanism may depend on the logical channel used to transfer the message e.g. for some PDUs an implementation may be aware of the protocol version of the peer in which case selective ignoring of extensions may not be required.
A.4.2	Critical extension of messages
The mechanisms to critically extend a message are defined in A.3.3. There are both "outer branch" and "inner branch" mechanisms available. The "outer branch" consists of a CHOICE having the name criticalExtensions, with two values, c1 and criticalExtensionsFuture. The criticalExtensionsFuture branch consists of an empty SEQUENCE, while the c1 branch contains the "inner branch" mechanism.
The "inner branch" structure is a CHOICE with values of the form "MessageName-rX-IEs" (e.g., "RRCConnectionReconfiguration-r8-IEs") or "spareX", with the spare values having type NULL.  The "-rX-IEs" structures contain the complete structure of the message IEs for the appropriate release; i.e., the critical extension branch for the Rel-10 version of a message includes all Rel-8 and Rel-9 fields (that are not obviated in the later version), rather than containing only the additional Rel-10 fields.
The following guidelines may be used when deciding which mechanism to introduce for a particular message, i.e. only an 'outer branch', or an 'outer branch' in combination with an 'inner branch' including a certain number of spares:
-	For certain messages, e.g. initial uplink messages, messages transmitted on a broadcast channel, critical extension may not be applicable.
-	An outer branch may be sufficient for messages not including any fields.
-	The number of spares within inner branch should reflect the likelihood that the message will be critically extended in future releases (since each release with a critical extension for the message consumes one of the spare values). The estimation of the critical extension likelyhood may be based on the number, size and changeability of the fields included in the message.
-	In messages where an inner branch extension mechanism is available, all spare values of the inner branch should be used before any critical extensions are added using the outer branch.
A.4.3	Non-critical extension of messages
The mechanisms to extend a message in a non-critical manner are defined in A.3.3. W.r.t. the use of extension markers, the following additional guidelines apply:
-	The extension marker ("") is the primary non-critical extension mechanism that is used unless a length determinant is not required. Examples of cases where a length determinant is not required:
-	at the end of a message,
-	at the end of a structure contained in a BIT STRING or OCTET STRING
-	Extension markers within SEQUENCE
-	Extension markers are primarily, but not exclusively, introduced at the higher nesting levels
-	Extension markers are introduced for a SEQUENCE comprising several fields as well as for information elements which extension would result in complex structures without it (e.g. re-introducing another list)
-	Extension markers are introduced to make it possible to maintain important information structures e.g. parameters relevant for one particular RAT
-	Extension markers are also used for size critical messages (i.e. messages on BCCH, PCCH and CCCH), although introduced somewhat more carefully
-	Extension markers within ENUMERATED
-	Spare values are used until the number of values reaches the next power of 2, while the extension marker caters for extension beyond that limit
-	Extension markers within CHOICE:
-	Extension markers are introduced when extension is foreseen and when comprehension is not required by the receiver i.e. a behaviour is defined for the case where the receiver cannot comprehend the extended value (e.g. ignoring an optional CHOICE field)
There are no additional guidelines w.r.t. the use of non-critical extensions at the end of a message/ of a field contained in an OCTET or BIT STRING.
A.5	Guidelines regarding inclusion of transaction identifiers in RRC messages
The following rules provide guidance on which messages should include a Transaction identifier
1:	DL messages on CCCH that move UE to RRC-Idle should not include the RRC transaction identifier.
2:	All network initiated DL messages by default should include the RRC transaction identifier.
3:	All UL messages that are direct response to a DL message with an RRC Transaction identifier should include the RRC Transaction identifier.
4:	All UL messages that require a direct DL response message should include an RRC transaction identifier.
5:	All UL messages that are not in response to a DL message nor require a corresponding response from the network should not include the RRC Transaction identifier.
A.6	Protection of RRC messages (informative)
The following list provides information which messages can be sent (unprotected) prior to security activation and which messages can be sent unprotected after security activation.
PMessages that can be sent (unprotected) prior to security activation
A - IMessages that can be sent without integrity protection after security activation
A - CMessages that can be sent unciphered after security activation
NA Message can never be sent after security activation
Message
P
A-I
A-C
Comment
CSFBParametersRequestCDMA2000
+
-
-

CSFBParametersResponseCDMA2000
+
-
-

CounterCheck
-
- 
- 

CounterCheckResponse
-
- 
- 

DLInformationTransfer
+
-
-

HandoverFromEUTRAPreparationRequest (CDMA2000)
-
- 
- 

MasterInformationBlock
+
+
+

MeasurementReport
+
-
-
Justification for case P: RAN2 agreed that measurement configuration may be sent prior to security activation
MobilityFromEUTRACommand
-
- 
-

Paging
+
+
+

RRCConnectionReconfiguration
+
-
-
The message shall not be sent unprotected before security activation if it is used to perform handover or to establish SRB2 and DRBs
RRCConnectionReconfigurationComplete
+
-
-
Unprotected, if sent as response to RRCConnectionReconfiguration which was sent before security activation
RRCConnectionReestablishment
-
+
+
This message is not protected by PDCP operation.
RRCConnectionReestablishmentComplete
-
-
-

RRCConnectionReestablishmentReject
-
+
+
One reason to send this may be that the security context has been lost, therefore sent as unprotected. 
RRCConnectionReestablishmentRequest
-
-
+
This message is not protected by PDCP operation. However a short MAC-I is included.
RRCConnectionReject
+
NA
NA

RRCConnectionRelease
+
-
-
Jusitification for P: If the RRC connection only for signalling not requiring DRBs or ciphered messages, or the signalling connection has to be released prematurily, this message is sent as unprotected.
RRCConnectionRequest
+
NA
NA

RRCConnectionSetup
+
NA
NA

RRCConnectionSetupComplete
+
NA
NA

SecurityModeCommand
+
NA
NA
Integrity protection applied, but no ciphering (integrity verification done after the message received by RRC)
SecurityModeComplete
-
NA
NA
Integrity protection applied, but no ciphering. Ciphering is applied after completing the procedure.
SecurityModeFailure
+
NA
NA
Neither integrity protection nor ciphering applied.
SystemInformation
+
+
+

SystemInformationBlockType1
+
+
+

UECapabilityEnquiry
+
-
-

UECapabilityInformation
+
-
-

ULHandoverPreparationTransfer (CDMA2000)
-
-
-
This message should follow HandoverFromEUTRAPreparationRequest
ULInformationTransfer
+
-
-


A.7	Miscellaneous
The following miscellaneous conventions should be used:
-	References: Whenever another specification is referenced, the specification number and optionally the relevant subclause, table or figure, should be indicated in addition to the pointer to the References section e.g. as follows: 'see TS 36.212 [22, 5.3.3.1.6]'.
Annex B (normative): Release 8 AS feature handling
B.1	Feature group indicators
This annex contains the definitions of the bits in field featureGroupIndicators. 
In this release of the protocol, the UE shall include the field featureGroupIndicators in the IE UE-EUTRA-Capability. For a specific indicator, if all functionalities for a feature group listed in Table B.1-1 have been implemented and tested, the UE shall set the indicator as one (1), else (i.e. if any one of the functionalities in a feature group listed in Table B.1-1, which have not been implemented or tested), the UE shall set the indicator as zero (0).
The UE shall set all indicators, which do not have a definition in the table B.1-1, as zero.
If the optional field featureGroupIndicators is not included by UE supporting future release, the network may assume that UE supports all features listed in Table B.1-1 and deployed in the network.
Table B.1-1: Defintions of feature group indicators
Index of indicator (bit number)
Definition
(description of the supported functionality, if indicator set to one)
Notes
1 (leftmost bit)
- Intra-subframe frequency hopping for PUSCH scheduled by UL grant
- Extended cyclic prefix with ?f = 7.5kHz for DL resource block
- DCI format 3a (TPC commands for PUCCH and PUSCH with single bit power adjustments)
- Multi-user MIMO for PDSCH
- Aperiodic CQI/PMI/RI reporting on PUSCH: Mode 2-0  UE selected subband CQI without PMI
- Aperiodic CQI/PMI/RI reporting on PUSCH: Mode 2-2  UE selected subband CQI with multiple PMI

2
- Simultaneous CQI and ACK/NACK on PUCCH, i.e. PUCCH format 2a and 2b
- Absolute TPC command for PUSCH
- Resource allocation type 1 for PDSCH
- Periodic CQI/PMI/RI reporting on PUCCH: Mode 2-0  UE selected subband CQI without PMI
- Periodic CQI/PMI/RI reporting on PUCCH: Mode 2-1  UE selected subband CQI with single PMI

3
- Semi-persistent scheduling
- TTI bundling
- 5bit RLC UM SN
- 7bit PDCP SN
- can only be set to 1 if the UE has set bit number 7 to 1.
4
- Short DRX cycle
- can only be set to 1 if the UE has set bit number 5 to 1.
5
- Long DRX cycle
- DRX command MAC control element

6
- Prioritised bit rate

7
- RLC UM
- can only be set to 0 if the UE does not support voice
8
- EUTRA RRC_CONNECTED to UTRA CELL_DCH PS handover
- can only be set to 1 if the UE has set bit number 22 to 1
9
- EUTRA RRC_CONNECTED to GERAN GSM_Dedicated handover
- related to SR-VCC
- can only be set to 1 if the UE has set bit number 23 to 1
10
- EUTRA RRC_CONNECTED to GERAN (Packet_) Idle by Cell Change Order
- EUTRA RRC_CONNECTED to GERAN (Packet_) Idle by Cell Change Order with NACC (Network Assisted Cell Change)

11
- EUTRA RRC_CONNECTED to CDMA2000 1xRTT CS Active handover
- can only be set to 1 if the UE has sets bit number 24 to 1
12
- EUTRA RRC_CONNECTED to CDMA2000 HRPD Active handover
- can only be set to 1 if the UE has set bit number 26 to 1
13
- Inter-frequency handover
- can only be set to 1 if the UE has set bit number 25 to 1
14
- Measurement reporting event: Event A4  Neighbour > threshold
- Measurement reporting event: Event A5  Serving < threshold1 & Neighbour > threshold2

15
- Measurement reporting event: Event B1  Neighbour > threshold
- can only be set to 1 if the UE has set at least one of the bit number 22, 23, 24 or 26 to 1.
16
- Periodical measurement reporting for non-ANR related measurements

17
- Periodical measurement reporting for SON / ANR
- ANR related intra-frequency measurement reporting events
- can only be set to 1 if the UE has set bit number 5 to 1.
18
- ANR related inter-frequency measurement reporting events
- can only be set to 1 if the UE has set bit number 5 to 1.
19
- ANR related inter-RAT measurement reporting events
- can only be set to 1 if the UE has set bit number 5 to 1.
20
If bit number 7 is set to 1:
- RB combination 1: SRB1 and SRB2 for DCCH + 1x AM DRB
- RB combination 2: SRB1 and SRB2 for DCCH + 1x AM DRB + 1x UM DRB
- RB combination 3: SRB1 and SRB2 for DCCH + 2x AM DRB
- RB combination 4: SRB1 and SRB2 for DCCH + 2x AM DRB + 1x UM DRB
- RB combination 5: SRB1 and SRB2 for DCCH + 2x AM DRB + 2x UM DRB
- RB combination 6: SRB1 and SRB2 for DCCH + 3x AM DRB
- RB combination 7: SRB1 and SRB2 for DCCH + 3x AM DRB + 1x UM DRB
- RB combination 8: SRB1 and SRB2 for DCCH + 3x AM DRB + 2x UM DRB
- RB combination 9: SRB1 and SRB2 for DCCH + 4x AM DRB
- RB combination 10: SRB1 and SRB2 for DCCH + 4x AM DRB + 1x UM DRB
- RB combination 11: SRB1 and SRB2 for DCCH + 4x AM DRB + 2x UM DRB
- RB combination 12: SRB1 and SRB2 for DCCH + 5x AM DRB + 3x UM DRB
- RB combination 13: SRB1 and SRB2 for DCCH + 8x AM DRB
If bit number 7 is set to 0
- RB combinations 1, 3, 6, 9 and 13
- Regardless of what bit number 7 and bit number 20 is set to, UE shall support RB combinations 1, 3, 6 and 9
- Regardless of what bit number 20 is set to, if bit number 7 is set to 1, UE shall support RB combinations 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 7, 9 and 10

21
- Predefined intra- and inter-subframe frequency hopping for PUSCH with N_sb > 1
- Predefined inter-subframe frequency hopping for PUSCH with N_sb > 1

22
- UTRAN measurements, reporting and measurement reporting event B2 in E-UTRA connected mode

23
- GERAN measurements, reporting and measurement reporting event B2 in E-UTRA connected mode

24
- 1xRTT measurements, reporting and measurement reporting event B2 in E-UTRA connected mode

25
- Inter-frequency measurements and reporting in E-UTRA connected mode 

26
- HRPD measurements, reporting and measurement reporting event B2 in E-UTRA connected mode

27
Undefined

28
Undefined

29
Undefined

30
Undefined

31
Undefined

32
Undefined


Clarification for mobility from EUTRAN and inter-frequency handover within EUTRAN
There are several feature groups related to mobility from E-UTRAN and inter-frequency handover within EUTRAN. The description of these features is based on the assumption that we have 5 main functions related to mobility from E-UTRAN:
A.	 Support of measurements and cell reselection procedure in idle mode
B.	 Support of RRC release with redirection procedure in connected mode
C.	 Support of Network Assisted Cell Change in connected mode
D.	 Support of measurements and reporting in connected mode
E.	 Support of handover procedure in connected mode
All functions can be applied for mobility to Inter-frequency to EUTRAN, GERAN, UTRAN, CDMA2000 HRPD and CDMA2000 1xRTT except for function C) which is only applicable for mobility to GERAN. Table B.1-2 below summarises the mobility functions that are supported based on the UE capability signaling (band support) and the setting of the feature group support indicators.
Table B.1-2: Mobility from E-UTRAN
Feature
GERAN
UTRAN
HRPD
1xRTT
EUTRAN
A. Measurements and cell reselection procedure in E-UTRA idle mode
Supported if GERAN band support is indicated
Supported if UTRAN band support is indicated
Supported if CDMA2000 HRPD band support is indicated
Supported if CDMA2000 1xRTT band support is indicated
Supported for supported bands
B. RRC release with blind redirection procedure in E-UTRA connected mode
Supported if GERAN band support is indicated
Supported if UTRAN band support is indicated
Supported if CDMA2000 HRPD band support is indicated
Supported if CDMA2000 1xRTT band support is indicated
Supported for supported bands
C. Cell Change Order (with or without) Network Assisted Cell Change) in E-UTRA connected mode
Group 10
N.A.
N.A
N.A
N.A.
D. Inter-frequency/RAT measurements, reporting and measurement reporting event B2 (for inter-RAT) in E-UTRA connected mode
Group 23
Group 22
Group 26
Group 24
Group 25
E. Inter-frequency/RAT handover procedure in E-UTRA connected mode
Group 9 (GSM_connected handover)
Separate UE capability bit defined in TS 36.306 for PS handover
Group 8 (PS handover)
Group 12
Group 11
Group 13

Note that the measurements and reporting function (D) is distinct from the redirection (B), CCO (C) and handover (E) functions. In case measurements and reporting function is not supported, the network may still issue the mobility procedures in a blind fashion.
B.2	CSG support
In this release of the protocol, it is mandatory for the UE to support a minimum set of CSG functionality consisting of:
-	Identifying whether a cell is CSG or not;
-	Ignoring CSG cells in cell selection/reselection.
Additional CSG functionality in AS, i.e. the requirement to detect and camp on CSG cells when the "allowed CSG list" is available or when manual CSG selection is triggered by the user, are related to the corresponding NAS features. This additional AS functionality consists of:
-	Manual CSG selection;
-	Autonomous CSG search;
-	Implicit priority handling for cell reselection with CSG cells.
It is possible that this additional CSG functionality in AS is not supported or tested in early UE implementations.
Note that since the above AS features relate to idle mode operations, the capability support is not signalled to the network. For these reasons, no feature group indicator is assigned to this feature to indicate early support in Rel-8.


Annex C (informative):
Change history

Change history
Date
TSG #
TSG Doc.
CR
Rev
Subject/Comment
Old
New
12/2007
RP-38
RP-070920
-

Approved at TSG-RAN #38 and placed under Change Control
1.0.0
8.0.0
03/2008
RP-39
RP-080163
0001
4
CR to 36.331 with Miscellaneous corrections
8.0.0
8.1.0
03/2008
RP-39
RP-080164
0002
2
CR to 36.331 to convert RRC to agreed ASN.1 format
8.0.0
8.1.0
05/2008
RP-40
RP-080361
0003
1
CR to 36.331 on Miscellaneous clarifications/ corrections
8.1.0
8.2.0
09/2008
RP-41
RP-080693
0005
-
CR on Miscellaneous corrections and clarifications
8.2.0
8.3.0
12/2008
RP-42
RP-081021
0006
-
Miscellaneous corrections and clarifications
8.3.0
8.4.0
03/2009
RP-43
RP-090131
0007
-
Correction to the Counter Check procedure
8.4.0
8.5.0

RP-43
RP-090131
0008
-
CR to 36.331-UE Actions on Receiving SIB11
8.4.0
8.5.0

RP-43
RP-090131
0009
1
Spare usage on BCCH
8.4.0
8.5.0

RP-43
RP-090131
0010
-
Issues in handling optional IE upon absence in GERAN NCL
8.4.0
8.5.0

RP-43
RP-090131
0011
-
CR to 36.331 on Removal of useless RLC re-establishment at RB release
8.4.0
8.5.0

RP-43
RP-090131
0012
1
Clarification to RRC level padding at PCCH and BCCH
8.4.0
8.5.0

RP-43
RP-090131
0013
-
Removal of Inter-RAT message
8.4.0
8.5.0

RP-43
RP-090131
0014
-
Padding of the SRB-ID for security input
8.4.0
8.5.0

RP-43
RP-090131
0015
-
Validity of ETWS SIB
8.4.0
8.5.0

RP-43
RP-090131
0016
1
Configuration of the Two-Intervals-SPS
8.4.0
8.5.0

RP-43
RP-090131
0017
-
Corrections on Scaling Factor Values of Qhyst
8.4.0
8.5.0

RP-43
RP-090131
0018
1
Optionality of srsMaxUppts
8.4.0
8.5.0

RP-43
RP-090131
0019
-
CR for discussion on field name for common and dedicated IE
8.4.0
8.5.0

RP-43
RP-090131
0020
-
Corrections to Connected mode mobility
8.4.0
8.5.0

RP-43
RP-090131
0021
-
Clarification regarding the measurement reporting procedure
8.4.0
8.5.0

RP-43
RP-090131
0022
1
Corrections on s-Measure
8.4.0
8.5.0

RP-43
RP-090131
0023
1
R1 of CR0023 (R2-091029) on combination of SPS and TTI bundling for TDD
8.4.0
8.5.0

RP-43
RP-090131
0024
-
L3 filtering for path loss measurements
8.4.0
8.5.0

RP-43
RP-090131
0025
1
S-measure handling for reportCGI
8.4.0
8.5.0

RP-43
RP-090131
0026
1
Measurement configuration clean up
8.4.0
8.5.0

RP-43
RP-090131
0027
-
Alignment of measurement quantities for UTRA
8.4.0
8.5.0

RP-43
RP-090131
0028
-
CR to 36.331 on L1 parameters ranges alignment
8.4.0
8.5.0

RP-43
RP-090131
0029
-
Default configuration for transmissionMode
8.4.0
8.5.0

RP-43
RP-090131
0030
-
CR to 36.331 on RRC Parameters for MAC, RLC and PDCP
8.4.0
8.5.0

RP-43
RP-090131
0031
1
CR to 36.331 - Clarification on Configured PRACH Freq Offset
8.4.0
8.5.0

RP-43
RP-090131
0032
-
Clarification on TTI bundling configuration
8.4.0
8.5.0

RP-43
RP-090131
0033
1
Update of R2-091039 on Inter-RAT UE Capability
8.4.0
8.5.0

RP-43
RP-090133
0034
-
Feature Group Support Indicators
8.4.0
8.5.0

RP-43
RP-090131
0036
-
Corrections to RLF detection
8.4.0
8.5.0

RP-43
RP-090131
0037
-
Indication of Dedicated Priority
8.4.0
8.5.0

RP-43
RP-090131
0038
2
Security Clean up
8.4.0
8.5.0

RP-43
RP-090131
0039
-
Correction of TTT value range
8.4.0
8.5.0

RP-43
RP-090131
0040
-
Correction on CDMA measurement result IE
8.4.0
8.5.0

RP-43
RP-090131
0041
1
Clarification of Measurement Reporting
8.4.0
8.5.0

RP-43
RP-090131
0042
-
Spare values in DL and UL Bandwidth in MIB and SIB2
8.4.0
8.5.0

RP-43
RP-090131
0044
1
Clarifications to System Information Block Type 8
8.4.0
8.5.0

RP-43
RP-090131
0045
-
Reception of ETWS secondary notification
8.4.0
8.5.0

RP-43
RP-090131
0046
1
Validity time for ETWS message Id and Sequence No
8.4.0
8.5.0

RP-43
RP-090131
0047
-
CR for Timers and constants values used during handover to E-UTRA
8.4.0
8.5.0

RP-43
RP-090131
0048
-
Inter-RAT Security Clarification
8.4.0
8.5.0

RP-43
RP-090131
0049
-
CR to 36.331 on consistent naming of 1xRTT identifiers
8.4.0
8.5.0

RP-43
RP-090131
0050
-
Capturing RRC behavior regarding NAS local release
8.4.0
8.5.0

RP-43
RP-090131
0051
-
Report CGI before T321 expiry and UE null reporting
8.4.0
8.5.0

RP-43
RP-090131
0052
-
System Information and 3 hour validity
8.4.0
8.5.0

RP-43
RP-090131
0053
1
Inter-Node AS Signalling
8.4.0
8.5.0

RP-43
RP-090131
0054
-
Set of values for the parameter "messagePowerOffsetGroupB"
8.4.0
8.5.0

RP-43
RP-090131
0055
-
CR to paging reception for ETWS capable UEs in RRC_CONNECTED
8.4.0
8.5.0

RP-43
RP-090131
0056
1
CR for CSG related items in 36.331
8.4.0
8.5.0

RP-43
RP-090131
0057
1
SRS common configuration
8.4.0
8.5.0

RP-43
RP-090131
0058
-
RRC processing delay
8.4.0
8.5.0

RP-43
RP-090131
0059
-
CR for HNB Name
8.4.0
8.5.0

RP-43
RP-090131
0060
3
Handover to EUTRA delta configuration
8.4.0
8.5.0

RP-43
RP-090131
0063
-
Delivery of Message Identifier and Serial Number to upper layers for ETWS
8.4.0
8.5.0

RP-43
RP-090131
0066
-
Clarification on the maximum size of cell lists
8.4.0
8.5.0

RP-43
RP-090131
0067
-
Missing RRC messages in 'Protection of RRC messages'
8.4.0
8.5.0

RP-43
RP-090131
0069
1
Clarification on NAS Security Container
8.4.0
8.5.0

RP-43
RP-090131
0071
-
Extension of range of CQI/PMI configuration index
8.4.0
8.5.0

RP-43
RP-090131
0072
1
Access barring alleviation in RRC connection establishment
8.4.0
8.5.0

RP-43
RP-090367
0077
6
Corrections to feature group support indicators
8.4.0
8.5.0

RP-43
RP-090131
0078
-
CR from email discussion to capture DRX and TTT handling
8.4.0
8.5.0

RP-43
RP-090131
0079
1
Need Code handling on BCCH messages
8.4.0
8.5.0

RP-43
RP-090131
0080
-
Unification of T300 and T301 and removal of miscallaneous FFSs
8.4.0
8.5.0

RP-43
RP-090131
0084
1
Proposed CR modifying the code-point definitions of neighbourCellConfiguration
8.4.0
8.5.0

RP-43
RP-090131
0087
2
Remove Redundant Optionality in SIB8
8.4.0
8.5.0

RP-43
RP-090131
0089
-
Corrections to the generic error handling
8.4.0
8.5.0

RP-43
RP-090131
0090
-
Configurability of T301
8.4.0
8.5.0

RP-43
RP-090131
0091
1
Correction related to TTT
8.4.0
8.5.0

RP-43
RP-090131
0095
-
CR for 36.331 on SPS-config
8.4.0
8.5.0

RP-43
RP-090131
0096
2
CR for Deactivation of periodical measurement
8.4.0
8.5.0

RP-43
RP-090131
0099
2
SMC and reconfiguration
8.4.0
8.5.0

RP-43
RP-090131
0101
-
TDD handover
8.4.0
8.5.0

RP-43
RP-090131
0102
-
Corrections to system information acquisition
8.4.0
8.5.0

RP-43
RP-090131
0106
-
Some Corrections and Clarifications to 36.331
8.4.0
8.5.0

RP-43
RP-090131
0109
-
Clarification on the Maximum number of ROHC context sessions parameter
8.4.0
8.5.0

RP-43
RP-090131
0110
-
Transmission of rrm-Config at Inter-RAT Handover
8.4.0
8.5.0

RP-43
RP-090131
0111
1
Use of SameRefSignalsInNeighbor parameter
8.4.0
8.5.0

RP-43
RP-090131
0112
-
Default serving cell offset for measurement event A3
8.4.0
8.5.0

RP-43
RP-090131
0114
-
dl-EARFCN missing in HandoverPreparationInformation
8.4.0
8.5.0

RP-43
RP-090131
0115
-
Cleanup of references to 36.101
8.4.0
8.5.0

RP-43
RP-090131
0117
-
Correction to the value range of UE-Categories
8.4.0
8.5.0

RP-43
RP-090131
0122
1
Correction on RRC connection re-establishment
8.4.0
8.5.0

RP-43
RP-090131
0124
-
Performing Measurements to report CGI for CDMA2000
8.4.0
8.5.0

RP-43
RP-090131
0125
-
CDMA2000-SystemTimeInfo in VarMeasurementConfiguration
8.4.0
8.5.0

RP-43
RP-090131
0126
-
UE Capability Information for CDMA2000 1xRTT
8.4.0
8.5.0

RP-43
RP-090131
0127
-
CDMA2000 related editorial changes
8.4.0
8.5.0

RP-43
RP-090131
0128
-
Draft CR to 36.331 on State mismatch recovery at re-establishment
8.4.0
8.5.0

RP-43
RP-090131
0129
1
Draft CR to 36.331 on Renaming of AC barring related IEs
8.4.0
8.5.0

RP-43
RP-090131
0130
2
Draft CR to 36.331 on Inheriting of dedicated priorities at inter-RAT reselection
8.4.0
8.5.0

RP-43
RP-090131
0135
-
Proposed CR to 36.331 Description alignment for paging parameter, nB
8.4.0
8.5.0

RP-43
RP-090131
0139
2
Miscellaneous corrections and clarifications resulting from ASN.1 review
8.4.0
8.5.0

RP-43
RP-090131
0141
1
Correction regarding Redirection Information fo GERAN
8.4.0
8.5.0

RP-43
RP-090131
0142
-
Further ASN.1 review related issues
8.4.0
8.5.0

RP-43
RP-090131
0143
-
Periodic measurements
8.4.0
8.5.0

RP-43
RP-090131
0144
1
Further analysis on code point "OFF" for ri-ConfigIndex
8.4.0
8.5.0

RP-43
RP-090131
0145
1
Adding and deleting same measurement or configuration in one message
8.4.0
8.5.0

RP-43
RP-090131
0147
-
Corrections to IE dataCodingScheme in SIB11
8.4.0
8.5.0

RP-43
RP-090131
0148
-
Clarification on Mobility from E-UTRA
8.4.0
8.5.0

RP-43
RP-090131
0149
-
36.331 CR related to not applicable
8.4.0
8.5.0

RP-43
RP-090131
0150
1
UE radio capability transfer
8.4.0
8.5.0

RP-43
RP-090131
0151
-
CR to 36.331 on value of CDMA band classes
8.4.0
8.5.0

RP-43
RP-090131
0152
-
Corrections to DRB modification
8.4.0
8.5.0

RP-43
RP-090131
0153
-
Correction to presence condition for pdcp-config
8.4.0
8.5.0

RP-43
RP-090131
0155
-
TDD HARQ-ACK feedback mode
8.4.0
8.5.0

RP-43
RP-090275
0157
-
Corrections regarding use of carrierFreq for CDMA (SIB8) and GERAN (measObject)
8.4.0
8.5.0

RP-43
RP-090321
0156
1
Sending of GERAN SI/PSI information at Inter-RAT Handover
8.4.0
8.5.0

RP-43
RP-090339
0158
-
Clarification of CSG support
8.4.0
8.5.0
06/2009
RP-44
RP-090516
0159
-
Octet alignment of VarShortMAC-Input
8.5.0
8.6.0

RP-44
RP-090516
0160
3
Minor corrections to the feature grouping
8.5.0
8.6.0

RP-44
RP-090516
0161
-
Security clarification
8.5.0
8.6.0

RP-44
RP-090516
0162
1
Sending of GERAN SI/PSI information at Inter-RAT Handover
8.5.0
8.6.0

RP-44
RP-090516
0163
1
Correction of UE measurement model
8.5.0
8.6.0

RP-44
RP-090516
0164
-
Restricting the reconfiguration of UM RLC SN field size
8.5.0
8.6.0

RP-44
RP-090516
0165
1
36.331 CR on Clarification on cell change order from GERAN to E-UTRAN
8.5.0
8.6.0

RP-44
RP-090516
0166
-
36.331 CR - Handling of expired TAT and failed D-SR
8.5.0
8.6.0

RP-44
RP-090516
0167
1
Proposed CR to 36.331 Clarification on mandatory information in AS-Config
8.5.0
8.6.0

RP-44
RP-090516
0168
2
Miscellaneous small corrections
8.5.0
8.6.0

RP-44
RP-090516
0173
-
Clarification on the basis of delta signalling
8.5.0
8.6.0

RP-44
RP-090516
0177
-
CR on Alignment of CCCH and DCCH handling of missing mandatory field
8.5.0
8.6.0

RP-44
RP-090516
0180
2
Handling of Measurement Context During HO Preparation
8.5.0
8.6.0

RP-44
RP-090516
0181
-
Clarification of key-eNodeB-Star in AdditionalReestabInfo
8.5.0
8.6.0

RP-44
RP-090516
0182
1
UE Capability Transfer
8.5.0
8.6.0

RP-44
RP-090516
0186
1
Clarification regarding mobility from E-UTRA in-between SMC and SRB2/DRB setup
8.5.0
8.6.0

RP-44
RP-090516
0188
1
Correction and completion of specification conventions
8.5.0
8.6.0

RP-44
RP-090516
0195
2
RB combination in feature group indicator
8.5.0
8.6.0

RP-44
RP-090516
0196
1
CR for need code for fields in mobilityControlInfo
8.5.0
8.6.0

RP-44
RP-090497
0197
-
Alignment of pusch-HoppingOffset with 36.211
8.5.0
8.6.0

RP-44
RP-090570
0198
-
Explicit srb-Identity values for SRB1 and SRB2
8.5.0
8.6.0

RP-44
RP-090516
0199
-
Removing use of defaultValue for mac-MainConfig
8.5.0
8.6.0

Page 1


3GPP TS 36.331 V8.6.0 (2009-06)
2
Release 8


3GPP

